Manual Do Produto

00384268
OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission

System
V100R008
Product Description
Issue 07
Date 2010-11-30
HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD.

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2010. All rights reserved.
No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means without prior written
consent of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Trademarks and Permissions
and other Huawei trademarks are trademarks of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
All other trademarks and trade names mentioned in this document are the property of their respective holders.
Notice
The purchased products, services and features are stipulated by the contract made between Huawei and the
customer. All or part of the products, services and features described in this document may not be within the
purchase scope or the usage scope. Unless otherwise specified in the contract, all statements, information,
and recommendations in this document are provided "AS IS" without warranties, guarantees or representations
of any kind, either express or implied.
The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Every effort has been made in the
preparation of this document to ensure accuracy of the contents, but all statements, information, and
recommendations in this document do not constitute the warranty of any kind, express or implied.
Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Address: Huawei Industrial Base
Bantian, Longgang
Shenzhen 518129
People's Republic of China
Website: http://www.huawei.com
Email: support@huawei.com
Issue 07 (2010-11-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential i

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System
Product Description About This Document
About This Document
Purpose
This document describes the OptiX OSN 1500 in the terms of network application, functions,
hardware and software structure, and features.
Related Versions
The following table lists the product versions related to this document.
Product Name Version
OptiX OSN 1500 V100R008
Intended Audience
The intended audience of this document is network planning engineer.
Organization
This document is organized as follows.
Chapter Description
1 Network Application Describes the OptiX OSN 1500 and its position in the
network.
2 Function This chapter generally describes the features of the OptiX

OSN 1500 in the terms of capacity, interface, boards, OAM
and other functions.
3 Hardware Describes the mechanical structure and the adaptable

cabinet installation of the OptiX OSN 1500.
Issue 07 (2010-11-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential iii

About This Document Product Description
Chapter Description
4 Software Describes the software system of the OptiX OSN 1500. It

includes intelligent software, board software, NE software
and NM software.
5 Data Features Describes the Ethernet, RPR and ATM features of the
OptiX OSN 1500 in terms of function, application and
protection.
6 DCN Features This chapter describes the DCN feature supported by the
OptiX OSN 1500.
7 ASON Features This chapter introduces the ASON features of the OptiX
OSN 1500 in terms of service classes and application.
8 Protection Describes protection modes (including equipment level and

network level) and characteristics supported by the OptiX
OSN 1500.
9 Clock This chapter describes the clock function of the OptiX OSN
1500.
10 OAM This chapter describes main technical characteristics of the

OptiX OSN 1500 in terms of maintenance and centralized
management.
11 Security Management This chapter describes main technical characteristics of the

OptiX OSN 1500 in terms of safe operation.
12 Technical Specifications This chapter describes the hardware dimension, interface

specifications, transmission performance, environment
requirements and power specification for the OptiX OSN
1500.
13 Compliant Standards This appendix lists international standards to which the

OptiX OSN 1500 conforms in terms of design and
performance.
14 Basic Principle This appendix lists the basic principle of several

technologies which the OptiX OSN 1500 adopts.
Conventions
Symbol Conventions
The following symbols may be found in this document. They are defined as follows.
iv Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 07 (2010-11-30)

Symbol Description
Indicates a hazard with a high level of risk which, if not

avoided, will result in death or serious injury.
DANGER
Indicates a hazard with a medium or low level of risk which,

if not avoided, could result in minor or moderate injury.
WARNING
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation that, if not

avoided, could cause equipment damage, data loss, and
CAUTION
performance degradation, or unexpected results.
TIP Indicates a tip that may help you solve a problem or save
your time.
NOTE Provides additional information to emphasize or

supplement important points of the main text.
General Conventions
Convention Description
Times New Roman Normal paragraphs are in Times New Roman.
Boldface Names of files, directories, folders, and users are in boldface. For
example, log in as user root.
Italic Book titles are in italics.

Courier New Terminal display is in Courier New.
Command Conventions
Boldface The keywords of a command line are in boldface.
Italic Command arguments are in italic.
[] Items (keywords or arguments) in square brackets [ ] are

optional.
{ x | y | ... } Alternative items are grouped in braces and separated by

vertical bars. One is selected.
[ x | y | ... ] Optional alternative items are grouped in square brackets

and separated by vertical bars. One or none is selected.
{ x | y | ... } * Alternative items are grouped in braces and separated by

vertical bars. A minimum of one or a maximum of all can
be selected.
Issue 07 (2010-11-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential v

GUI Conventions
Boldface Buttons, menus, parameters, tabs, window, and dialog titles are in
boldface. For example, click OK.
> Multi-level menus are in boldface and separated by the ">" signs. For
example, choose File > Create > Folder.
Keyboard Operation
Format Description
Key Press the key. For example, press Enter and press Tab.
Key 1+Key 2 Press the keys concurrently. For example, pressing Ctrl+Alt+A means the
three keys should be pressed concurrently.
Key 1, Key 2 Press the keys in turn. For example, pressing Alt, A means the two keys
should be pressed in turn.
Mouse Operation
Action Description
Click Select and release the primary mouse button without moving the pointer.
Double-click Press the primary mouse button twice continuously and quickly without
moving the pointer.
Drag Press and hold the primary mouse button and move the pointer to a certain
position.
Update History
Updates between document versions are cumulative. Therefore, the latest document version
contains all updates made to previous versions.
Updates in Issue 07 (2010-11-30) Based on Product Version V100R008

This document of the V100R008 version is of the seventh release. Compared with issue 06, issue
07 incorporates the following updates:
l In section "Operation and Maintenance", a maximum number of 930 alarms are permitted.
vi Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 07 (2010-11-30)

l In section “Data Processing Boards", interface type of the N1EGT2 board is changed to
1000BASE-SX/LX/VX/ZX.

This document of the V100R008 version is of the sixth release. Compared with issue 05, issue
06 has the following optimized contents:
l In section "Power Supply Specification", the description of specification is modified.

This document of the V100R008 version is of the fifth release. Compared with issue 04, issue
l In section "Environmental Specification" and "Environment Requirement", the description
of the specifications is modified.
l In section "SDH Processing Boards", the interface type of N1SLT1 board is modified.
l In section "TPS Protection for Tributary Boards", the supported TPS protection schemes
and boards of OpitX OSN 1500A are added.

This document of the V100R008 version is of the fourth release. Compared with issue 03, issue
Several bugs are fixed.

This document of the V100R008 version is of the third release. Compared with issue 02, issue
l Optimize the figures.
l Several bugs are fixed.

This document of the V100R008 version is of the second release. Compared with issue 01, issue
02 has the following revised or optimized contents:
l The , R1CXL series boards are added.
l Chapter 10 OAM is optimized, and chapter 11 Security Management is added.

This document of the V100R008 version is of the first release. Compared with the V100R007,
this version has the following new or optimized content:
l The description is added for the Q3CXL1, Q3CXL4, Q3CXL16, N1SLQ4A, N1SLD4A,
N1SL4A, N1SLQ1A, N1SL1A, and N2BPA boards.
l The following sections are added: 2.14 Simulation Package Loading and Simulation
Package Diffusion, 2.19 DCC Transparent Transmission Through External Clock
Issue 07 (2010-11-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential vii

Interfaces, 2.20 NSF Function, Shared Mesh Restoration Trail and Alarms of the Control
Plane.
l The description about DCC allocation modes is modified in 6.1 Overview.
l Perfect 13 Compliant Standards, describes the standards and protocols complied with by
the OSN equipment.

This document of the V100R007 version is of the third release. Compared with issue 02, issue
03 has the following revised or optimized content.
l The N3EGS4 board is added.
l ASON Clock Tracing is added.
l In 2.9 ASON Features and 2.22 Clock, the description of ASON clock is added.
l Several bugs are fixed.

This document of the V100R007 version is of the second release. Compared with issue 01, issue
02 has the following revised or optimized contents:
l The access capacity in 2.2.2 Service Access Capacity is rectified.
l Related information on the N1SL16A and N2SL16A is supplemented.
l In 12.8 Power Supply Specification, the Max. current is rectified.
l In 12.13 Power Consumption and Weight of Boards, the power and weight is updated.
l 12.9 Electromagnetic Compatibility, 12.11 Environmental Specification and 12.12
Environment Requirement are revised.
l The interface type, BNC is all changed to SMB.
l The mapping relation between boards and slots in 3.3.2 Slot Allocation and 3.4.2 Slot
Allocation are optimized.

This document of the V100R007 version is of the first release. Compared with the V100R006,
this version has the following new or optimized contents:
l Description of the N3SL16, N3SL16A, N2PQ3, N2PD3, N2PL3, N2PL3A, TN11OBU1,
TN11MR2, TN11MR4, TN11CMR2 and TN11CMR4 is added.
l Sections of the new features are added.
– Section "Intelligent Optical Power Adjustment"
– Section "External Clock Output Shutdown Function"
– 2.15 Hot Patch
– 2.16 Inter-Board Alarm Suppression
– 2.17 PRBS Function
– 2.18 Board Version Replacement

The updated contents are as follows.
viii Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 07 (2010-11-30)

Several bugs in this document of the previous version are fixed.

The updated contents are as follows.
Several bugs in this document of the previous version are fixed.

This document of the V100R006 version is of the first release.
Issue 07 (2010-11-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential ix

Product Description Contents
Contents
About This Document...................................................................................................................iii

1 Network Application.................................................................................................................1-1
2 Function........................................................................................................................................2-1
2.1 Capacity...........................................................................................................................................................2-3
2.1.1 Cross-Connect Capacity.........................................................................................................................2-3
2.1.2 Slot Access Capacity..............................................................................................................................2-3
2.2 Service.............................................................................................................................................................2-5
2.2.1 Service Type...........................................................................................................................................2-6
2.2.2 Service Access Capacity........................................................................................................................ 2-6
2.3 Interface...........................................................................................................................................................2-7
2.3.1 Service Interfaces...................................................................................................................................2-8
2.3.2 Administration and Auxiliary Interfaces................................................................................................2-8
2.4 Networking......................................................................................................................................................2-9
2.5 Built-in WDM Technology...........................................................................................................................2-11
2.6 110 V/220 V Power Supply..........................................................................................................................2-12
2.7 REG Function................................................................................................................................................2-12
2.8 Protection......................................................................................................................................................2-14
2.8.1 Equipment Level Protection.................................................................................................................2-14
2.8.2 Network Level Protection....................................................................................................................2-15
2.9 ASON Features.............................................................................................................................................2-16
2.10 TCM............................................................................................................................................................2-16
2.11 E13/M13 Function.......................................................................................................................................2-16
2.12 RPR.............................................................................................................................................................2-17
2.13 ETH-OAM..................................................................................................................................................2-17
2.14 Simulation Package Loading and Simulation Package Diffusion...............................................................2-18
2.15 Hot Patch.....................................................................................................................................................2-18
2.16 Inter-Board Alarm Suppression..................................................................................................................2-19
2.17 PRBS Function............................................................................................................................................2-19
2.18 Board Version Replacement........................................................................................................................2-20
2.19 DCC Transparent Transmission Through External Clock Interfaces.........................................................2-20
2.20 NSF Function..............................................................................................................................................2-21
2.21 OAM Information Interworking..................................................................................................................2-22
Issue 07 (2010-11-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential xi

Contents Product Description
2.22 Clock...........................................................................................................................................................2-22
2.23 OAM............................................................................................................................................................2-22
2.24 Security Management..................................................................................................................................2-23
3 Hardware......................................................................................................................................3-1
3.1 Overview.........................................................................................................................................................3-2
3.2 Cabinet............................................................................................................................................................3-2
3.3 OptiX OSN 1500A Subrack............................................................................................................................3-3
3.3.1 Structure.................................................................................................................................................3-4
3.3.2 Slot Allocation........................................................................................................................................3-4
3.4 OptiX OSN 1500B Subrack............................................................................................................................3-6
3.4.1 Structure.................................................................................................................................................3-6
3.4.2 Slot Allocation........................................................................................................................................3-7
3.5 Boards..............................................................................................................................................................3-9
3.5.1 Board Type.............................................................................................................................................3-9
3.5.2 Cross-Connect and System Control Boards.........................................................................................3-12
3.5.3 SDH Processing Boards.......................................................................................................................3-14
3.5.4 PDH Processing Boards.......................................................................................................................3-20
3.5.5 DDN Processing Boards.......................................................................................................................3-25
3.5.6 Data Processing Boards........................................................................................................................3-26
3.5.7 WDM Boards.......................................................................................................................................3-35
3.5.8 Optical Booster Amplifier Boards........................................................................................................3-37
3.5.9 Auxiliary Boards..................................................................................................................................3-38
4 Software.......................................................................................................................................4-1
4.1 Overview.........................................................................................................................................................4-2
4.2 Board Software................................................................................................................................................4-2
4.3 NE Software....................................................................................................................................................4-3
4.4 T2000 System..................................................................................................................................................4-4
4.5 ASON Software...............................................................................................................................................4-5
5 Data Features...............................................................................................................................5-1
5.1 Ethernet Features.............................................................................................................................................5-2
5.1.1 Functions................................................................................................................................................5-2
5.1.2 Application.............................................................................................................................................5-9
5.1.3 Protection.............................................................................................................................................5-13
5.2 RPR Features.................................................................................................................................................5-17
5.2.1 Functions..............................................................................................................................................5-18
5.2.2 Application...........................................................................................................................................5-21
5.2.3 Protection.............................................................................................................................................5-24
5.3 ATM Features...............................................................................................................................................5-28
5.3.1 Functions..............................................................................................................................................5-28
5.3.2 Application...........................................................................................................................................5-30
5.3.3 Protection.............................................................................................................................................5-34
xii Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 07 (2010-11-30)

5.4 SAN Features................................................................................................................................................5-35

5.5 DDN Features................................................................................................................................................5-36
5.5.1 Functions..............................................................................................................................................5-36
5.5.2 Application...........................................................................................................................................5-37
5.5.3 Protection.............................................................................................................................................5-37
6 DCN Features..............................................................................................................................6-1
6.1 Overview.........................................................................................................................................................6-2
6.1.1 Background of SDH DCN......................................................................................................................6-3
6.1.2 SDH DCN Solutions..............................................................................................................................6-3
6.1.3 DCC Resource Allocation Modes..........................................................................................................6-4
6.2 HWECC..........................................................................................................................................................6-4
6.2.1 Features..................................................................................................................................................6-4
6.2.2 Application.............................................................................................................................................6-5
6.3 IP Over DCC...................................................................................................................................................6-6
6.3.1 Features..................................................................................................................................................6-7
6.3.2 Application.............................................................................................................................................6-7
6.4 OSI Over DCC................................................................................................................................................6-8
6.4.1 Features..................................................................................................................................................6-8
6.4.2 Application.............................................................................................................................................6-9
7 ASON Features...........................................................................................................................7-1
7.1 Automatic Discovery of the Topologies.........................................................................................................7-3
7.1.1 Auto-Discovery of Control Links..........................................................................................................7-3
7.1.2 Auto-Discovery of TE Links..................................................................................................................7-5
7.2 End-to-End Service Configuration..................................................................................................................7-6
7.3 Mesh Networking Protection and Restoration................................................................................................7-8
7.4 ASON Clock Tracing......................................................................................................................................7-9
7.5 SLA...............................................................................................................................................................7-12
7.6 Diamond Services.........................................................................................................................................7-14
7.7 Gold Services................................................................................................................................................7-20
7.8 Silver Services...............................................................................................................................................7-21
7.9 Copper Services.............................................................................................................................................7-24
7.10 Iron Services................................................................................................................................................7-25
7.11 Tunnels........................................................................................................................................................7-25
7.12 Service Association.....................................................................................................................................7-27
7.13 Service Optimization...................................................................................................................................7-29
7.14 Service Migration........................................................................................................................................7-29
7.15 Reverting Services to Original Routes........................................................................................................7-30
7.16 Preset Restoring Trail..................................................................................................................................7-32
7.17 Shared Mesh Restoration Trail....................................................................................................................7-32
7.18 Equilibrium of Network Traffic..................................................................................................................7-33
7.19 Shared Risk Link Group..............................................................................................................................7-34
7.20 ASON Trail Group......................................................................................................................................7-35
Issue 07 (2010-11-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential xiii

7.21 Protocol Encryption.....................................................................................................................................7-36

7.22 Alarms of the Control Plane........................................................................................................................7-36
8 Protection.....................................................................................................................................8-1
8.1 Equipment Level Protection............................................................................................................................8-2
8.1.1 TPS Protection for Tributary Boards.....................................................................................................8-2
8.1.2 1+1 Hot Backup for the Cross-Connect, Timing and SCC Units..........................................................8-3
8.1.3 1+1 Protection for Ethernet Boards........................................................................................................8-4
8.1.4 1+1 Protection for ATM Boards............................................................................................................8-5
8.1.5 1+1 Hot Backup for the Power Interface Unit.......................................................................................8-6
8.1.6 Protection for the Wavelength Conversion Unit....................................................................................8-6
8.1.7 1:N Protection for the +3.3 V Board Power Supply..............................................................................8-7
8.1.8 Board Protection Schemes Under Abnormal Conditions.......................................................................8-7
8.2 Network Level Protection...............................................................................................................................8-7
8.2.1 Linear MSP............................................................................................................................................8-8
8.2.2 MSP Ring...............................................................................................................................................8-9
8.2.3 SNCP....................................................................................................................................................8-11
8.2.4 DNI.......................................................................................................................................................8-16
8.2.5 Fiber-Shared Virtual Trail Protection.................................................................................................. 8-18
8.2.6 Optical-Path-Shared MSP....................................................................................................................8-18
8.2.7 RPR Protection.....................................................................................................................................8-20
8.2.8 VP-Ring/VC-Ring Protection.............................................................................................................. 8-21
9 Clock.............................................................................................................................................9-1
9.1 Clock Source...................................................................................................................................................9-2
9.1.1 External Clock Source............................................................................................................................9-2
9.1.2 Line Clock Source..................................................................................................................................9-2
9.1.3 Tributary Clock Source..........................................................................................................................9-2
9.1.4 Internal Clock Source.............................................................................................................................9-3
9.2 Clock Working Mode......................................................................................................................................9-3
9.2.1 Locked Mode..........................................................................................................................................9-3
9.2.2 Holdover Mode......................................................................................................................................9-3
9.2.3 Free-Run Mode......................................................................................................................................9-3
9.3 Clock Outputs..................................................................................................................................................9-3
9.4 Clock Protection..............................................................................................................................................9-4
9.4.1 Clock Configuration with SSM Not Enabled ........................................................................................9-4
9.4.2 Clock Configuration with Standard SSM Enabled ...............................................................................9-5
9.4.3 Clock Configuration with Extended SSM Enabled ...............................................................................9-6
9.5 Tributary Retiming..........................................................................................................................................9-8
9.5.1 Retiming Principle..................................................................................................................................9-8
9.5.2 Application of the Retiming Function....................................................................................................9-8
10 OAM.........................................................................................................................................10-1
10.1 Operation and Maintenance........................................................................................................................ 10-2
xiv Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 07 (2010-11-30)

10.2 Network Management.................................................................................................................................10-3
11 Security Management............................................................................................................11-1
11.1 Authentication Management.......................................................................................................................11-2
11.2 Authorization Management.........................................................................................................................11-2
11.3 Network Security Management...................................................................................................................11-2
11.4 System Security Management.....................................................................................................................11-3
11.5 Log Management.........................................................................................................................................11-3
11.5.1 NE Security Log Management...........................................................................................................11-4
11.5.2 Syslog Management...........................................................................................................................11-4
12 Technical Specifications.......................................................................................................12-1
12.1 Interface Types............................................................................................................................................12-3
12.2 Specifications of the Optical Interface........................................................................................................12-3
12.2.1 SDH Optical Interface........................................................................................................................12-4
12.2.2 Ethernet Optical Interface..................................................................................................................12-8
12.2.3 ATM Optical Interface.......................................................................................................................12-9
12.2.4 Laser Safety Class............................................................................................................................12-10
12.3 Specifications of Electrical Interfaces.......................................................................................................12-10
12.3.1 PDH Electrical Interface..................................................................................................................12-11
12.3.2 DDN Interface..................................................................................................................................12-11
12.3.3 Auxiliary Interface...........................................................................................................................12-12
12.4 Clock Timing and Synchronization Performance.....................................................................................12-13
12.4.1 Clock Interface Type........................................................................................................................12-13
12.4.2 Timing and Synchronization Performance.......................................................................................12-14
12.5 Transmission Performance........................................................................................................................12-14
12.6 Timeslot Numbering.................................................................................................................................12-14
12.7 Cabinet and Subrack Specification...........................................................................................................12-15
12.8 Power Supply Specification......................................................................................................................12-16
12.9 Electromagnetic Compatibility.................................................................................................................12-16
12.10 Safety Certification.................................................................................................................................12-17
12.11 Environmental Specification...................................................................................................................12-19
12.12 Environment Requirement......................................................................................................................12-19
12.12.1 Environment for Storage................................................................................................................12-19
12.12.2 Environment for Transportation.....................................................................................................12-21
12.12.3 Environment for Operation............................................................................................................12-24
12.13 Power Consumption and Weight of Boards............................................................................................12-26
13 Compliant Standards.............................................................................................................13-1
13.1 ITU-T Recommendations............................................................................................................................13-2
13.2 IEEE Standards...........................................................................................................................................13-5
13.3 IETF Standards............................................................................................................................................13-6
13.4 ANSI Standards...........................................................................................................................................13-6
13.5 Environment Related Standards..................................................................................................................13-6
Issue 07 (2010-11-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential xv

13.6 EMC Standards...........................................................................................................................................13-7

13.7 Safety Compliance Standards......................................................................................................................13-8
13.8 Protection Standards....................................................................................................................................13-8
13.9 ASON Standards.........................................................................................................................................13-9
14 Basic Principle.........................................................................................................................14-1
14.1 Introduction to SDH....................................................................................................................................14-2
14.1.1 SDH Levels........................................................................................................................................14-2
14.1.2 Multiplexing Structure....................................................................................................................... 14-2
14.1.3 Basic Frame Structure........................................................................................................................14-3
14.1.4 SOH Description................................................................................................................................14-3
14.1.5 Path Overhead (POH) Bytes Description...........................................................................................14-7
14.2 Introduction to ATM...................................................................................................................................14-8
14.2.1 Introduction to ATM..........................................................................................................................14-8
14.2.2 ATM Cell Structure............................................................................................................................14-8
14.3 Introduction to Ethernet.............................................................................................................................. 14-9
14.3.1 Basic Technologies............................................................................................................................ 14-9
14.3.2 Ethernet Frame Structure.................................................................................................................14-10
14.4 Link Aggregation......................................................................................................................................14-11
14.4.1 Concepts...........................................................................................................................................14-11
14.4.2 Characteristics..................................................................................................................................14-12
14.5 Introduction to MPLS................................................................................................................................14-12
14.5.1 Overview..........................................................................................................................................14-12
14.5.2 Encapsulation Format.......................................................................................................................14-13
14.6 QinQ Principle...........................................................................................................................................14-14
14.6.1 Introduction to QinQ........................................................................................................................14-14
14.6.2 QinQ Data Frame Structure..............................................................................................................14-14
A Glossary.....................................................................................................................................A-1
A.1 Numerics........................................................................................................................................................A-3
A.2 A....................................................................................................................................................................A-3
A.3 B....................................................................................................................................................................A-5
A.4 C....................................................................................................................................................................A-6
A.5 D....................................................................................................................................................................A-9
A.6 E...................................................................................................................................................................A-10
A.7 F...................................................................................................................................................................A-12
A.8 G..................................................................................................................................................................A-14
A.9 H..................................................................................................................................................................A-14
A.10 I..................................................................................................................................................................A-15
A.11 J..................................................................................................................................................................A-16
A.12 L.................................................................................................................................................................A-16
A.13 M................................................................................................................................................................A-18
A.14 N................................................................................................................................................................A-19
A.15 O................................................................................................................................................................A-20
xvi Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 07 (2010-11-30)

A.16 P.................................................................................................................................................................A-21
A.17 Q................................................................................................................................................................A-23
A.18 R................................................................................................................................................................A-23
A.19 S.................................................................................................................................................................A-25
A.20 T.................................................................................................................................................................A-28
A.21 U................................................................................................................................................................A-29
A.22 V................................................................................................................................................................A-30
A.23 W...............................................................................................................................................................A-30
Issue 07 (2010-11-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential xvii

Product Description Figures
Figures
Figure 1-1 OptiX OSN 1500A.............................................................................................................................1-1

Figure 1-2 OptiX OSN 1500B..............................................................................................................................1-2
Figure 1-3 Network application of the OptiX OSN 1500....................................................................................1-3
Figure 2-1 Access capacity of the slots in the OptiX OSN 1500A subrack (Q2/Q3CXL)..................................2-3
Figure 2-2 Access capacity of the slots in the OptiX OSN 1500A subrack (R1CXL)........................................2-4
Figure 2-3 Access capacity of the slots in the OptiX OSN 1500B subrack (Q2/Q3CXL)..................................2-4
Figure 2-4 Access capacity of the slots in the OptiX OSN 1500B subrack (R1CXL) ........................................2-5
Figure 2-5 Hybrid application of ADM and REG..............................................................................................2-13
Figure 2-6 Application of DCC transparent transmission through external clock interfaces............................ 2-21
Figure 3-1 Appearance of an ETSI cabinet..........................................................................................................3-2
Figure 3-2 Structure of the OptiX OSN 1500A subrack......................................................................................3-4
Figure 3-3 Slot layout of the OptiX OSN 1500A subrack...................................................................................3-5
Figure 3-4 Slot layout of the OptiX OSN 1500A subrack after the division of slots..........................................3-5
Figure 3-5 Structure of the OptiX OSN 1500B subrack......................................................................................3-6
Figure 3-6 Slot layout of the OptiX OSN 1500B subrack...................................................................................3-7
Figure 3-7 Slot layout of the OptiX OSN 1500B subrack (after the division of slots)........................................3-8
Figure 3-8 System architecture of the OptiX OSN 1500................................................................................... 3-10
Figure 4-1 Software system structure of the OptiX OSN 1500...........................................................................4-2
Figure 4-2 ASON software architecture...............................................................................................................4-5
Figure 5-1 EPL service based on port................................................................................................................5-10
Figure 5-2 Port-shared EVPL services...............................................................................................................5-10
Figure 5-3 EVPL service based on VLAN ID................................................................................................... 5-11
Figure 5-4 EVPL service based on MPLS......................................................................................................... 5-11
Figure 5-5 EVPL service based on QinQ...........................................................................................................5-11
Figure 5-6 EPLAN service.................................................................................................................................5-12
Figure 5-7 EVPLAN service..............................................................................................................................5-13
Figure 5-8 Dynamic bandwidth adjustment through LCAS.............................................................................. 5-14
Figure 5-9 Virtual concatenation group protection through LCAS....................................................................5-15
Figure 5-10 RPR ring.........................................................................................................................................5-17
Figure 5-11 Spatial reuse....................................................................................................................................5-20
Figure 5-12 Fairness algorithm when the weight is 1........................................................................................5-21
Figure 5-13 Fairness algorithm when the weights are different.........................................................................5-21
Figure 5-14 EVPL service accessing, forwarding and stripping........................................................................5-22
Issue 07 (2010-11-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential xix

Figures Product Description
Figure 5-15 EVPL service convergence.............................................................................................................5-23

Figure 5-16 RPR EVPLAN service....................................................................................................................5-24
Figure 5-17 Wrapping protection.......................................................................................................................5-25
Figure 5-18 Steering protection..........................................................................................................................5-26
Figure 5-19 Wrapping+steering protection........................................................................................................5-27
Figure 5-20 Application of bandwidth exclusive ATM services.......................................................................5-32
Figure 5-21 VP-Ring/VC-Ring..........................................................................................................................5-33
Figure 5-22 IMA service networking.................................................................................................................5-34
Figure 6-1 DCN network......................................................................................................................................6-2
Figure 6-2 Positions of DCC bytes in SDH overheads........................................................................................6-3
Figure 6-3 Networking with extended ECC.........................................................................................................6-5
Figure 6-4 OAM information transparently transmitted by OptiX OSN equipment (ECC)................................6-6
Figure 6-5 OAM information transparently transmitted by third-party equipment (ECC)..................................6-6
Figure 6-6 OAM information transparently transmitted by the third-party equipment (IP)................................6-7
Figure 6-7 OAM information transparently transmitted by the OptiX OSN equipment (IP)..............................6-8
Figure 6-8 OAM information transparently transmitted by the third-party equipment (OSI).............................6-9
Figure 6-9 OAM information transparently transmitted by the OptiX OSN equipment (OSI).........................6-10
Figure 7-1 Auto-discovery of control links..........................................................................................................7-3
Figure 7-2 Management of control topology.......................................................................................................7-4
Figure 7-3 TE link auto-discovery.......................................................................................................................7-6
Figure 7-4 End-to-end service configuration.......................................................................................................7-7
Figure 7-5 Trail restoration..................................................................................................................................7-9
Figure 7-6 ASON clock subnet..........................................................................................................................7-11
Figure 7-7 Diamond Services.............................................................................................................................7-15
Figure 7-8 Gold services....................................................................................................................................7-20
Figure 7-9 A silver service.................................................................................................................................7-22
Figure 7-10 Tunnel.............................................................................................................................................7-26
Figure 7-11 Lower cross-connection..................................................................................................................7-26
Figure 7-12 Service association.........................................................................................................................7-28
Figure 7-13 Service association.........................................................................................................................7-28
Figure 7-14 Shared mesh restoration trail..........................................................................................................7-32
Figure 7-15 Traffic equilibrium.........................................................................................................................7-34
Figure 7-16 LCAS (different path).....................................................................................................................7-35
Figure 7-17 LCAS (same path)..........................................................................................................................7-35
Figure 8-1 End-to-end conversion between an unprotected trail and an SNCP-protected trail.........................8-12
Figure 8-2 Principle of multipath protection......................................................................................................8-13
Figure 8-3 SNCMP networking.........................................................................................................................8-14
Figure 8-4 SNCMP service route in the case of single point failure..................................................................8-15
Figure 8-5 SNCMP service route in the case of multipoint failure....................................................................8-16
Figure 8-6 DNI protection of two SNCP rings...................................................................................................8-17
Figure 8-7 Fiber-shared virtual trail protection..................................................................................................8-18
Figure 8-8 Optical-path-shared MSP.................................................................................................................8-19
xx Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 07 (2010-11-30)

Product Description Figures
Figure 8-9 One higher-rate line shared by two lower-rate lines.........................................................................8-19

Figure 8-10 One line shared by two lines of the same rate................................................................................8-19
Figure 8-11 Example of bidirectional RPR........................................................................................................8-20
Figure 8-12 RPR wrapping protection............................................................................................................... 8-21
Figure 8-13 RPR steering protection..................................................................................................................8-21
Figure 8-14 VP-Ring/VC-Ring protection.........................................................................................................8-22
Figure 9-1 Clock networking with SSM not enabled...........................................................................................9-5
Figure 9-2 Application of the standard SSM........................................................................................................9-6
Figure 9-3 Clock lock ring formed when the standard SSM is enabled...............................................................9-7
Figure 9-4 Application of clock source ID...........................................................................................................9-7
Figure 9-5 Retiming principle diagram................................................................................................................9-8
Figure 9-6 SDH transmission network without retiming.....................................................................................9-9
Figure 9-7 SDH transmission network with retiming........................................................................................9-10
Figure 11-1 Schematic diagram of Syslog protocol transmitting.......................................................................11-4
Figure 14-1 Multiplexing structure.................................................................................................................... 14-3
Figure 14-2 STM-N frame structure.................................................................................................................. 14-3
Figure 14-3 STM-1 SOH....................................................................................................................................14-4
Figure 14-4 STM-4 SOH....................................................................................................................................14-5
Figure 14-5 STM-16 SOH..................................................................................................................................14-5
Figure 14-6 STM-64 SOH..................................................................................................................................14-6
Figure 14-7 ATM cell structure..........................................................................................................................14-9
Figure 14-8 Ethernet frame structure...............................................................................................................14-11
Figure 14-9 Schematic diagram of link aggregation........................................................................................14-11
Figure 14-10 MPLS encapsulation format.......................................................................................................14-13
Figure 14-11 QinQ data frame structure..........................................................................................................14-14
Figure 14-12 C-TAG TCI structure..................................................................................................................14-15
Figure 14-13 S-TAG TCI structure..................................................................................................................14-15
Issue 07 (2010-11-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential xxi

Product Description Tables
Tables
Table 2-1 Cross-connect capacity of the OptiX OSN 1500.................................................................................2-3

Table 2-2 Service type supported by the OptiX OSN 1500.................................................................................2-6
Table 2-3 Maximum service access capacity of the OptiX OSN 1500................................................................2-7
Table 2-4 Service interfaces of the OptiX OSN 1500..........................................................................................2-8
Table 2-5 Administration and auxiliary interfaces of the OptiX OSN 1500........................................................2-9
Table 2-6 Basic networking modes of the OptiX OSN 1500.............................................................................2-10
Table 2-7 Boards that support the REG..............................................................................................................2-13
Table 2-8 REG optical interfaces.......................................................................................................................2-13
Table 2-9 Equipment level protection................................................................................................................2-14
Table 2-10 Network level protection schemes supported by the OptiX OSN 1500...........................................2-15
Table 3-1 Mapping relation between slots for the interface boards and slots for the processing boards of the OptiX
OSN 1500A...........................................................................................................................................................3-5
Table 3-2 Mapping relation between slots for the interface boards and slots for the processing boards of the OptiX
OSN 1500B...........................................................................................................................................................3-8
Table 3-3 Boards for the OptiX OSN 1500........................................................................................................3-11
Table 3-4 CXL series boards and their valid slots of the OptiX OSN 1500A...................................................3-13
Table 3-5 CXL series boards and their valid slots for the OptiX OSN 1500B..................................................3-14
Table 3-6 SDH processing boards and their valid slots of the OptiX OSN 1500A...........................................3-15
Table 3-7 SDH processing boards and their valid slots for the OptiX OSN 1500B..........................................3-16
Table 3-8 SDH processing boards......................................................................................................................3-19
Table 3-9 PDH processing boards and their valid slots of the OptiX OSN 1500A...........................................3-21
Table 3-10 PDH processing boards and their valid slots for the OptiX OSN 1500B........................................3-21
Table 3-11 PDH processing boards (OptiX OSN 1500A).................................................................................3-23
Table 3-12 PDH processing boards (OptiX OSN 1500B)..................................................................................3-23
Table 3-13 DDN processing boards and their valid slots...................................................................................3-25
Table 3-14 DDN processing boards...................................................................................................................3-26
Table 3-15 Data processing boards and their valid slots of the OptiX OSN 1500A..........................................3-26
Table 3-16 Data processing boards and their valid slots for the OptiX OSN 1500B.........................................3-28
Table 3-17 Data processing boards and their interfaces (OptiX OSN 1500A)..................................................3-31
Table 3-18 Data processing boards and their interfaces (OptiX OSN 1500B)...................................................3-32
Table 3-19 WDM boards and their valid slots of the OptiX OSN 1500A.........................................................3-35
Table 3-20 WDM boards and their valid slots for the OptiX OSN 1500B........................................................3-35
Table 3-21 WDM boards and their interfaces (OptiX OSN 1500A)..................................................................3-36
Table 3-22 WDM boards and their interfaces (OptiX OSN 1500B)..................................................................3-36
Issue 07 (2010-11-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential xxiii

Tables Product Description
Table 3-23 Optical booster amplifier boards and their valid slots of the OptiX OSN 1500A...........................3-37
Table 3-24 Optical booster amplifier boards and their valid slots for the OptiX OSN 1500B..........................3-37
Table 3-25 Optical booster amplifier boards and their interfaces......................................................................3-38
Table 3-26 Auxiliary boards and their valid slots of the OptiX OSN 1500A....................................................3-38
Table 3-27 Auxiliary boards and their valid slots for the OptiX OSN 1500B...................................................3-39
Table 3-28 Auxiliary boards of the OptiX OSN 1500A.....................................................................................3-39
Table 3-29 Auxiliary boards of the OptiX OSN 1500B.....................................................................................3-40
Table 5-1 Function list of EFS4 and EFS0...........................................................................................................5-2
Table 5-2 Function list of EGS2...........................................................................................................................5-4
Table 5-3 Function list of EGS4...........................................................................................................................5-5
Table 5-4 Function list of EMS4..........................................................................................................................5-6
Table 5-5 Function list of EGT2, EFT8, EFT8A and EFT4.................................................................................5-8
Table 5-6 Function list of RPR boards...............................................................................................................5-18
Table 5-7 RPR service class...............................................................................................................................5-19
Table 5-8 Functions of ADL4 and ADQ1..........................................................................................................5-28
Table 5-9 Functions of IDL4 and IDQ1.............................................................................................................5-29
Table 5-10 ATM service types and traffic types................................................................................................5-31
Table 5-11 Classification of ATM protection....................................................................................................5-34
Table 5-12 Service types and bit rates provided by N1MST4...........................................................................5-35
Table 5-13 Functions and features of N1DX1 (N1DM12) and N1DXA...........................................................5-36
Table 6-1 DCC allocation modes of the OptiX OSN 1500..................................................................................6-4
Table 7-1 Service level.......................................................................................................................................7-12
Table 7-2 Service level.......................................................................................................................................7-13
Table 7-3 TE links used by ASON services.......................................................................................................7-13
Table 7-4 Attributes of the permanent 1+1 diamond services............................................................................7-16
Table 7-5 Attributes of the permanent 1+1 diamond services............................................................................7-16
Table 7-6 Attributes of the rerouting 1+1 diamond service...............................................................................7-17
Table 7-7 Attributes of the rerouting 1+1 diamond service...............................................................................7-18
Table 7-8 Attributes of the non-rerouting 1+1 diamond service........................................................................7-18
Table 7-9 Attributes of the non-rerouting 1+1 diamond service........................................................................7-19
Table 7-10 Attributes of gold services...............................................................................................................7-20
Table 7-11 Attributes of silver services..............................................................................................................7-22
Table 7-12 Attributes of silver services..............................................................................................................7-23
Table 7-13 Attributes of copper services............................................................................................................7-24
Table 7-14 Attributes of copper services............................................................................................................7-24
Table 7-15 Attributes of iron services................................................................................................................7-25
Table 7-16 Attributes of tunnels.........................................................................................................................7-27
Table 7-17 Attributes of service association......................................................................................................7-28
Table 7-18 Reverting service to original routes.................................................................................................7-31
Table 7-19 Description on service reverting......................................................................................................7-31
Table 8-1 TPS protection schemes and supported boards....................................................................................8-2
Table 8-2 TPS protection schemes and supported boards of the OptiX OSN 1500A..........................................8-3
xxiv Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 07 (2010-11-30)

Product Description Tables
Table 8-3 TPS protection parameters...................................................................................................................8-3

Table 8-4 1+1 hot backup parameters of the cross-connect, timing and SCC units.............................................8-4
Table 8-5 1+1 protection parameters of Ethernet boards.....................................................................................8-4
Table 8-6 1+1 protection parameters of ATM boards..........................................................................................8-6
Table 8-7 1+1 inter-board protection parameters of N1LWX..............................................................................8-6
Table 8-8 Linear MSP parameters........................................................................................................................8-8
Table 8-9 Maximum number of MSP rings supported by the OptiX OSN 1500.................................................8-9
Table 8-10 MSP ring parameters........................................................................................................................8-10
Table 8-11 SNCP parameters.............................................................................................................................8-12
Table 12-1 Optical interfaces of the OptiX OSN 1500......................................................................................12-3
Table 12-2 Specifications of the STM-1 optical interface of the OptiX OSN 1500..........................................12-4
Table 12-3 Specifications of the STM-4 optical interface of the OptiX OSN 1500..........................................12-4
Table 12-4 Specifications of the STM-16 optical interface of the OptiX OSN 1500........................................12-5
Table 12-5 Specifications of the STM-16 (FEC) optical interface of the OptiX OSN 1500.............................12-6
Table 12-6 Wavelengths and frequencies of STM-16 optical interfaces...........................................................12-7
Table 12-7 Specifications of the colored optical interface of the OptiX OSN 1500..........................................12-7
Table 12-8 Parameters specified for the Ethernet optical interfaces of the OptiX OSN 1500...........................12-8
Table 12-9 Performance of the STM-1 ATM optical interfaces of the OptiX OSN 1500.................................12-9
Table 12-10 Performance of the STM-4 ATM optical interfaces of the OptiX OSN 1500...............................12-9
Table 12-11 Laser safety class..........................................................................................................................12-10
Table 12-12 Specifications of PDH electrical interfaces..................................................................................12-11
Table 12-13 DDN interface types.....................................................................................................................12-11
Table 12-14 Specifications of the RS-232 interfaces.......................................................................................12-12
Table 12-15 Specifications of the RS-422 interfaces.......................................................................................12-12
Table 12-16 Specifications of the orderwire phone interface...........................................................................12-13
Table 12-17 Clock features...............................................................................................................................12-13
Table 12-18 Timing and synchronization performance....................................................................................12-14
Table 12-19 Transmission performance...........................................................................................................12-14
Table 12-20 Numbering TU-12s in a VC-4 (scheme I)....................................................................................12-14
Table 12-21 Numbering TU-12s in a VC-4 (scheme II)..................................................................................12-15
Table 12-22 Technical specifications of the ETSI cabinets.............................................................................12-15
Table 12-23 Technical specifications of the 19-inch standard cabinets...........................................................12-15
Table 12-24 Technical specifications of the OptiX OSN 1500A subrack........................................................12-16
Table 12-25 Technical specifications of the OptiX OSN 1500B subrack........................................................12-16
Table 12-26 Power supply specifications.........................................................................................................12-16
Table 12-27 EMC test results...........................................................................................................................12-17
Table 12-28 Safety certifications......................................................................................................................12-18
Table 12-29 Environment specifications for long-term operation...................................................................12-19
Table 12-30 Climate requirements for storage.................................................................................................12-20
Table 12-31 Density requirements for mechanical active substances during storage......................................12-20
Table 12-32 Density requirements for chemical active substances during storage..........................................12-21
Table 12-33 Requirements for mechanical stress during storage.....................................................................12-21
Issue 07 (2010-11-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential xxv

Tables Product Description
Table 12-34 Climate requirements for transportation......................................................................................12-22

Table 12-35 Density requirements for mechanical active substances during transportation........................... 12-22
Table 12-36 Density requirements for chemical active substances during transportation...............................12-23
Table 12-37 Requirements for mechanical stress during transportation..........................................................12-23
Table 12-38 Requirements for temperature and humidity................................................................................12-24
Table 12-39 Requirements for the density of the mechanical active substance...............................................12-25
Table 12-40 Density requirements for chemical active substances during operation......................................12-25
Table 12-41 Requirements for mechanical stress during operation................................................................. 12-25
Table 12-42 Power consumption and weight of the boards............................................................................. 12-26
Table 13-1 ITU-T recommendations..................................................................................................................13-2
Table 13-2 IEEE standards.................................................................................................................................13-5
Table 13-3 IETF standards.................................................................................................................................13-6
Table 13-4 ANSI related standards....................................................................................................................13-6
Table 13-5 Environment related standards.........................................................................................................13-6
Table 13-6 EMC related standards.....................................................................................................................13-7
Table 13-7 Safety compliance related standards................................................................................................13-8
Table 13-8 Protection related standards.............................................................................................................13-8
Table 13-9 ASON related standards...................................................................................................................13-9
Table 14-1 SDH levels and the corresponding bit rates.....................................................................................14-2
Table 14-2 SOH bytes description......................................................................................................................14-6
Table 14-3 VC-3/VC-4/VC-4-xc POH bytes description...................................................................................14-7
Table 14-4 VC-12 POH bytes description..........................................................................................................14-7
Table 14-5 The meanings of the bytes in the MPLS encapsulation format......................................................14-13
Table 14-6 TPID settings..................................................................................................................................14-15
xxvi Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 07 (2010-11-30)

Product Description 1 Network Application
1 Network Application
The OptiX OSN 1500 intelligent optical transmission system (hereinafter referred to as the OptiX
OSN 1500) developed by Huawei is the next-generation intelligent optical transmission
equipment.
The OptiX OSN 1500 integrates the following technologies to transmit voice and data services
on the same platform with high efficiency:
l Synchronous digital hierarchy (SDH)

l Plesiochronous digital hierarchy (PDH)
l Wavelength division multiplexing (WDM)
l Ethernet
l Asynchronous transfer mode (ATM)
l Storage area network (SAN)
l DVB (Digital Video Broadcasting)
l Digital data network (DDN)
l Automatically switched optical network (ASON)
There are two types of OptiX OSN 1500 system. Figure 1-1 shows the OptiX OSN 1500A and
Figure 1-2 shows the OptiX OSN 1500B. The differences between the OptiX OSN 1500A and
the OptiX OSN 1500B lie in the appearance and access capacity.
NOTE
The different features of the OptiX OSN 1500A and the OptiX OSN 1500B are described in this document.
If the features are not described, they still remain the same.
Figure 1-1 OptiX OSN 1500A
Issue 07 (2010-11-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 1-1

1 Network Application Product Description
Figure 1-2 OptiX OSN 1500B
The OptiX OSN 1500 is used at the access layer of a MAN. The OptiX OSN 1500 can also be
networked with the following equipment to optimize the investment and to lower the networking
expenditure for customers:
l OptiX OSN 9500
l OptiX OSN 7500
l OptiX OSN 3500
l OptiX OSN 3500T
l OptiX OSN 2500
l OptiX OSN 2500 REG
Figure 1-3 describes how the OptiX OSN 1500 NE is used in a transmission network.
1-2 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 07 (2010-11-30)

Product Description 1 Network Application
Figure 1-3 Network application of the OptiX OSN 1500

OptiX OSN 3500T
OptiX OSN 9500
OptiX OSN 3500 OptiX OSN 7500
Backbone
layer
OptiX OSN 3500T

Convergence
layer
Access
layer
GSM/CDMA PSTN Ethernet ... ATM SAN
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)

Code Division Multiple Access (CDMA)
Public Switched Telephony Network (PSTN)
Storage Area Network (SAN)
Ethernet

Product Description 2 Function
2 Function
About This Chapter
The equipment has many functions.
2.1 Capacity
The capacity covers the cross-connect capacity and slot access capacity.
2.2 Service
The supported services are SDH services, PDH services and other services.
2.3 Interface
The interfaces include service interfaces, administration and auxiliary interfaces.
2.4 Networking
The OptiX OSN 1500 supports the topologies such as chain, ring, tangent rings, intersecting
rings, ring with chain, dual node interconnection (DNI), hub, and mesh at the STM-1/STM-4/
STM-16/ level.
2.5 Built-in WDM Technology
The equipment supports the built-in WDM technology, which enables the transmission of several
wavelengths in one fiber.
2.6 110 V/220 V Power Supply
The equipment supports the input of 110 V or 220 V AC power supply. When DC power supply
is not available, the equipment can still be supplied with AC power.
2.7 REG Function
The OptiX OSN 1500 supports the board REG function.
2.8 Protection
The equipment provides equipment level protection and network level protection.
2.9 ASON Features
The OptiX OSN 1500 provides a set of stand-alone ASON software system to realize the
intelligent management of services and bandwidth resources.
2.10 TCM
The tandem connection monitor (TCM) is a method used to monitor bit errors.
2.11 E13/M13 Function

2 Function Product Description
The E13/M13 function is performed to multiplex 16 x E1/21 x T1 signals into one E3/T3 signal
or to demultiplex one E3/T3 signal to 16 x E1/21 x T1 signals. The OptiX OSN 1500 supports
the E13/M13 function.
2.12 RPR
The RPR is suitable for ring topology and is used to quickly restore services from a fiber cut or
a link failure.
2.13 ETH-OAM
The ETH-OAM function enhances the method of performing Ethernet Layer 2 maintenance. It
can be implemented to verify service connectivity, commission deployed services, locate
network faults, and so on.
2.14 Simulation Package Loading and Simulation Package Diffusion
The OptiX OSN equipment provides the functions of simulation package loading and simulation
package diffusion.
2.15 Hot Patch
The OptiX OSN 1500 supports the hot patch technology.
2.16 Inter-Board Alarm Suppression
The OptiX OSN 1500 supports the suppression of tributary/data board alarms that are raised as
a result of the alarms on the line board.
2.17 PRBS Function
The OptiX OSN 1500 supports the pseudo-random binary sequence (PRBS) test function.
2.18 Board Version Replacement
The board version replacement function replaces an old version board with a new version board.
After the replacement, the configuration and service status of the new version board are
consistent with the configuration and service status of the old version board.
2.19 DCC Transparent Transmission Through External Clock Interfaces
The OptiX OSN 1500 can use external clock interfaces to transparently transmit data
communication channel (DCC) information.
2.20 NSF Function
The non-interrupted service forwarding (NSF) function is supported by the Ethernet boards.
With the NSF function, services are not interrupted during an upgrade of the board software and
network processor (NP) software.
2.21 OAM Information Interworking
The OptiX OSN 1500 supports OAM information interworking.
2.22 Clock
The OptiX OSN 1500 supports the clock functions.
2.23 OAM
The OptiX OSN 1500 provides maintenance and management functions.
2.24 Security Management
The T2000 uses many schemes to manage the security of the OptiX OSN 1500 NE.

2.1 Capacity
The capacity covers the cross-connect capacity and slot access capacity.
2.1.1 Cross-Connect Capacity

The CXL boards of different versions have different cross-connect capacity.
2.1.2 Slot Access Capacity
The OptiX OSN 1500A and the OptiX OSN 1500B have different slot access capacities.
Moreover, the access capacities depend on the cross-connect and timing units.
2.1.1 Cross-Connect Capacity

The CXL boards of different versions have different cross-connect capacity.
Table 2-1 lists the cross-connect capacity of the OptiX OSN 1500.
Table 2-1 Cross-connect capacity of the OptiX OSN 1500

Cross-Connect Higher Order Cross- Lower Order Cross- Access Capacity
and Timing Connect Capacity Connect Capacity of Single
Board Subrack
Q2/Q3CXL series 20 Gbit/s (128 x 128 20 Gbit/s (128 x 128 15 Gbit/s (96 x 96
boards VC-4) VC-4, equivalent to VC-4)
384 x 384 VC-3 or
8064 x 8064 VC-12)
R1CXL series 15 Gbit/s (96 x 96 5 Gbit/s (32 x 32 VC-4, 10 Gbit/s (64 x 64

boards VC-4) equivalent to 96 x 96 VC-4)
VC-3 or 2016 x 2016
VC-12)
2.1.2 Slot Access Capacity

The OptiX OSN 1500A and the OptiX OSN 1500B have different slot access capacities.
Moreover, the access capacities depend on the cross-connect and timing units.
If the cross-connect and timing units use the Q2/Q3CXL series boards, Figure 2-1 shows the
access capacity of each slot in the OptiX OSN 1500A subrack.
Figure 2-1 Access capacity of the slots in the OptiX OSN 1500A subrack (Q2/Q3CXL)
Slot 1 PIU Slot 11 PIU Slot 6 1.25 Gbit/s

Slot 2/12 2.5 Gbit/s Slot 7 1.25 Gbit/s
Slot20
Slot 3/13 2.5 Gbit/s Slot 8 1.25 Gbit/s
FAN
Slot 4 2.5 Gbit/s Slot 9 1.25 Gbit/s
Slot 5 2.5 Gbit/s Slot 10 AUX

If the cross-connect and timing units use the R1CXL series boards, Figure 2-2 shows the access
capacity of each slot in the OptiX OSN 1500A.
Figure 2-2 Access capacity of the slots in the OptiX OSN 1500A subrack (R1CXL)
Slot 1 PIU Slot 11 PIU Slot 6 622Mbit/s

Slot 2 622Mbit/s Slot 12 1.25 Gbit/s Slot 7 622Mbit/s
Slot 20
Slot 3 - Slot 13 1.25 Gbit/s Slot 8 622Mbit/s
FAN
Slot 4 2.5 Gbit/s Slot 9 AMU/EOW
In the OptiX OSN 1500A subrack, slot 12 and slot 13 can be divided into half-width slots. Slot
12 can be divided into two half-width slots numbered slot 12 and slot 2, and slot 13 can be
divided into two half-width slots numbered slot 3 and slot 13.
In case the cross-connect and timing boards configured on the OptiX OSN 1500A are the Q2/
Q3CXL series boards:
l As full-width slots, slot 12 and slot 13 each have the access capacity of 2.5 Gbit/s.
l As half-width slots, slots 2, 3, 12 and 13 each have the access capacity of 1.25 Gbit/s.
In case the cross-connect and timing boards configured on the OptiX OSN 1500A are the R1CXL
series boards:
l As a full-width slot, slot 12 has the access capacity of 1.875 Gbit/s, and slot 13 has the
access capacity of 1.25 Gbit/s.
l As half-width slots, slot 2, slot 12 and slot 13 can house boards. Slot 2 has the access
capacity of 622 Mbit/s, slot 12 and slot 13 each have the access capacity of 1.25 Gbit/s.
If the cross-connect and timing units use the Q2/Q3CXL series boards, Figure 2-3 shows the
access capacity of each slot in the OptiX OSN 1500B subrack.
Figure 2-3 Access capacity of the slots in the OptiX OSN 1500B subrack (Q2/Q3CXL)
Slot 14
Slot 18 PIU
Slot 15
Slot 16
Slot 19 PIU
Slot 17
Slot 1/11 2.5 Gbit/s Slot 6 622Mbit/s

Slot 20
FAN
Slot 4 2.5 Gbit/s Slot 9 622Mbit/s
2.5 Gbit/
s

If the cross-connect and timing units use the R1CXL series boards, Figure 2-4 shows the access
capacity of each slot in the OptiX OSN 1500B.
Figure 2-4 Access capacity of the slots in the OptiX OSN 1500B subrack (R1CXL)
Slot 14
Slot 18 PIU
Slot 15
Slot 16
Slot 19 PIU
Slot 17
Slot 1 - Slot 11 622Mbit/s Slot 6 622Mbit/s

Slot 2 - Slot 12 1.25Gbit/s Slot 7 622Mbit/s
Slot 20
Slot 3 - Slot 13 1.25Gbit/s Slot 8 622Mbit/s
FAN
Slot 4 2.5 Gbit/s Slot 9 AMU/EOW
2.5 Gbit/
s
In the OptiX OSN 1500B subrack, slot 11, slot 12 and slot 13 can be divided into half-width
slots. Slot 11 can be divided into two half-width slots numbered slot 1 and slot 11; slot 12 can
be divided into two half-width slots numbered slot 2 and slot 12; and slot 13 can be divided into
two half-width slots numbered slot 3 and slot 13.
In case the cross-connect and timing boards configured on the OptiX OSN 1500B are the Q2/
Q3CXL series boards:
l As full-width slots, slots 11-13 each have the access capacity of 2.5 Gbit/s.
l As six half-width slots, slots 1-3 and slots 11-13 each have the access capacity of 1.25 Gbit/
s.
If the cross-connect and timing boards configured on the OptiX OSN 1500B are the R1CXL
series boards:
l As a full-width slot, slot 11 has the access capacity of 622 Mbit/s, slot 12 and slot 13 each
have the access capacity of 1.25 Gbit/s.
l As half-width slots, slots 11-13 can house boards, and the access capacity of each slot is
the same as the access capacity of a full-width slot.
2.2 Service
The supported services are SDH services, PDH services and other services.
2.2.1 Service Type

The OptiX OSN 1500 can process following types of services : SDH, PDH, Ethernet, RPR,
ATM, DDN and SAN services.
2.2.2 Service Access Capacity
Configured with different quantity of different boards, the OptiX OSN 1500 can access services
of different capacities.

2.2.1 Service Type

The OptiX OSN 1500 can process following types of services : SDH, PDH, Ethernet, RPR,
ATM, DDN and SAN services.
For details about supported service types, refer to Table 2-2.
Table 2-2 Service type supported by the OptiX OSN 1500
Service Type Description
SDH services l Standard SDH services: STM-1/4/16

l Standard SDH concatenated services: VC-4-4c/VC-4-16c
l Standard SDH virtual concatenation services: VC-4-Xv (X≤8),
VC-3-Xv (X≤24)
l SDH services with FEC: 2.666 Gbit/s
PDH services l E1/T1 service

l E3/T3 service
l E4 service
Ethernet services l Ethernet private line (EPL) service

l Ethernet virtual private line (EVPL) service
l Ethernet private LAN (EPLAN) service
l Ethernet virtual private LAN (EVPLAN) service
RPR services l EVPL service

l EVPLAN service
ATM services l Constant bit rate (CBR) service

l Real-time variable bite rate (rt-VBR) service
l Non real-time variable bite rate (nrt-VBR) service
l Unspecified bit rate (UBR) service
DDN services l N x 64 kbit/s (N=1-31) service

l Framed E1 service
SAN services l Fiber channel (FC) service

l Fiber connection (FICON) service
l Enterprise systems connection (ESCON) service
l Digital video broadcast-asynchronous serial interface (DVB-
ASI) service
2.2.2 Service Access Capacity

Configured with different quantity of different boards, the OptiX OSN 1500 can access services
of different capacities.

The capacity of services that the OptiX OSN 1500 can access varies according to the type and
quantity of the configured boards. Table 2-3 lists the maximum capacity of the OptiX OSN 1500
for accessing different services.
Table 2-3 Maximum service access capacity of the OptiX OSN 1500
Service Class Maximum Access Capacity
OptiX OSN 1500A OptiX OSN 1500B
STM-16 standard or concatenated 4 5

services
STM-16 (FEC) services 2 3
STM-4 standard or concatenated 18 18

services
STM-1 standard services 42 54
STM-1 (electrical) services 4 18
E4 services - 8
E3/T3 services 6 27
E1/T1 services 64 190
FE services 32 56
GE services 8 12
STM-1 ATM services 8 12
STM-4 ATM services 2 3
ESCON services 8 12
FICON/FC100 services 4 6
FC200 services 2 3
DVB-ASI services 8 12
N x 64 kbit/s services (N: 1-31) - 16
Framed E1 services - 16
2.3 Interface
The interfaces include service interfaces, administration and auxiliary interfaces.
2.3.1 Service Interfaces

Service interfaces include SDH service interfaces, PDH service interfaces and many other
service interfaces.
2.3.2 Administration and Auxiliary Interfaces

The equipment provides several types of administration and auxiliary interfaces.
2.3.1 Service Interfaces

Service interfaces include SDH service interfaces, PDH service interfaces and many other
service interfaces.
Table 2-4 lists the service interfaces of the OptiX OSN 1500.
Table 2-4 Service interfaces of the OptiX OSN 1500

Interface Description
SDH service STM-1 electrical interfaces: SMB connectors

interface STM-1 optical interfaces: I-1, Ie-1, S-1.1, L-1.1, L-1.2, Ve-1.2
STM-4 optical interfaces: I-4, S-4.1, L-4.1, L-4.2, Ve-4.2
STM-16 optical interfaces: I-16, S-16.1, L-16.1, L-16.2, L-16.2Je,
V-16.2Je, U-16.2Je (CXL16 does not provide L-16.2Je, V-16.2Je,
U-16.2Je optical interfaces)
STM-16 optical interfaces (FEC): Ue-16.2c, Ue-16.2d, Ue-16.2f
STM-16 optical interfaces that comply with ITU-T G.692 can output
fixed wavelength from 191.1 THz to 196.0 THz.
PDH service 75/120-ohm E1 electrical interfaces: DB44 connectors

interface 100-ohm T1 electrical interfaces: DB44 connectors
75-ohm E3, T3 and E4 electrical interfaces: SMB connectors
Ethernet service 10/100Base-TX, 100Base-FX, 1000Base-SX, 1000Base-LX,

interface 1000Base-ZX
DDN service RS449, EIA530, EIA530-A, V.35, V.24, X.21, Framed E1

interface
ATM service STM-1 ATM optical interfaces: Ie-1, S-1.1, L-1.1, L-1.2, Ve-1.2
interface STM-4 ATM optical interfaces: S-4.1, L-4.1, L-4.2, Ve-4.2
E3 ATM interfaces: E3 ATM services are accessed by the N1PD3 or
N1PL3 or N1PL3A board
IMA E1 interfaces: IMA E1 services are accessed by the N1PQ1 or
N1PQM or N2PQ1 or R1PD1 board
Storage area FC100, FICON, FC200, ESCON, DVB-ASI service optical interfaces
network (SAN)
service interface
NOTE
Ue-16.2c, Ue-16.2d, Ue-16.2f, L-16.2Je, V-16.2Je, U-16.2Je, Ve-1.2, Ve-4.2 are technical specifications
defined by Huawei.
2.3.2 Administration and Auxiliary Interfaces

The equipment provides several types of administration and auxiliary interfaces.

Table 2-5 lists the types of administration and auxiliary interfaces provided by the OptiX OSN
1500.
Table 2-5 Administration and auxiliary interfaces of the OptiX OSN 1500
Interface Description
Type
Administration One remote maintenance interface (OAM)

Four broadcast data interfaces (S1-S4)
One Ethernet interface for network management (ETH)
One commissioning interface (COM)
Orderwire One orderwire phone interface (PHONE)

interface
Clock interface Two 75-ohm external clock interfaces (2048 kbit/s or 2048 kHz)
Two 120-ohm external clock interfaces (2048 kbit/s or 2048 kHz)
Alarm interface Three alarm input and one alarm output interface
Four cabinet alarm indicator output interfaces
Four cabinet alarm indicator concatenation input interfaces
2.4 Networking
The OptiX OSN 1500 supports the topologies such as chain, ring, tangent rings, intersecting
rings, ring with chain, dual node interconnection (DNI), hub, and mesh at the STM-1/STM-4/
STM-16/ level.
The OptiX OSN 1500 supports the separate and hybrid configuration of the following types of
NEs:
l Terminal multiplexer (TM)

l Add/drop multiplexer (ADM)
l Multiple add/drop multiplexer (MADM)
The OptiX OSN 1500 can be interconnected with Huawei OSN, DWDM, and Metro equipment
series, to provide a complete transmission network solution.
NOTE
When the equipment is interconnecting, make sure that the K bytes to be received and transmitted are on
the same path at both ends.
l The OptiX OSN 1500 can be used with another OptiX OSN equipment to provide a
complete ASON solution. This solution covers all the layers including the backbone layer,
the convergence layer, and the access layer.
l Through an SDH interface or a GE interface, the OptiX OSN 1500 can be interconnected
with the WDM equipment.
l Through an SDH, PDH, Ethernet, ATM, or DDN interface, the OptiX OSN 1500 can be
interconnected with the OptiX Metro equipment.

Table 2-6 lists the networking modes supported by the OptiX OSN 1500.
Table 2-6 Basic networking modes of the OptiX OSN 1500

Networking Mode Topology
1 Chain
2 Ring
3 Tangent rings
4 Intersecting
rings
5 Ring with
chain
6 DNI

Networking Mode Topology
7 Hub
8 Mesh
MADM ADM TM ASON NE

Legends:
2.5 Built-in WDM Technology

The equipment supports the built-in WDM technology, which enables the transmission of several
wavelengths in one fiber.
The OptiX OSN 1500 provides a built-in WDM technology. The functions of the equipment are
as follows:
l Any four adjacent standard DWDM wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.1 can be
added or dropped.
l The optical terminal multiplexer (OTM) or the optical add/drop multiplexer (OADM)
station that adds or drops four wavelengths is supported. Concatenation is supported, and
thus multiple waves can be added or dropped.
l The conversion between client-side signal wavelengths and ITU-T G.692 compliant
standard wavelengths is supported. During the conversion, all the signals are transparently
transmitted.
l Intermediate ports are provided for expansion. When intermediate ports are cascaded with
other OADM boards, the expansion of add/drop channels is realized.
l The 3R (regeneration, retiming and reshaping) functions are provided for client-side uplink
and downlink signals (at a rate of 34 Mbit/s to 2.7 Gbit/s). In the case of these client-side
signals, clock recovery is available, and the signal rate can be monitored.

l Dual fed and selective receiving boards support intra-board protection. One board of this
type can be used to realize the optical channel protection, with the protection switching
time less than 50 ms.
l Single fed and single receiving boards support inter-board protection. A 1+1 inter-board
standby scheme is supported, with the protection switching time less than 50 ms.
l Supports standard CWDM wavelengths, which can be multiplexed or demultiplexed.
l Supports the remote optical pumping amplifier (ROPA) system to transmit signals over a
long distance.
l Supports the intelligent power adjustment (IPA) function.
2.6 110 V/220 V Power Supply

The equipment supports the input of 110 V or 220 V AC power supply. When DC power supply
is not available, the equipment can still be supplied with AC power.
The OptiX OSN 1500 supports the 110 V/220 V power supply through an uninterrupted power
module (UPM). The UPM is used to convert 110 V/220 V AC into -48 V DC, and to provide
power supply for the OptiX OSN 1500.
A UPM consists of two power boxes and one storage battery, and thus realizes the protected
power supply. The output power of each UPM is 2 x 270 W.
The dimensions of the power box are 438 mm (W) x 240 mm (D) x 44 mm (H).
The storage battery of the OptiX OSN 1500 has four 12 V-40 Ah battery cells, each of which
measures 197 mm (W) x 165 mm (D) x 170 mm (H). If the 110 V/220 V AC power fails, the
storage battery can provide power supply for four hours.
2.7 REG Function

The OptiX OSN 1500 supports the board REG function.
The OptiX OSN 1500 supports the hybrid application of REG and ADM, as shown in Figure
2-5.

Figure 2-5 Hybrid application of ADM and REG

SL16 SL16
IN REG IN
SL16 SL16
OUT OUT
OUT OUT
IN IN
OptiX OSN 1500
IN OUT OUT IN
OUT IN IN OUT
SL16 SL16 SL16 SL16
ADM
For details on the boards that support REG, see Table 2-7.
Table 2-7 Boards that support the REG
Board Valid Slot Function
N2SL16, slot 12-13 slot 11-13 With the REG mode

N3SL16 enabled, the board is in the
RS loopback mode and only
N2SL16A, slot 12-13 slot 11-13 processes the RSOH and
N3SL16A the frame headers.
NOTE
If the cross-connect and timing units use the R1CXL series boards, the OptiX OSN 1500 does not support
the preceding boards.
For the optical interface types of these boards, see Table 2-8.
Table 2-8 REG optical interfaces
Board Optical Interface Type
N2SL16, N3SL16 L-16.2, L-16.2Je, V-16.2Je, U-16.2Je

Board Optical Interface Type
N2SL16A, N3SL16A I-16, S-16.1, L-16.1, L-16.2
2.8 Protection
The equipment provides equipment level protection and network level protection.
2.8.1 Equipment Level Protection

The equipment level protection schemes include TPS protection and 1+1 protection.
2.8.2 Network Level Protection
The OptiX OSN 1500 supports several network level protection schemes.
2.8.1 Equipment Level Protection

The equipment level protection schemes include TPS protection and 1+1 protection.
Table 2-9 lists the equipment level protection schemes supported by the OptiX OSN 1500.
Table 2-9 Equipment level protection

Protected Protection Scheme Revertive Mode
Object
E1/T1 1:1 TPS 1:N (N≤2) TPS Revertive

processing
board
6 x E3/T3 Not supported 1:1 TPS Revertive

processing
board
4 x E4/STM-1 Not supported 1:1 TPS Revertive

processing
board
Ethernet Not supported 1:1 TPS Revertive

processing
boards
N2EFS0 and
N4EFS0
N x 64 kbit/s Not supported 1:N (N≤2) TPS Revertive

and framed E1
processing
board
Ethernet 1+1 PPS and 1+1 BPS Non-revertive

processing
boards
N1EMS4,

Protected Protection Scheme Revertive Mode

Object
N1EGS4 and DLAG l Revertive

N3EGS4 (Default)
l Non-revertive
ATM IMA 1+1 hot backup Non-revertive

processing
board
Cross-connect 1+1 hot backup Non-revertive

and timing unit
SCC unit 1+1 hot backup Non-revertive
-48 V power 1+1 hot backup Non-revertive

interface unit
+3.3 V board 1:N backup Non-revertive

power supply
2.8.2 Network Level Protection

The OptiX OSN 1500 supports several network level protection schemes.
Table 2-10 lists the network level protection schemes supported by the OptiX OSN 1500.
Table 2-10 Network level protection schemes supported by the OptiX OSN 1500
Network Level Protection Protection Scheme
SDH protection Linear MSP
MSP ring
Subnetwork connection protection (SNCP), subnetwork

connection multi-protection (SNCMP) and subnetwork
connection tunnel protection (SNCTP)
Dual-node interconnection (DNI) protection
Fiber-shared virtual trail protection
Optical-path-shared MSP
Ethernet protection Resilient packet ring (RPR) protection
ATM protection VP-Ring/VC-Ring protection

2.9 ASON Features

The OptiX OSN 1500 provides a set of stand-alone ASON software system to realize the
intelligent management of services and bandwidth resources.
The ASON features of the OptiX OSN 1500 are as follows:
l Supports automatic end-to-end service configuration.

l Supports service level agreement (SLA).
l Supports mesh networking and protection.
l Provides traffic engineering control to ensure load-balance traffic network wide and
improve the bandwidth availability.
l Provides distributed mesh network protection including real-time rerouting and pre-
configuration.
l Supports span protection and end-to-end service protection, improving the scalability of
the network.
l Provides ASON clock tracing.
NOTE
The intelligent software system can be bundled with or separated from the OptiX OSN 1500 according to
the requirement. If not equipped with the intelligent software system, the OptiX OSN 1500 does not support
the intelligent features described in this manual.
2.10 TCM
The tandem connection monitor (TCM) is a method used to monitor bit errors.
If a VC-4 passes through several networks, the TCM method can be used to monitor the bit
errors of each section.
The R1CXL, N2SL16, N3SL16, N2SL16A, N3SL16A, N2SL4, N2SLD4, N2SLQ4, N2SL1,
N2SLQ1 and N2SLO1 boards support the TCM at the VC-4 level.
2.11 E13/M13 Function

The E13/M13 function is performed to multiplex 16 x E1/21 x T1 signals into one E3/T3 signal
or to demultiplex one E3/T3 signal to 16 x E1/21 x T1 signals. The OptiX OSN 1500 supports
the E13/M13 function.
The E13/M13 function has two modes: Transmux and Transmux Server.
These two modes are described as follows:
l The remote NE transmits the E1/E3 or T1/T3 services in VC-12/VC-3 granularities to the
central NE over the SDH line.
l The central NE disassembles the received services into E1/T1 granularities.
– For E1/T1 services, the central NE directly demaps VC-12 signals into E1/T1 signals.
– For E3/T3 services, the central NE first demaps VC-3 signals into E3/T3 signals. Then,
the E13/M13 function is performed to demultiplex E3/T3 signals into E1/T1 signals.

l The central NE first grooms E1/T1 signals, and then by using the E13/M13 function,
aggregates and reassembles these E1/T1 signals to E3/T3 signals. Then, the E3/T3 signals
are output.
– If the reassembled E3/T3 signals are output to the local application equipment through
electrical interfaces, the mode is referred to as the Transmux mode.
– If the reassembled E3/T3 signals are output to anoother transmission equipment over
the SDH line, the mode is referred to as the Transmux Server mode.
2.12 RPR
The RPR is suitable for ring topology and is used to quickly restore services from a fiber cut or
a link failure.
The main features of the RPR are as follows:
l Provide the topology auto-discovery function to reflect the network status in real time.
l Support fairness algorithm by configurable weight and support five service levels.
l Support a maximum of 255 nodes in the ring network and support stripping at the
destination node.
l Solve the fairness and congestion control problems.
l Provide RPR protection.
2.13 ETH-OAM
The ETH-OAM function enhances the method of performing Ethernet Layer 2 maintenance. It
can be implemented to verify service connectivity, commission deployed services, locate
network faults, and so on.
For the OptiX OSN 1500, Ethernet service processing boards provide the ETH-OAM function,
which complies with IEEE 802.1ag and IEEE 802.3ah. The ETH-OAM function provides a
complete ETH-OAM solution to automatically detect and locate faults.
The IEEE 802.1ag ETH-OAM is realized through the following methods:
l The link trace (LT) test, which is used to locate the faulty point.
l The loopback (LB) test, which is used for a bidirectional continuity check.
l The continuity check (CC), which is used for a unidirectional continuity check.
l OAM_Ping test, which is used to test the packet loss ratio and latency in service.
The IEEE 802.3ah ETH-OAM function is realized through the following methods:
l Automatic OAM Discovery, which is used to obtain the capability for the opposite end to
support the IEEE 802.3ah OAM protocol.
l Link performance monitoring, which is used to monitor the bit error performance of the
link.
l Fault detection, which is used to report a fault to the opposite end.
l Remote loopback, which is used to locate a fault and test the link performance.
l Self-loop check, which is used to check the self-loop port.
l Loop shutdown, which is used to block a self-loop port and rectify a port loop.

2.14 Simulation Package Loading and Simulation Package

Diffusion
The OptiX OSN equipment provides the functions of simulation package loading and simulation
package diffusion.
Simulation Package Loading

When you need to upload the whole set of the software to an NE, and the mapping between the
board and software is defined according to the format of the simulation software package, you
can use the simulation software package to improve the loading efficiency and upgrade security,
and reduce the operation complexity.
The simulation software package includes:
l All the necessary software to be loaded to the NE

l Package description document that specifies the loading attributes of each software
The simulation software package loading has the following features:
l The user loads the software on an NE basis and through a uniform operation interface.
l The status of the NE does not affect the loading.
l A version rollback is supported for an upgrade failure.
Simulation Package Diffusion

When you use the simulation package simulation method, the simulation software package is
diffused and loaded to all NEs on a network. The diffusion protocol running on the NEs ensures
that the loading process is almost synchronous. As a result, package loading is more efficient
and less manual operations are required.
Simulation package diffusion has the following features:
l Level-by-level package diffusion and synchronous package loading on multiple NEs

l Load sharing
l Balanced utilization of network bandwidths
2.15 Hot Patch

The OptiX OSN 1500 supports the hot patch technology.
Some equipment requires long-term uninterrupted operation. When a defect is located or a new
requirement needs to be applied to the equipment software, a process of replacing old codes with
new codes should be performed to rectify the defect or realize the new requirement, without any
service interruption. These new codes are referred to as a hot patch.
The hot patch technology has the following features:
l The hot patch solves most of the software problems without affecting services.

l The hot patch effectively decreases the number of software versions and prevents frequent
software version upgrade.
l The hot patch operation does not affect services and can be performed remotely. The hot
patch also provides a rollback function. This helps to avoid upgrade risks.
l The hot patch can be used as an effective method for locating faults, and thus improves the
efficiency of solving problems.
2.16 Inter-Board Alarm Suppression

The OptiX OSN 1500 supports the suppression of tributary/data board alarms that are raised as
a result of the alarms on the line board.
When there are cross-connections between a line board and a tributary/data board, many alarms
are raised on the tributary/data board if alarms are raised on the line board. These alarms are all
reported to the T2000. Such a large number of alarms can disturb the troubleshooting and affect
the problem solution efficiency. Therefore, the inter-board alarm suppression function is used
to solve this problem.
If there are services from the line board to the tributary/data board in the same NE, and if higher
order alarms are raised on the line board, relevant lower order alarms on the tributary/data board
are suppressed.
If alarms are relevant to the tributary/data board only (which means the line board at the service
source does not generate higher order alarms), the alarms on the tributary/data board are not
suppressed. In this case, these alarms are reported to the T2000 and are not mistakenly
suppressed.
2.17 PRBS Function

The OptiX OSN 1500 supports the pseudo-random binary sequence (PRBS) test function.
The PRBS function is mainly used for network self-test and maintenance. An NE that provides
the PRBS function can work as a simple device used to analyze if a service path is faulty. Such
analysis can be performed for the NE and the entire network. During deployment or
troubleshooting, the PRBS function realizes the test without a real test device.
The PRBS function has the following two types:
l If the PRBS function is used for lower order services, the PRBS module is integrated on a
tributary board.
l If the PRBS function is used for higher order services, the PRBS module is integrated on
a line board or a cross-connect board.
The PRBS function is implemented in the following process:
l For the opposite tributary or line of a path to be tested, the user issues a loopback command
on the T2000.
l On the T2000, the user issues a command to enable the PRBS function for this path.
l The tributary, line, or cross-connect board performs the PRBS function and starts the
statistics.
l The tributary, line, or cross-connect board reports the PRBS test result.
l The user queries the PRBS statistics result.

l The user releases the loopback of the path on the opposite tributary or line board.
2.18 Board Version Replacement

The board version replacement function replaces an old version board with a new version board.
After the replacement, the configuration and service status of the new version board are
consistent with the configuration and service status of the old version board.
This function provides a flexible board replacement scheme.
For OptiX OSN 1500, the board version replacement function is supported by the N3SL16,
N3SL16A, R2PD1, N2PQ1, N2PD3, N2PL3, N2PL3A, N2EFS0, N4EFS0, N2EGS2 and
N2EFS4.
For detailed replacement relations of boards that support this function, refer to the OptiX OSN
1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System Troubleshooting.
When using the board version replacement function, note the following points:
l The new board may not support the functions of the original board. Before the replacement,
fully consider the difference of functions of the two boards. For example, if an N2 version
line board is used to replace an N1 version line board, AU-3 services and TCM function
cannot be configured on the N2 version line board.
l The line board to be replaced cannot have an optical-path-shared MSP configured.
2.19 DCC Transparent Transmission Through External

Clock Interfaces
The OptiX OSN 1500 can use external clock interfaces to transparently transmit data
communication channel (DCC) information.
The Q3CXL and R1CXL boards, can provide two 2 Mbit/s external clock interfaces to transmit
DCC information. If this function is enabled, you should connect the external clock interface to
the interface board corresponding to a tributary board, by using a cable. In this case, after DCC
overhead signals enter the Q3CXL/R1CXL board, these signals are further sent, through this
tributary board, into the cross-connect unit of the Q3CXL/R1CXL board. After being bound
with service information, the signals are sent to any optical interface or 2 Mbit/s electrical
interface for transmission. At the receive end, when the optical interface or 2 Mbit/s electrical
interface receives the service that is transmitted in the aforementioned way, the receiving
interface is able to extract DCC information by enabling the same function.
If there is a third-party network between networks composed of Huawei equipment, the T2000
is able to manage a remote Huawei network by using the DCC transparent transmission (through
external clock interfaces) function.
As shown in Figure 2-6, the T2000 is connected to an NE in Huawei network A, and hence is
able to manage Huawei network A. Huawei networks A, B and C are connected to a third-party
network through NE1, NE2 and NE3 respectively. As the third-party network is in between, the
T2000 cannot obtain network management information from Huawei networks B and C. If the
DCC transparent transmission (through external clock interfaces) function is enabled on NE1,
NE2 and NE3, however, the T2000 is able to manage Huawei networks B and C.

NOTE
To enable the DCC transparent transmission (through external clock interfaces) function, the setting is
required on only the NEs that are connected to the third-party network.
l On NE2 and NE3 that are respectively located in Huawei networks B and C, the DCC
information in the overhead bus is sent from the external clock interface to the tributary
board. After cross-connect grooming, the DCC information is sent, together with the
service, through an optical interface (or a 2 Mbit/s electrical interface) for transmission.
l On NE1 in Huawei network A, when the optical interface (or the 2 Mbit/s electrical
interface) receives service data transparently transmitted through the third-party network,
the DCC information is extracted, and is then sent through the tributary board to the external
clock interface. At last, the DCC information returns to the overhead bus.
Figure 2-6 Application of DCC transparent transmission through external clock interfaces
iManager
T2000
External clock interface
Optical interface or 2 Mbit/s

DCC
External clock interface electrical interface
Third-party
network
1 Huawei
electrical interface
network A
DCC
2
Huawei
network B External clock interface

3
electrical interface
Huawei
network C
2.20 NSF Function

The non-interrupted service forwarding (NSF) function is supported by the Ethernet boards.
With the NSF function, services are not interrupted during an upgrade of the board software and
network processor (NP) software.
In the NSF mode, the upgrade of the board software and NP software for the N4EFS0 and
N2EFS4 boards can be completed after performing a warm reset of the boards. In this case, the
service interruption time is less than 50 ms, which meets the carrier-class requirements.

CAUTION
If the two versions before and after the upgrade have significant differences, the service
interruption during the NSF-mode upgrade cannot be controlled within 50 ms, and this ensures
only a low service interruption time.
2.21 OAM Information Interworking

The OptiX OSN 1500 supports OAM information interworking.
Any of the following methods can be adopted for the OptiX OSN 1500 to transparently transmit
the OAM information of the third-party equipment, or for the third-party equipment to
transparently transmit the OAM information of the OptiX OSN 1500.
l HWECC
l IP over DCC
l OSI over DCC
l DCC transparent transmission through 2 Mbit/s external clock interfaces
NOTE
The external clock of the OptiX OSN 1500A does not provide the 75-ohm interface. Hence, the OptiX
OSN 1500A does not support the DCC transparent transmission through 2 Mbit/s external clock interfaces.
2.22 Clock
The OptiX OSN 1500 supports the clock functions.
l SSM clock protocol
l Tributary retiming
l Two 75-ohm/120-ohm external clock output and input
l External clock output shutdown
l Line clock source
l Tributary clock source
l Three working modes are as follows:
– Tracing mode
– Holdover mode
– Free-run mode
l ASON clock tracing
2.23 OAM
The OptiX OSN 1500 are designed according to the customer requirements to facilitate the
operation and maintenance of the equipment. It provides powerful equipment maintenance
capability for customers.

The OptiX OSN 1500 is uniformly managed by the OptiX iManager T2000 transmission network
management system, which can implement monitoring and management over the network
equipment.
2.24 Security Management

l Authentication Management
l Authorization Management
l Network Security Management
l System Security Management
l Log Management

Product Description 3 Hardware
3 Hardware
About This Chapter
3.1 Overview
The OptiX OSN 1500 can be installed in an ETSI cabinet (300 mm or 600 mm deep) or a 19-
inch standard cabinet. It can also be installed against the wall.
3.2 Cabinet
inch standard cabinet.
3.3 OptiX OSN 1500A Subrack
The subrack of the OptiX OSN 1500A consists of slots and boards that can be configured.
3.4 OptiX OSN 1500B Subrack
The subrack of the OptiX OSN 1500B consists of slots and boards that can be configured.
3.5 Boards
The equipment supports different types of boards.

3 Hardware Product Description
3.1 Overview
inch standard cabinet. It can also be installed against the wall.
3.2 Cabinet
inch standard cabinet.
Figure 3-1 shows the outer view of an ETSI cabinet.
Figure 3-1 Appearance of an ETSI cabinet
W D

W D
3.3 OptiX OSN 1500A Subrack

The subrack of the OptiX OSN 1500A consists of slots and boards that can be configured.
3.3.1 Structure
The OptiX OSN 1500A subrack is of a one-layer structure. The subrack consists of the slot area
for boards, power supply area, fan area and fiber routing area.
3.3.2 Slot Allocation
The OptiX OSN 1500A subrack has only one layer, where 12 slots are available before the
division of slots.

3.3.1 Structure
The OptiX OSN 1500A subrack is of a one-layer structure. The subrack consists of the slot area
for boards, power supply area, fan area and fiber routing area.
Figure 3-2 shows the structure of the OptiX OSN 1500A subrack.
Figure 3-2 Structure of the OptiX OSN 1500A subrack
H
4
6 W
D
5
1. Fan area 2. Processing board area 3. Power supply area

4. Processing board area 5. Fiber routing area 6. Ear bracket
The functions of each subrack area are as follows:
l Slot area for boards: This area is used to house the boards for the OptiX OSN 1500A.
l Fan area: This area is used to house one fan module, which dissipates the heat generated
by the equipment.
l Power supply area: This area is used to house two PIU boards, which are used to supply
power for the equipment.
l Fiber routing area: This area is used to route fibers and cables in the subrack.

The OptiX OSN 1500A subrack has only one layer, where 12 slots are available before the
division of slots.
Figure 3-3 shows the slot layout of the OptiX OSN 1500A subrack.

Figure 3-3 Slot layout of the OptiX OSN 1500A subrack
Slot 1 Slot 11 Slot 6

Slot 12 Slot 7
Slot 20
Slot 13 Slot 8
FAN
Slot 4 CXL Slot 9 EOW
Slot 5 2.5CXL
Gbit/s Slot 10 AUX
Slots 12 and 13 in the OptiX OSN 1500A subrack can be divided into two half-width slots. See
Figure 3-4.
Figure 3-4 Slot layout of the OptiX OSN 1500A subrack after the division of slots

Slot 20
FAN
Slot 5 2.5CXL
Gbit/s Slot 10 AUX
The slots in the OptiX OSN 1500A subrack are allocated as follows:
l Slots for integrated boards of the line, SCC, cross-connect and timing units: slots 4-5
l Slots for processing boards before the division of slots: slots 6-9 and 12-13
l Slots for processing boards after the division of slots: slots 6-9, 12-13, and 2-3
l Slot for the orderwire board: slot 9 (also for the processing board)
l Slot for the auxiliary interface board: slot 10
l Slots for PIU boards: slots 1 and 11
l Slots for the fan board: slot 20
Mapping Relation Between Slots for Interface Boards and Slots for Processing
Boards
Table 3-1 lists the mapping relation between slots for the interface boards and slots for the
processing boards of the OptiX OSN 1500A.
Table 3-1 Mapping relation between slots for the interface boards and slots for the processing
boards of the OptiX OSN 1500A.
Slots for Processing Boards Slots for Interface Boards
Slot 12 Slots 6 and 7

3.4 OptiX OSN 1500B Subrack

The subrack of the OptiX OSN 1500B consists of slots and boards that can be configured.
3.4.1 Structure
The OptiX OSN 1500B subrack is of a two-layer structure. The subrack consists of the slot area
for processing boards, slot area for interface boards, slot area for the auxiliary interface board,
power supply area and fan area.
The OptiX OSN 1500B subrack has two layers. The upper layer of the subrack, where four slots
are present, is the slot area for the interface boards and PIU boards. The lower layer of the
subrack, where ten slots are available before the division of slots (including slots 4 and 5), is the
slot area for the processing boards and auxiliary boards.
3.4.1 Structure
The OptiX OSN 1500B subrack is of a two-layer structure. The subrack consists of the slot area
for processing boards, slot area for interface boards, slot area for the auxiliary interface board,
power supply area and fan area.
Figure 3-5 shows the structure of the OptiX OSN 1500B subrack.
Figure 3-5 Structure of the OptiX OSN 1500B subrack
2
3
H
5
7 W
D
6
1. Interface board area 2. Power supply area 3. Fan area 4. Processing board area
5. Processing board area 6. Fiber routing area 7. Ear bracket

The functions of each subrack area are as follows:

l Slot area for interface boards: This area is used to house the tributary interface boards and
Ethernet interface boards of the OptiX OSN 1500B.
l Slot area for processing boards: This area is used to house the line, tributary and Ethernet
processing boards of the OptiX OSN 1500B.
l Fan area: This area is used to house one fan module, which dissipates the heat generated
by the equipment.
l Slot area for the auxiliary interface board: This area is used to house the auxiliary interface
board, which provides alarm interfaces, orderwire phone interface, management and
maintenance interface, and clock interface.
l Power supply area: This area is used to house two PIU boards, which are used to supply
power for the equipment.
l Fiber routing area: This area is used to route fibers and cables in the subrack.

The OptiX OSN 1500B subrack has two layers. The upper layer of the subrack, where four slots
are present, is the slot area for the interface boards and PIU boards. The lower layer of the
subrack, where ten slots are available before the division of slots (including slots 4 and 5), is the
slot area for the processing boards and auxiliary boards.
Figure 3-6 shows the slot layout of the OptiX OSN 1500B subrack.
Figure 3-6 Slot layout of the OptiX OSN 1500B subrack
Slot 14
Slot 18 PIU
Slot 15
Slot 16
Slot 19 PIU
Slot 17
Slot 11 Slot 6
Slot 12 Slot 7
Slot 20
Slot 13 Slot 8
FAN
2.5 Gbit/
Slot 5 CXL Slot 10 AUX
s
Slots 11-13 in the OptiX OSN 1500B subrack can be divided. As shown in Figure 3-7, the
divided slots are in the dashed area. The slots in the left portion of the original slots are slots
1-3, and the slots in the right portion of the original slots are slots 11-13.

Figure 3-7 Slot layout of the OptiX OSN 1500B subrack (after the division of slots)
Slot 14
Slot 18 PIU
Slot 15
Slot 16
Slot 19 PIU
Slot 17

Slot 20
FAN
2.5 Gbit/
Slot 5 CXL Slot 10 AUX
s
The slots in the OptiX OSN 1500B subrack are allocated as follows:
l Slots for integrated boards of the line, SCC, cross-connect and timing units: slots 4-5
l Slots for processing boards before the division of slots: slots 6-9 and 11-13
l Slots for processing boards after the division of slots: slots 1-9 and 11-13
l Slots for the interface boards: slots 14-17
l Slot for the orderwire board: slot 9 (also for the processing board)
l Slot for the auxiliary interface board: slot 10
l Slots for PIU boards: slots 18 and 19
l Slot for the fan board: slot 20
Mapping Relation Between Slots for Interface Boards and Slots for Processing
Boards
Table 3-2 lists the mapping relation between slots for the interface boards and slots for the
processing boards of the OptiX OSN 1500B.
Table 3-2 Mapping relation between slots for the interface boards and slots for the processing
boards of the OptiX OSN 1500B.
Slots for Slots for Interface Slots for Slots for Interface
Processing Boards Processing Boards
Boards Boards
Slot 2 Slot 14 Slot 3 Slot 16
Slot 7 Slot 15 Slot 8 Slot 17
Slot 12 Slots 14 and 15 Slot 13 Slots 16 and 17
The corresponding interface boards of the PD3, PL3, SEP, and SPQ4 can be housed only in slots
of even numbers.

For the OptiX OSN 1500B, the boards housed in slots 12 and 7 share the same interface board
housed in slot 15, and the boards housed in slots 13 and 8 share the same interface board housed
in slot 17. Therefore, when you configure the boards, ensure the following:
l If slot 12 houses the N1EMS4 (used with an interface board) or R1PD1, slot 7 cannot house
any board used with an interface board.
l If slot 13 houses the N1EMS4 (used with an interface board) or R1PD1, slot 8 cannot house
any board used with an interface board.
3.5 Boards
The equipment supports different types of boards.
3.5.1 Board Type

The boards are SDH boards, PDH boards and other boards.
3.5.2 Cross-Connect and System Control Boards
OptiX OSN 1500 supports several cross-connect and system control boards.
3.5.3 SDH Processing Boards
The OptiX OSN 1500 supports the SDH processing boards.
3.5.4 PDH Processing Boards
The OptiX OSN 1500 supports the PDH processing boards.
3.5.5 DDN Processing Boards
The OptiX OSN 1500 supports DDN processing boards.
3.5.6 Data Processing Boards
The OptiX OSN 1500 supports data processing boards.
3.5.7 WDM Boards
The OptiX OSN 1500 supports WDM boards.
3.5.8 Optical Booster Amplifier Boards
The OptiX OSN 1500 supports several optical amplifier boards.
3.5.9 Auxiliary Boards
The OptiX OSN 1500 supports auxiliary boards.
3.5.1 Board Type

The boards are SDH boards, PDH boards and other boards.
The OptiX OSN 1500 system takes a cross-connect matrix as the kernel and consists of the
following units:
l SDH interface unit

l PDH interface unit
l DDN interface unit
l Ethernet interface unit
l Resilient packet ring unit
l ATM interface unit

l SAN interface unit

l WDM unit
l SDH cross-connect matrix unit
l Synchronous timing unit
l SCC unit
l Overhead processing unit
l Auxiliary interface unit
l Power interface unit
l Optical amplifier unit and dispersion compensation unit
Figure 3-8 shows the system architecture of the OptiX OSN 1500. Table 3-3 lists the constituent
boards and functions of each unit.
Figure 3-8 System architecture of the OptiX OSN 1500
SDH/PDH/Ethernet/
ATM/DDN interface
SDH interface
Cross Connect
PDH signal
board
Matrix
STM-N optical Ethernet signal

unit
signal
ATM signal
Interface unit
Synchronous
processing
Auxiliary
timing unit
Overhead
SCC unit
unit

Table 3-3 Boards for the OptiX OSN 1500

Unit OptiX OSN 1500A OptiX OSN 1500B
SDH Processing board N1SF16, N1SL16, N1SF16, N1SL16, N2SL16,

interface unit N2SL16, N3SL16, N3SL16, N1SL16A,
N1SL16A, N2SL16A, N2SL16A, N3SL16A,
N3SL16A, N1SLQ4, N1SLQ4, N1SLQ4A,
N1SLQ4A, N2SLQ4, N2SLQ4, N1SLD4,
N1SLD4, N1SLD4A, N1SLD4A, N2SLD4,
N2SLD4, N1SL4, N1SL4, N1SL4A, N2SL4,
N1SL4A, N2SL4, N2SLO1, N1SLQ1,
N2SLO1, N1SLQ1, N1SLQ1A, N2SLQ1,
N1SLQ1A, N2SLQ1, N1SL1, N1SL1A, N2SL1,
N1SL1, N1SL1A, N1SEP1, N1SLT1, R1SL4,
N2SL1, N1SEP1, R1SLD4, R1SLQ1, R1SL1
N1SLT1, R1SL4,
R1SLD4, R1SLQ1,
R1SL1
Interface board - N1EU04, N1EU08,

N1OU08, N2OU08
Protection - N1TSB8, N1TSB4

switching board
PDH Processing board R1PD1A, R1PD1B, R1PD1, R2PD1, N1SPQ4,

interface unit R2PD1A, R2PD1B, N2SPQ4, N1PD3, N1PL3,
N1PL3A, R1PL1A, N1PL3A, N1PQ1, N1PQM,
R1PL1B, N2PL3A N2PQ1, R1PL1A, R1PL1B,
N2PQ3, N2PD3, N2PL3,
N2PL3A
Interface board R1L12S, R1L75S N1MU04, N1D34S,

N1C34S, N1D75S,
N1D12S, N1D12B
Protection - N1TSB8, N1TSB4

switching board
DDN Convergence N1DXA N1DX1, N1DXA

interface unit processing board
Interface board - N1DM12
Ethernet Processing board N2EGS2, N1EGT2, N2EGS2, N1EGT2,

interface unit N1EFS4, N2EFS4, N1EFS0, N2EFS0,
R1EFT4, N1EFT8, N4EFS0, N1EFS4,
N1EFT8A, N1EMS4, R1EFT4, N1EFT8,
N1EGS4, N3EGS4 N1EFT8A, N1EMS4,
N1EGS4, N3EGS4
Interface board - N1ETF8, N1EFF8
Protection - N1ETS8, N1TSB8

switching board

Unit OptiX OSN 1500A OptiX OSN 1500B
RPR unit Processing board N2EMR0, N2EGR2 N2EMR0, N2EGR2
Interface board - N1ETF8, N1EFF8
ATM interface unit N1ADL4, N1ADQ1, N1ADL4, N1ADQ1,

N1IDL4, N1IDQ1 N1IDL4, N1IDQ1
SAN interface unit N1MST4 N1MST4
WDM unit N1MR2A, N1MR2B, N1MR2A, N1MR2B,

TN11MR2, TN11MR4, N1MR2C (seated in slots for
TN11CMR2, interface boards),
TN11CMR4 TN11OBU1, TN11MR2,
TN11MR4, TN11CMR2,
TN11CMR4
N1LWX N1LWX
Remote optical pumping unit N1FIB, ROP N1FIB, ROP
Unit that integrates the SCC, line, Q2CXL1, Q3CXL1, Q2CXL1, Q3CXL1,
cross-connect and clock units Q2CXL4, Q3CXL4, Q2CXL4, Q3CXL4,
Q2CXL16, Q3CXL16, Q2CXL16, Q3CXL16,
R1CXLL1, R1CXLD1, R1CXLL1, R1CXLD1,
R1CXLQ1, R1CXLL4, R1CXLQ1, R1CXLL4,
R1CXLD4, R1CXLQ4, R1CXLD4, R1CXLQ4,
R1CXLL16 R1CXLL16
Power interface unit R1PIUA R1PIU
UPM (Uninterrupted UPM

Power Module)
Auxiliary interface unit AUX AUX
Orderwire unit EOW, AMU EOW, AMU
Fan unit R1FAN R1FAN
Optical booster amplifier unit 61COA, 62COA, N1COA 61COA, 62COA, N1COA
N1BPA, N2BPA N1BPA, N2BPA
N1BA2 N1BA2
TN11OBU1 TN11OBU1
3.5.2 Cross-Connect and System Control Boards

OptiX OSN 1500 supports several cross-connect and system control boards.
Table 3-4 lists the CXL series boards and their valid slots of the OptiX OSN 1500A.

Table 3-4 CXL series boards and their valid slots of the OptiX OSN 1500A
Board Full Name Valid Slots
Q2CXL16, 1 x STM-16 integrated board of Slots 4 and 5

Q3CXL16 the SCC, cross-connect, timing
and line units
R1CXLL16 1 x STM-16 integrated board of Slots 4 and 5

the SCC, cross-connect, timing
and line units
Q2CXL4, Q3CXL4 1 x STM-4 integrated board of the Slots 4 and 5

SCC, cross-connect, timing and
line units
R1CXLL4 1 x STM-4 integrated board of the Slots 4 and 5

line units
R1CXLD4 2 x STM-4 integrated board of the Slots 4 and 5

line units
R1CXLQ4 4 x STM-4 integrated board of the Slots 4 and 5

line units
Q2CXL1, Q3CXL1 1 x STM-1 integrated board of the Slots 4 and 5

line units
R1CXLL1 1 x STM-1 integrated board of the Slots 4 and 5

line units
R1CXLD1 2 x STM-1 integrated board of the Slots 4 and 5

line units
R1CXLQ1 4 x STM-1 integrated board of the Slots 4 and 5

line units
NOTE
a: The CXL is a board that integrates the SCC, cross-connect, timing, and line units for the OptiX OSN
1500A. It is one physical board and can be housed in slot 4 or slot 5 on the subrack. On the T2000, the Q2/
Q3CXL is displayed as ECXL, GSCC and SL1/SL4/SL16, and the R1CXL is displayed as RCXL, GSCC
and SLN/SLD41/SLQ41, seated in the logical slots 80-81, 82-83 and 4-5.
Table 3-5 lists the CXL series boards and their valid slots for the OptiX OSN 1500B.

Table 3-5 CXL series boards and their valid slots for the OptiX OSN 1500B
Q2CXL16, 1 x STM-16 integrated board of the SCC, Slots 4 and 5

Q3CXL16 cross-connect, timing and line units
R1CXLL16 1 x STM-16 integrated board of the SCC, Slots 4 and 5

cross-connect, timing and line units
Q2CXL4, 1 x STM-4 integrated board of the SCC, cross- Slots 4 and 5

Q3CXL4 connect, timing and line units
R1CXLL4 1 x STM-4 integrated board of the SCC, cross- Slots 4 and 5

connect, timing and line units
R1CXLD4 2 x STM-4 integrated board of the SCC, cross- Slots 4 and 5

R1CXLQ4 4 x STM-4 integrated board of the SCC, cross- Slots 4 and 5

Q2CXL1, 1 x STM-1 integrated board of the SCC, cross- Slots 4 and 5

Q3CXL1 connect, timing and line units
R1CXLL1 1 x STM-1 integrated board of the SCC, cross- Slots 4 and 5

R1CXLD1 2 x STM-1 integrated board of the SCC, cross- Slots 4 and 5

R1CXLQ1 4 x STM-1 integrated board of the SCC, cross- Slots 4 and 5

NOTE
a: The CXL is a board that integrates the SCC, cross-connect, timing, and line units for the OptiX OSN
1500B. It is one physical board and can be housed in slot 4 or slot 5 on the subrack. On the T2000, the Q2/
Q3CXL is displayed as ECXL, GSCC and SL1/SL4/SL16, and the R1CXL is displayed as RCXL, GSCC
and SLN/SLD41/SLQ41, seated in the logical slots 80-81, 82-83 and 4-5.
3.5.3 SDH Processing Boards

The OptiX OSN 1500 supports the SDH processing boards.
Valid Slots
Table 3-6 lists the SDH processing boards and their valid slots of the OptiX OSN 1500A.

Table 3-6 SDH processing boards and their valid slots of the OptiX OSN 1500A
N1SL16, N2SL16, 1 x STM-16 optical interface Valid slots when the cross-
N3SL16 board connect capacity is 20 Gbit/s:
slots 12 and 13
If the cross-connect capacity is
15 Gbit/s, these slots are
unavailable.
N1SL16A, 1 x STM-16 optical interface Valid slots when the cross-

N2SL16A, board connect capacity is 20 Gbit/s:
N3SL16A slots 12 and 13.
unavailable.
N1SF16 1 x STM-16 optical interface Valid slots when the cross-

board (with FEC) connect capacity is 20 Gbit/s:
slots 12 and 13
unavailable.
N1SLQ4, N2SLQ4, 4 x STM-4 optical interface board Valid slots when the cross-
N1SLQ4A connect capacity is 20 Gbit/s:
slots 12 and 13
unavailable.
N1SLD4, 2 x STM-4 optical interface board Slots 12 and 13

N1SLD4A,
N2SLD4
R1SLD4 2 x STM-4 optical interface board Valid slots when the cross-
(half-width) connect capacity is 20 Gbit/s:
slots 2-3, 6-9, and 12-13
Valid slots when the cross-
connect capacity is 15 Gbit/s:
slots 12-13
N1SL4, N1SL4A, 1 x STM-4 optical interface board Slots 12 and 13

N2SL4
R1SL4 1 x STM-4 optical interface board Valid slots when the cross-
(half-width) connect capacity is 20 Gbit/s: slot
2-3, 6-9, 12-13
connect capacity is 15 Gbit/s: slot
2, 6-8, 12-13

N1SLT1 12 x STM-1 optical interface Valid slots when the cross-

board connect capacity is 20 Gbit/s:
slots 12 and 13
unavailable.
N2SLO1 8 x STM-1 optical interface board Slots 12 and 13
N1SLQ1, 4 x STM-1 optical interface board Slots 12 and 13

N1SLQ1A,
N2SLQ1
R1SLQ1 4 x STM-1 optical interface board Valid slots when the cross-
2-3, 6-9, 12-13
2, 6-8, 12-13
N1SL1, N1SL1A, 1 x STM-1 optical interface board Slots 12 and 13

N2SL1
R1SL1 1 x STM-1 optical interface board Valid slots when the cross-
2-3, 6-9, 12-13
2, 6-8, 12-13
N1SEP1 2 x STM-1 line processing board Slots 12 and 13
Table 3-7 lists the SDH processing boards and their valid slots for the OptiX OSN 1500B.
Table 3-7 SDH processing boards and their valid slots for the OptiX OSN 1500B
N1SL16, N2SL16, 1 x STM-16 optical interface Valid slots if the cross-connect

N3SL16 board capacity is 20 Gbit/s: slots 11-13
unavailable.
N1SL16A, 1 x STM-16 optical interface Valid slots if the cross-connect

N2SL16A, board capacity is 20 Gbit/s: slots 11-13
N3SL16A If the cross-connect capacity is
unavailable.

N1SF16 1 x STM-16 outband optical Valid slots if the cross-connect

interface board (with FEC) capacity is 20 Gbit/s: slots 11-13
unavailable.
N1SLQ4, 4 x STM-4 optical interface board Valid slots if the cross-connect

N1SLQ4A, capacity is 20 Gbit/s: slots 11-13
N2SLQ4 If the cross-connect capacity is
unavailable.
N1SLD4, 2 x STM-4 optical interface board Valid slots if the cross-connect

N2SLD4A, capacity is 20 Gbit/s: slots 11-13
N2SLD4 Valid slots if the cross-connect
capacity is 15 Gbit/s: slots 12-13
N1SL4, N1SL4A, 1 x STM-4 optical interface board Slots 11-13

N2SL4
R1SLD4 2 x STM-4 optical interface board Valid slots if the cross-connect

(half-width) capacity is 20 Gbit/s: slots 1-3,
11-13 (up to two optical
interfaces can be configured),
slots 6-9 (one optical interfaces
can be configured).
Valid slots if the cross-connect
capacity is 15 Gbit/s: slot 11 (one
optical interfaces can be
configured), slots 12-13 (up to
two optical interfaces can be
configured).
R1SL4 1 x STM-4 optical interface board Valid slots if the cross-connect

6-9, 11-13
capacity is 15 Gbit/s: slots 6-8,
11-13
N1SLT1 12 x STM-1 optical interface Valid slots if the cross-connect

board capacity is 20 Gbit/s: slots 11-13
unavailable.
N2SLO1 8 x AU-3 high density access Valid slots if the cross-connect


N1SLQ1, 4 x STM-1 optical interface board Slots 11-13

N1SLQ1A,
N2SLQ1
N1SL1, N1SL1A, 1 x STM-1 optical interface board Slots 11-13

N2SL1
R1SLQ1 4 x STM-1 optical interface board Valid slots if the cross-connect

6-9, 11-13
11-13
R1SL1 1 x STM-1 optical interface board Valid slots if the cross-connect

6-9, 11-13
11-13
N1SEP (used with 8 x STM-1 (e) processing board Slots 12-13

the interface board)a
N1SEP1 (not used 2 x STM-1 (e) processing board Slots 11-13

with the interface
board)a
N1EU08 8 x STM-1 (e) electrical interface Slots 14 and 16

board
N1OU08 8 x STM-1 optical interface board Slots 14 and 16
N2OU08 8 x STM-1 optical interface board Slots 14 and 16
N1EU04 4 x STM-1 (e) electrical interface Slots 14 and 16

board
a: The SEP1 board is displayed as the SEP1 or SEP on the T2000, depending on the interfacing
mode of the board. When the SEP1 provides interfaces on the front panel, it is displayed as
the SEP1 on the T2000. When the SEP1 is used with an interface board, it is displayed as the
SEP on the T2000.
Interface
Table 3-8 lists the SDH processing boards of the OptiX OSN 1500.

Table 3-8 SDH processing boards

Board Interfacing Mode Interface Type Connector
N1SL16, Interfaces available L-16.2, L-16.2Je, V-16.2Je, U-16.2Je LC

N2SL16, on the front panel
N3SL16
N1SL16A, Interfaces available I-16, S-16.1, L-16.1, L-16.2 LC

N2SL16A, on the front panel
N3SL16A
N1SF16 Interfaces available Ue-16.2c, Ue-16.2d, Ue-16.2f LC

on the front panel
N1SLQ4, Interfaces available I-4, S-4.1, L-4.1, L-4.2, Ve-4.2 LC

N1SLQ4A, on the front panel
N2SLQ4
N1SLD4, Interfaces available I-4, S-4.1, L-4.1, L-4.2, Ve-4.2 LC

N1SLD4A, on the front panel
N2SLD4
N1SL4, Interfaces available I-4, S-4.1, L-4.1, L-4.2, Ve-4.2 LC

N2SL4
N1SLT1 Interfaces available S-1.1, L-1.1, L-1.2 LC

on the front panel
N1SLQ1, Interfaces available I-1, Ie-1, S-1.1, L-1.1, L-1.2, Ve-1.2 LC

N1SLQ1A on the front panel
N2SLQ1 Interfaces available I-1, S-1.1, L-1.1, L-1.2, Ve-1.2 LC

on the front panel
N1SL1, Interfaces available I-1, S-1.1, L-1.1, L-1.2, Ve-1.2 LC

N2SL1
R1SLD4 Interfaces available I-4, S-4.1, L-4.1, L-4.2, Ve-4.2 LC

on the front panel
R1SL4 Interfaces available I-4, S-4.1, L-4.1, L-4.2, Ve-4.2 LC

on the front panel
R1SLQ1 Interfaces available I-1, Ie-1, S-1.1, L-1.1, L-1.2, Ve-1.2 LC

on the front panel
R1SL1 Interfaces available I-1, S-1.1, L-1.1, L-1.2, Ve-1.2 LC

on the front panel
N1SEP1a Interfaces available 75-ohm E4/STM-1 electrical interface SMB

on the front panel

N1SEPa Interfaces available 75-ohm STM-1 electrical interface SMB

on the 4 x STM-1 line
processing board
N1EU04
Interfaces available I-1, Ie-1, S-1.1 LC

processing board
N1OU08
Interfaces available I-1, Ie-1, S-1.1 SC

processing board
N2OU08
Interfaces available 75-ohm STM-1 electrical interface SMB

processing board
N1EU08
N2SLO1 Interfaces available I-1.1, S-1.1, L-1.1, L-1.2, Ve-1.2 LC

on the front panel
Q2CXL16, Interfaces available I-16, S-16.1, L-16.1, L-16.2 LC

Q3CXL16, on the front panel
R1CXLL16b
Q2CXL4, Interfaces available I-4, S-4.1, L-4.1, L-4.2, Ve-4.2 LC

R1CXLL4,
R1CXLD4,
R1CXLQ4b
Q2CXL1, Interfaces available I-1, S-1.1, L-1.1, L-1.2, Ve-1.2 LC

R1CXLL1,
R1CXLD1,
R1CXLQ1b
a: The N1SEP1 and N1SEP are boards of the same type. If they are used with the interface
board, they are displayed as "N1SEP" on the T2000. If the interfaces on their front panels are
used, they are displayed as "N1SEP1" on the T2000.
b: The CXL is a board that integrates the line, SCC, cross-connect, and timing units for the
OptiX OSN 1500. It can be seated in slot 4 and slot 5. On the T2000, the CXL board is
displayed as three board types: ECXL/RCXL, GSCC and SLN/SLD41/SLQ41, seated in the
logical slots 80-81, 82-83 and 4-5.
3.5.4 PDH Processing Boards

The OptiX OSN 1500 supports the PDH processing boards.

Valid Slots
Table 3-9 lists the PDH processing boards and their valid slots of the OptiX OSN 1500A.
Table 3-9 PDH processing boards and their valid slots of the OptiX OSN 1500A
N1PL3A (not used 3 x E3/T3 processing board Slots 12 and 13

with the interface
board)
N2PL3A (not used 3 x E3/T3 processing board Slots 12 and 13

with the interface
board)
R1PD1(A/B) 32 x E1 75-ohm/120-ohm Slots 2 and 12

processing board (half-width)
R2PD1(A/B) 32 x E1 75-ohm/120-ohm Slots 2 and 12

processing board (half-width )
R1PL1(A/B) 16 x E1 75-ohm/120-ohm Valid slots when the cross-

processing board (half-width) connect capacity is 20 Gbit/s: slot
6-9
6-8
R1L75S 16 x EI 75-ohm interface board Slots 6 and 7

(half-width)
R1L12S 16 x E1 120-ohm interface board Slots 6 and 7

(half-width)
Table 3-10 lists the PDH processing boards and their valid slots for the OptiX OSN 1500B.
Table 3-10 PDH processing boards and their valid slots for the OptiX OSN 1500B
N1SPQ4 4 x E4/STM-1 processing board Slots 12 and 13
N2SPQ4 (used with 4 x E4/STM-1 processing board Slots 12 and 13

the interface board)
R1PL1(A/B) 16 x E1 75-ohm/120-ohm Slots 6-9

(interfaces available interface and processing board
on the front panel)
N2PQ3 12 x E3/T3 processing board Slots 12 and 13
N1PD3 6 x E3/T3 processing board Slots 12 and 13

N2PD3 6 x E3/T3 processing board Slots 12 and 13
N2PL3 3 x E3/T3 processing board Slots 12 and 13
N1PL3A (not used 3 x E3/T3 processing board Slots 11-13

with the interface
board)
N2PL3A (not used 3 x E3/T3 processing board Slots 11-13

with the interface
board)
N1PL3 3 x E3/T3 processing board Slots 12 and 13
N1PQ1(A/B) 63 x E1 75-ohm/120-ohm Slots 11-13

processing board
N2PQ1(A/B) 63 x E1 75-ohm/120-ohm Slots 11-13

processing board
R1PD1(A/B) 32 x E1 75-ohm/120-ohm Valid slots if the cross-connect

processing board (half-width) capacity is 20 Gbit/s: slots 1-3,
6-8, 11-13
11-13
R2PD1(A/B) 32 x E1 75-ohm/120-ohm Valid slots if the cross-connect

processing board (half-width) capacity is 20 Gbit/s: slots 1-3,
6-8, 11-13
11-13
N1PQM 63 x E1/T1 processing board Slots 11-13
N1MU04 4 x E4/STM-1 interface board Slots 14 and 16
N1C34S 3 x 34M/45M electrical interface Slots 14 and 16

switching board
N1D34S 6 x 34M/45M electrical interface Slots 14-17

switching board
N1D75S 32 x E1 75-ohm electrical Slots 14-17

interface switching board
N1D12S 32 x E1/T1 120-ohm electrical Slots 14-17

N1D12B 32 x E1/T1 120-ohm electrical Slots 14-17

interface board
N1TSB8 8-channel electrical interface Slots 14 and 15

switching board

N1TSB4 4-channel electrical interface Slot 14

switching board
Interface
Table 3-11 lists the PDH processing boards and the valid slots of the OptiX OSN 1500A. Table
3-12 lists the PDH processing boards and the valid slots of the OptiX OSN 1500B.
Table 3-11 PDH processing boards (OptiX OSN 1500A)

N1PL3A Interfaces available on the 75-ohm E3/T3 electrical SMB

front panel interface

R1PD1A Interfaces available on the 75-ohm E1 electrical interface DB44

16 x electrical interface
switching board R1L75S
R1PD1B Interfaces available on the 120-ohm E1 electrical interface DB44

R2PD1A Interfaces available on the 75-ohm E1 electrical interface DB44

R2PD1B Interfaces available on the 120-ohm E1 electrical interface DB44

R1PL1 Interfaces available on the 2mmHM 2mmHM

front panel
Table 3-12 PDH processing boards (OptiX OSN 1500B)

N1SPQ4 Interfaces available on the 4 75-ohm E4/STM-1 electrical SMB

x electrical interface board interface
N1MU04
N2SPQ4 Interfaces available on the 4 75-ohm E4/STM-1 electrical SMB

x electrical interface board interface
N1MU04

N1PD3 Interfaces available on the 6 75-ohm E3/T3 electrical SMB

x electrical interface interface
switching board N1D34S
N1PL3 Interfaces available on the 3 75-ohm E3/T3 electrical SMB

switching board N1C34S

N2PQ3 Interfaces available on the 6 75-ohm E3/T3 electrical SMB

N2PD3 Interfaces available on the 6 75-ohm E3/T3 electrical SMB

N2PL3 Interfaces available on the 3 75-ohm E3/T3 electrical SMB

switching board N1C34S

N1PQ1A Interfaces available on the 75-ohm E1 interface DB44

32-channel electrical
N1D75S
N1PQ1B Interfaces available on the 120-ohm E1 interface DB44

N1D12S
N2PQ1A Interfaces available on the 75-ohm E1 interface DB44

N1D75S
N2PQ1B Interfaces available on the 120-ohm E1 interface DB44

N1D12S
N1PQM Interfaces available on the 120-ohm E1 interface, 100-ohm DB44

32-channel electrical T1 interface
N1D12S

R1PD1A Interfaces available on the 75-ohm E1 interface DB44

N1D75S
R1PD1B Interfaces available on the 120-ohm E1 interface DB44

N1D12S
R2PD1A Interfaces available on the 75-ohm E1 interface DB44

N1D75S
R2PD1B Interfaces available on the 120-ohm E1 interface DB44

N1D12S
R1PL1 Interfaces available on the 2mmHM 2mmHM

front panel
3.5.5 DDN Processing Boards

The OptiX OSN 1500 supports DDN processing boards.
Valid Slots
Table 3-13 lists the DDN processing boards and their valid slots.
Table 3-13 DDN processing boards and their valid slots
N1DX1 N x 64 kbit/s Only be used on the OptiX OSN 1500B: slots

convergence board 11-13
N1DXA N x 64 kbit/s OptiX OSN 1500A: slots 12 and 13

convergence board OptiX OSN 1500B: slots 11-13
N1DM12 N x 64 kbit/s interface Only be used on the OptiX OSN 1500B: slots
board 14-17
Interface
Table 3-14 lists the DDN processing boards.

Table 3-14 DDN processing boards

Board Full Name Interfacing Mode Interface Type Connector
N1DX1 N x 64 kbit/s Interfaces available RS449, EIA530, DB28,

service access on the N x 64 kbit/s EIA530-A, V.35, V. DB44
and convergence interface board 24, X.21, Framed E1
board N1DM12
N1DXA N x 64 kbit/s None None None

service
convergence
board
3.5.6 Data Processing Boards

The OptiX OSN 1500 supports data processing boards.
Valid Slots
Table 3-15 lists the data processing boards and their valid slots of the OptiX OSN 1500A.
Table 3-15 Data processing boards and their valid slots of the OptiX OSN 1500A
N1EMS4 4 x GE Ethernet processing board Valid slots when the cross-

with Lanswitch connect capacity is 20 Gbit/s: slot
12-13 (2.5 Gbit/s)
12-13 (1.25 Gbit/s)
N2EGS2 2 x GE Ethernet processing board Valid slots when the cross-

12-13 (2.5 Gbit/s)
12-13 (1.25 Gbit/s)

12-13 (2.5 Gbit/s)
12-13 (1.25 Gbit/s)


12-13 (2.5 Gbit/s)
12-13 (1.25 Gbit/s)
N1EGT2 2 x GE Ethernet transparent Valid slots when the cross-

transmission board connect capacity is 20 Gbit/s: slot
12-13 (2.5 Gbit/s)
12-13 (1.25 Gbit/s)
N1EFS4 4 x FE Ethernet processing board Slots 12 and 13

with Lanswitch
N2EFS4 4 x FE Ethernet processing board Slots 12 and 13 (1.25 Gbit/s)

with Lanswitch
R1EFT4 4 x FE Ethernet transparent Valid slots when the cross-

transmission board (half-width) connect capacity is 20 Gbit/s: slot
2-3, 6-9 and 12-13 (622 Mbit/s)
2, 6-8 and 12-13 (622 Mbit/s)
N1EFT8 (not used 8 x FE Ethernet transparent Slots 12-13 (622 Mbit/s)

with the interface transmission board
board)
N1EFT8A 8 x FE transparent transmission Slots 12 and 13 (622 Mbit/s)

board (interfaces are available on
the front panel)
N2EGR2 2 x GE Ethernet ring processing Valid slots when the cross-

board connect capacity is 20 Gbit/s: slot
12-13 (2.5 Gbit/s)
12-13 (1.25 Gbit/s)
N2EMR0 (not used 1 x GE and 4 x FE Ethernet Valid slots when the cross-
with the interface processing board connect capacity is 20 Gbit/s: slot
board) 12-13 (2.5 Gbit/s)
12-13 (1.25 Gbit/s)
N1ADL4 1 x STM-4 ATM processing Slots 12 and 13 (1.25 Gbit/s)

board

N1ADQ1 4 x STM-1 ATM processing Slots 12 and 13 (1.25 Gbit/s)

board
N1IDL4 1 x STM-4 IMA processing board Slots 12 and 13 (1.25 Gbit/s)
N1IDQ1 4 x STM-1 IMA processing board Slots 12 and 13 (1.25 Gbit/s)
N1MST4 4-channel multiservice (SAN or Valid slots when the cross-

video service) transparent connect capacity is 20 Gbit/s: slot
transmission board 12-13 (2.5 Gbit/s)
12-13 (1.25 Gbit/s)
Table 3-16 lists the data processing boards and their valid slots for the OptiX OSN 1500B.
Table 3-16 Data processing boards and their valid slots for the OptiX OSN 1500B
N1EMS4 (used with 4 x GE and 16 x FE Ethernet Valid slots if the cross-connect

the interface board) processing board with Lanswitch capacity is 20 Gbit/s: slots 12-13
(2.5 Gbit/s)
(1.25 Gbit/s)
N1EMS4 (not used 4 x GE Ethernet processing board Valid slots if the cross-connect
with the interface with Lanswitch capacity is 20 Gbit/s: slots 11-13
board) (2.5 Gbit/s)
capacity is 15 Gbit/s: slot 11 (622
Mbit/s), slots 12-13 (1.25 Gbit/s)
N1EGS4 4 x GE Ethernet processing board Valid slots if the cross-connect

with Lanswitch capacity is 20 Gbit/s: slots 11-13
(2.5 Gbit/s)

(2.5 Gbit/s)


(2.5 Gbit/s)
capacity is 15 Gbit/s: slots 11
(622 Mbit/s), 12-13 (1.25 Gbit/s)
N1EGT2 2 x GE Ethernet transparent Valid slots if the cross-connect

transmission board capacity is 20 Gbit/s: slots 11-13
(2.5 Gbit/s)
(622 Mbit/s), 12-13 (1.25 Gbit/s)
N1EFS4 4 x FE Ethernet processing board Slots 11-13

with Lanswitch
N2EFS4 4 x FE Ethernet processing board Valid slots if the cross-connect

(1.25 Gbit/s)
N1EFS0 (used with 8 x FE Ethernet processing board Slots 12-13 (622 Mbit/s)
the interface board) with Lanswitch
N2EFS0 (used with 8 x FE Ethernet processing board Slots 12-13 (1.25 Gbit/s)
the interface board) with Lanswitch
N4EFS0 (used with 8 x FE Ethernet processing board Valid slots if the cross-connect
the interface board) with Lanswitch capacity is 20 Gbit/s: slots 11-13
(1.25 Gbit/s)
N1EFT8 (not used 8 x 10M/100M Ethernet Slots 11-13 (622 Mbit/s)

with the interface transparent transmission board
board)
N1EFT8 (used with 16 x 10M/100M Ethernet Slots 12 and 13 (1.25 Gbit/s)

the interface board) transparent transmission board
N1EFT8A 8 x FE transparent transmission Slots 11-13 (622 Mbit/s)

(interfaces available board
on the front panel)

N2EGR2 2 x GE Ethernet ring processing Valid slots if the cross-connect

(2.5 Gbit/s)
Mbit/s), slot 12-13 (1.25 Gbit/s)
N2EMR0 (used with 1 x GE and 12 x FE Ethernet Valid slots if the cross-connect

the interface board) processing board capacity is 20 Gbit/s: slots 12-13
(2.5 Gbit/s)
capacity is 15 Gbit/s: slot 12-13
(1.25 Gbit/s)
N2EMR0 (not used 1 x GE and 4 x FE Ethernet Valid slots if the cross-connect

with the interface processing board capacity is 20 Gbit/s: slots 11-13
board) (2.5 Gbit/s)
R1EFT4 (interfaces 4 x FE processing board Valid slots if the cross-connect

available on the front capacity is 20 Gbit/s: slots 1-3,
panel) 6-9, 11-13 (622 Gbit/s)
11-13 (622 Gbit/s)
N1EFF8 8-channel Ethernet optical Slots 14-17

interface board
N1ETS8 8 x 10/100M Ethernet twisted pair Slots 14 and 16

N1MST4 4-channel multiservice Valid slots if the cross-connect

transparent transmission board capacity is 20 Gbit/s: slots 11-13
(2.5 Gbit/s)
(622 Mbit/s), 12-13 (1.25 Gbit/s)
N1ADQ1 4 x STM-1 ATM processing board Valid slots if the cross-connect

(1.25 Gbit/s)
(1.25 Gbit/s)

N1ADL4 1 x STM-4 ATM processing board Valid slots if the cross-connect

(1.25 Gbit/s)
(1.25 Gbit/s)
N1IDQ1 4 x STM-1 IMA processing board Valid slots if the cross-connect

(1.25 Gbit/s)
(1.25 Gbit/s)
N1IDL4 1 x STM-4 IMA processing board Valid slots if the cross-connect

(1.25 Gbit/s)
(1.25 Gbit/s)
N1ETF8 8 x FE Ethernet electrical interface Slots 14-17

board
N1EFF8 8-channel Ethernet optical Slots 14-17

interface board
N1ETS8 8 x 10/100M Ethernet twisted pair Slots 14 and 16

Interface
Table 3-17 lists the Ethernet and ATM data processing boards of the OptiX OSN 1500A and
their interfaces. Table 3-18 lists the Ethernet and ATM data processing boards of the OptiX
OSN 1500B and their interfaces.
Table 3-17 Data processing boards and their interfaces (OptiX OSN 1500A)
N2EGS2 Interfaces available on the 1000BASE-SX/LX/ZX LC

front panel
N1EFS4 Interfaces available on the 10/100BASE-TX RJ-45

front panel

front panel

N1EGT2 Interfaces available on the 1000BASE-SX/LX/VX/ LC

front panel ZX
N1EFT8 Interfaces available on the 10/100BASE-TX RJ-45

front panel
N1EFT8A Interfaces available on the 10/100Base-TX RJ-45

front panel
R1EFT4 Interfaces available on the 10/100BASE-TX RJ-45

front panel
N1EMS4 Interfaces available on the 1000Base-SX/LX/ZX LC

front panel
N1EGS4 Interfaces available on the 1000Base-SX/LX/ZX/ LC

front panel VX
N3EGS4 Interfaces available on the 1000Base-SX/LX/ZX/ LC

front panel VX
N2EMR0 Interfaces available on the 10/100BASE-TX, RJ-45, LC

front panel 100BASE-FX,
1000BASE-SX/LX/ZX
N2EGR2 Interfaces available on the 1000BASE-SX/LX/ZX LC

front panel
N1ADL4 Interfaces available on the S-4.1, L-4.1, L-4.2, LC

front panel Ve-4.2
N1ADQ1 Interfaces available on the Ie-1, S-1.1, L-1.1, I-1.2, LC

front panel Ve-1.2
N1IDL4 Interfaces available on the S-4.1, L-4.1, L-4.2, LC

front panel Ve-4.2
N1IDQ1 Interfaces available on the Ie-1, S-1.1, L-1.1, I-1.2, LC

front panel Ve-1.2
N1MST4 Interfaces available on the X3.296/(DVB-ASI) -

front panel EN50083-9, 200-M5-SN-
I, 200-SM-LC-I
Table 3-18 Data processing boards and their interfaces (OptiX OSN 1500B)

front panel


N1ETF8 (8 x 10/100 Mbit/s
Ethernet twisted pair
interface board)
Interfaces available on the 100BASE-FX LC

N1EFF8 (8 x 10/100 Mbit/s
Ethernet optical interface
board)

interface board)

board)

interface board)

board)

front panel

front panel
N1EGT2 Interfaces available on the 1000BASE-SX/LX/VX/ LC

front panel ZX
N1EFT8 Interfaces available on the 10/100BASE-TX RJ-45

front panel
Interfaces available on the 10/100BASE-TX RJ-45

interface board)

board)
N1EFT8A Interfaces available on the 10/100BASE-TX RJ-45

front panel

N2EMR0 Interfaces available on the 10/100BASE-TX RJ-45

interface board)

board)
Interfaces available on the 1000BASE-SX/LX/ZX LC

front panel
N2EGR2 Interfaces available on the 1000BASE-SX/LX/ZX LC

front panel
N1EMS4 Interfaces available on the 10/100BASE-TX RJ-45

interface board)

board)
Interfaces available on the 1000BASE-SX/LX/ZX LC

front panel

front panel

front panel
N1ADL4 Interfaces available on the S-4.1, L-4.1, L-4.2, LC

front panel Ve-4.2
N1ADQ1 Interfaces available on the Ie-1, S-1.1, L-1.1, I-1.2, LC

front panel Ve-1.2
N1IDL4 Interfaces available on the S-4.1, L-4.1, L-4.2, LC

front panel Ve-4.2
N1IDQ1 Interfaces available on the Ie-1, S-1.1, L-1.1, I-1.2, LC

front panel Ve-1.2
N1MST4 Interfaces available on the X3.296/(DVB-ASI) LC

front panel EN50083-9, 200-M5-SN-
I, 200-SM-LC-I
R1EFT4 Interfaces available on the 10/100BASE-TX RJ-45

front panel

3.5.7 WDM Boards

The OptiX OSN 1500 supports WDM boards.
Valid Slots
Table 3-19 lists the WDM boards and their valid slots of the OptiX OSN 1500A.
Table 3-19 WDM boards and their valid slots of the OptiX OSN 1500A
N1LWX Arbitrary rate access board Slots 12 and 13
N1FIB Filter isolating board Slots 12 and 13
TN11OBU1 Optical booster amplifier board Slots 12 and 13
N1MR2A Arbitrary two-wavelength add/ Slots 12 and 13

drop board (processing board)
N1MR2B Arbitrary two-wavelength add/ slot 2-3, 6-9 and 12-13 (622 Mbit/
drop board (half-width) s)
TN11MR2 2-channel optical add/drop Slots 12 and 13

multiplexing board
TN11MR4 4-channel optical add/drop Slots 12 and 13

multiplexing board
TN11CMR2 2-channel CWDM optical add/ Slots 12 and 13

drop multiplexing board
TN11CMR4 4-channel CWDM optical add/ Slots 12 and 13

Table 3-20 lists the WDM boards and their valid slots for the OptiX OSN 1500B.
Table 3-20 WDM boards and their valid slots for the OptiX OSN 1500B
N1LWX Arbitrary rate access board Slots 11-13
N1FIB Filter isolating board Slots 12 and 13
N1MR2A Arbitrary two-wavelength add/ Slots 11-13

drop board
N1MR2B Arbitrary two-wavelength add/ Slots 1-3, 6-9 and 11-13

drop board (half-width)
N1MR2C Arbitrary two-wavelength add/ Slots 14-17

drop board

TN11MR2 2-channel optical add/drop Slots 11-13

multiplexing board
TN11MR4 4-channel optical add/drop Slots 11-13

multiplexing board
TN11CMR2 2-channel CWDM optical add/ Slots 11-13

TN11CMR4 4-channel CWDM optical add/ Slots 11-13

Interface
Table 3-21 lists the WDM boards of the OptiX OSN 1500A and their interfaces. Table 3-22
lists the WDM boards of the OptiX OSN 1500B and their interfaces.
Table 3-21 WDM boards and their interfaces (OptiX OSN 1500A)
Board Interfacing Mode Connector
N1MR2A Interfaces available on the front panel LC
N1MR2B Interfaces available on the front panel LC
N1LWX Interfaces available on the front panel LC
N1FIB Interfaces available on the front panel LSH/LC
TN11MR2 Interfaces available on the front panel LC
TN11CMR2 Interfaces available on the front panel LC
Table 3-22 WDM boards and their interfaces (OptiX OSN 1500B)
N1MR2A Interfaces available on the front panel LC
N1MR2B Interfaces available on the front panel LC
N1MR2C Interfaces available on the front panel LC
N1LWX Interfaces available on the front panel LC
N1FIB Interfaces available on the front panel LSH/LC

3.5.8 Optical Booster Amplifier Boards

The OptiX OSN 1500 supports several optical amplifier boards.
Valid Slots
Table 3-23 lists the optical booster amplifier boards and their valid slots of the OptiX OSN
1500A.
Table 3-23 Optical booster amplifier boards and their valid slots of the OptiX OSN 1500A
N1BA2 2-channel optical booster Slots 12 and 13

amplifier board
N1BPA, N2BPA 1-channel amplifier and 1- Slots 12 and 13

channel preamplifier board
61COA, 62COA, COA board Slots 101 and 102

N1COA
ROP Single wavelength long-haul Slot 103 (external)

board (remote pumping)
Table 3-24 lists the optical booster amplifier boards and their valid slots for the OptiX OSN
1500B.
Table 3-24 Optical booster amplifier boards and their valid slots for the OptiX OSN 1500B
N1BA2 2-channel optical booster Slots 11-13

amplifier board
N1BPA, N2BPA Optical booster preamplifier Slots 11-13

board
TN11OBU1 Optical booster amplifier board Slots 11-13
61COA, 62COA, COA board Slots 101-102

N1COA

ROP Single wavelength long-haul Slot 103 (external)

board (remote pumping)
Interface
Table 3-25 lists the optical booster amplifier boards and their interfaces.
Table 3-25 Optical booster amplifier boards and their interfaces
N1BA2 Interfaces available on the front panel LC
N1BPA, N2BPA Interfaces available on the front panel LC
TN11OBU1 Interfaces available on the front panel LC
61COA Interfaces available on the front panel SC/PC
N1COA Interfaces available on the front panel SC/PC
62COA Interfaces available on the front panel LSH/SC
ROP Interfaces available on the front panel LC
3.5.9 Auxiliary Boards

The OptiX OSN 1500 supports auxiliary boards.
Valid Slots
Table 3-26 lists the auxiliary boards and their valid slots of the OptiX OSN 1500A.
Table 3-26 Auxiliary boards and their valid slots of the OptiX OSN 1500A
R1AMU Orderwire processing or alarm Slot 9

concatenation board
R1AUX System auxiliary processing unit Slot 10
R1PIUA PIU board Slots 1 and 11
R1FAN Fan board Slot 20
R1EOW Orderwire communication board Slot 9

UPMa Uninterruptable power module Slot 50
a: The UPM is in case shape. On the T2000, it is displayed as CAU board seated in the logical
slot 50.
Table 3-27 lists the auxiliary boards and their valid slots for the OptiX OSN 1500B.
Table 3-27 Auxiliary boards and their valid slots for the OptiX OSN 1500B
R1AMU Orderwire processing or alarm Slot 9

concatenation board
R2AUX System auxiliary interface board Slot 10
R1FAN Fan board Slot 20
R1EOW Orderwire communication board Slot 9
R1PIU PIU board Slots 18-19
UPMa Uninterruptable power module Slot 50
a: The UPM is in case shape. On the T2000, it is displayed as CAU board seated in the logical
slot 50.
Interface
Table 3-28 lists the auxiliary boards of the OptiX OSN 1500A.
Table 3-28 Auxiliary boards of the OptiX OSN 1500A

Board Connector
R1PIUA Power supply interface
R1FAN None
R1AUX RJ-45
R2AUX RJ-45
R1AMU RJ-45
R1EOW RJ-45
Table 3-29 lists the auxiliary boards of the OptiX OSN 1500B.

Table 3-29 Auxiliary boards of the OptiX OSN 1500B

Board Connector
R1PIU Power supply interface
R1FAN None
R1AUX RJ-45
R2AUX RJ-45
R1AMU RJ-45
R1EOW RJ-45

Product Description 4 Software
4 Software
About This Chapter
The software system of the OptiX OSN 1500 includes NE software and board software.
4.1 Overview
The software system of the OptiX OSN 1500 is of a modular structure.
4.2 Board Software
The board software runs on each board, and manages, monitors and controls the operation of
the board.
4.3 NE Software
The NE software is used to manage, monitor and control the operation of the boards of an NE.
The NE software also functions as the communication unit between the T2000 system and the
boards. Through the NE software, the T2000 system can control and manage NEs.
4.4 T2000 System
management system (hereinafter referred to as the T2000).
4.5 ASON Software
According to the ITU-T Recommendations, an automatically switched optical network (ASON)
includes three planes: control plane, management plane, and transport plane.

4 Software Product Description
4.1 Overview
The software system of the OptiX OSN 1500 is of a modular structure.
The software system includes the following modules:
l Board software (residing in each relevant board)
l NE software (residing in the SCC board)
l T2000 software (residing on a T2000 computer)
l ASON software (contained in the NE software)
The software system of the OptiX OSN 1500 is as shown in Figure 4-1.
Figure 4-1 Software system structure of the OptiX OSN 1500
T2000 software
ASON
software
NE software
Board software
NOTE
l The ASON software can interact with the T2000 software directly, but it needs the NE software to
intercommunicate with the board software.
l During the software loading, the ASON software is loaded together with the NE software.
4.2 Board Software

The board software runs on each board, and manages, monitors and controls the operation of
the board.
The board software receives the commands issued by the NE software and reports the board
status to the NE software in the form of performance events and alarms.
The board software functions include alarm management, performance management,
configuration management, and communication management. The board software directly
controls the functional modules in a board and implements specific NE functions that are

compliant with ITU-T Recommendations. The board software provides support for the
management of boards performed by the NE software.
The board software is mainly classified into the line software, the tributary software, the cross-
connect software, the data board software, the clock software, and the orderwire software.
4.3 NE Software
The NE software is used to manage, monitor and control the operation of the boards of an NE.
The NE software also functions as the communication unit between the T2000 system and the
boards. Through the NE software, the T2000 system can control and manage NEs.
In compliance with ITU-T M.3010, the NE software belongs to the element management layer
in the telecommunications management network (TMN), and provides NE functions, some
coordination functions, and operations system functions at the network element layer. The data
communication function implements the communication between the NE and other components
(including equipment, the T2000 system, and other NEs).
The NE software consists of the following modules:
l Real-time multi-task operating system
l Network side (NS) module
l Equipment administration module (AM)
l Communication module
l Database management module
Real-Time Multi-task Operating System

The real-time multi-task operating system of the OptiX OSN 1500 NE software is responsible
for the management of public resources and provides support for the execution of applications.
This system provides an application execution environment that is independent of the processor
hardware, to separate applications from the processor.
Network Side (NS) Module

The NS module is between the communication module and the equipment management module.
It converts the data format between the user operation side (at the application layer) and the NE
equipment management layer, and provides security control for the NE layer.
Functionally, the NS module is divided into the following three submodules:
l Qx interface module
l Command line interface module
l Security management module
Equipment Administration Module (AM)

The equipment AM is the kernel of the NE software for implementing NE management, and
includes the Manager and the Agent. The Manager sends network management operation
commands and receives event information. The Agent responds to the network management
operation commands sent by the Manager, performs operations to managed objects, and reports
events according to the status change of the managed objects.

The equipment AM includes the configuration management module, the performance

management module, the alarm management module, and the MSP switching management
module.
Communication Module
The communication module performs the message communication function (MCF) of the
functional blocks of the transmission network equipment. Through the hardware interface
provided by the SCC board, the communication module transmits the OAM&P information and
exchanges management information between the T2000 system and NEs, and between NEs
themselves. This module consists of the network communication module, the serial
communication module, and the ECC communication module.
Database Management Module

The database management module is an integral component of the NE software, and consists of
the data and the management system. The database, organized as a relational database, includes
the network database, alarm database, performance database, and equipment database. The
management system manages and accesses the data in the database.
4.4 T2000 System

management system (hereinafter referred to as the T2000).
The T2000 is used as a network management system to implement a uniform management of

the optical transmission network, and to maintain all the optical network equipment in the
network. In compliance with ITU-T Recommendations, the T2000 adopts a standard
management information model and the object-oriented management technology. The T2000
exchanges information with the NE software through the communication module, to implement
monitoring and management over the network equipment.
The T2000 software manages OptiX equipment through the Qx interface, which adopts a
management protocol specially designed for the OptiX equipment.
The T2000 software runs on a workstation or a PC. The T2000 enables the user not only to
operate and maintain the transmission equipment, but also to manage the transmission network.
l Alarm management
The T2000 realizes the following alarm management functions: real-time collection, prompting,
filtering, browsing, acknowledgement, check, clearing, counting, alarm insertion, alarm
correlation analysis, and fault diagnosis.
l Performance management
The T2000 realizes the setting of performance monitoring, and enables the user to browse,
analyze, and print performance data. The short-term and long-term performance forecast and
the performance register reset are also supported.
l Configuration management
The T2000 enables the user to configure and manage interfaces, clocks, services, trails,
protections, and time.

l Security management
The T2000 realizes NM user management, NE user management, NE login management, NE

login lockout, NE setting lockout, and local craft terminal (LCT) access control.
l Maintenance management
The T2000 provides the loopback, board reset, automatic laser shutdown (ALS), and optical
power detection, and data collection functions, to help the maintenance personnel in
troubleshooting.
4.5 ASON Software

According to the ITU-T Recommendations, an automatically switched optical network (ASON)
includes three planes: control plane, management plane, and transport plane.
The management plane refers to an upper layer management system such as the T2000. The
transport plane refers to a traditional SDH network. The control plane is where the ASON
software is applied, and uses the LMP (link management protocol), OSPF-TE (open shortest
path first- traffic engineering), and RSVP-TE (reservation protocol-traffic engineering)
protocols.
Figure 4-2 shows the ASON software architecture. The ASON software mainly includes the
link management module, the signaling module, the routing module, and the cross-connection
management module.
Figure 4-2 ASON software architecture
AOSN software
T2000 Signaling module NE

software
Cross-connection
management
module
Routing module
LMP link management

module
Link Management Module

By using the LMP protocol, the link management module provides the following functions:

l Create and maintain control channels.

l Verify member links and TE links.
Signaling Module
By using the RSVP-TE protocol, the signaling module provides the following functions:
l Set up or interrupt service connections according to user requests.
l Synchronize and restore services on the basis of service status changes.
Routing Module
By using the OSPF-TE protocol, the routing module provides the following functions:
l Collect and flood the TE link information.
l Collect and flood the control link information of the control plane.
l Compute service trails and control the routing.
Cross-Connection Management Module

The cross-connection management module provides the following functions:
l Create and delete cross-connections.
l Report link status, alarms, and other relevant information.

Product Description 5 Data Features
5 Data Features
About This Chapter
The data features include Ethernet features, RPR features, ATM features, SAN features and
DDN features.
5.1 Ethernet Features

This section describes the functions, application and protection of the Ethernet features of the
OptiX OSN 1500.
5.2 RPR Features
This section describes the functions, application and protection of the RPR features of the OptiX
OSN 1500.
5.3 ATM Features
This section describes the functions, application and protection of the ATM features of the OptiX
OSN 1500.
5.4 SAN Features
The OptiX OSN 1500 provides a multiservice transparent transmission processing board,
N1MST4, to access and transparently transmit FC, FICON, ESCON and DVB-ASI services.
5.5 DDN Features
This section describes the functions and application of the DDN features of the OptiX OSN
1500.

5 Data Features Product Description
5.1 Ethernet Features

This section describes the functions, application and protection of the Ethernet features of the
OptiX OSN 1500.
5.1.1 Functions
The OptiX OSN 1500 provides many Ethernet boards to meet different Ethernet service
requirements.
5.1.2 Application
The OptiX OSN 1500 has the Ethernet access function integrated on the SDH transmission
platform.
5.1.3 Protection
OptiX OSN 1500 provides layered protection on Ethernet services.
5.1.1 Functions
The OptiX OSN 1500 provides many Ethernet boards to meet different Ethernet service
requirements.
Table 5-1 lists the Ethernet functions of the EFS4 and EFS0 boards.
Table 5-2 lists the Ethernet functions of the EGS2 board.
Table 5-3 lists the Ethernet functions of the EGS4 board.
Table 5-4 lists the Ethernet functions of the EMS4 board.
Table 5-5 lists the Ethernet functions of the EGT2, EFT8, EFT8A and EFT4 boards.
Table 5-1 Function list of EFS4 and EFS0
Function N1EFS4 N2EFS4 N1EFS0 N2EFS0 N4EFS0
Interface 4 FE 4 FE 8 FE 8 FE 8 FE
Interface type 10Base-T, 100Base-TX 10Base-T, 100Base-TX, 100Base-FX
Interface board None None N1ETF8, N1ETS8 N1ETS8

N1EFF8 (used with (used with
TSB8 to TSB8 to
realize 1:1 realize 1:1
TPS), TPS),
N1ETF8, N1ETF8,
N1EFF8 N1EFF8
Service frame In compliance with Ethernet II, IEEE 802.3, IEEE 802.1q/p
format
JUMBO frame Supported, 9600 bytes
Uplink 4 VC-4 8 VC-4 4 VC-4 8 VC-4 8 VC-4

bandwidth

Mapping mode VC-12: VC-12-xv (x≤63); VC-3: VC-3-xv (x≤12)
Number of 12 24 12 24 24
VCTRUNKs
Ethernet private Supported

line (EPL)
Ethernet virtual Supported

private line
(EVPL)
Ethernet private Supported

LAN (EPLAN)
Ethernet virtual Not supported

private LAN
(EVPLAN)
Static MPLS MartinioE label supported

label
Stack VLAN Supported
VLAN Supports VLAN, in compliance with IEEE 802.1q/p
RSTP Supported
Multicast Supported
listening (IGMP
Snooping)
Encapsulation GFP-F (Frame-Mapped GFP-F, LAPS, HDLC

GFP)
Link state pass Supports Supports Supports Supports Supports

through (LPT) P2P LPT P2P and P2P LPT P2P LPT P2P and
P2MP LPT P2MP LPT
Link capacity In compliance with ITU-T G.7042

adjustment
scheme (LCAS)
Committed Supported (The granularity is 64 kbit/s.)

access rate
(CAR)
Flow control In compliance with IEEE 802.3x
Intra-board link Not Supported Not Supported Supported

aggregation supported supported
Test frame Supported

Ethernet OAM Not Supported, Not Not Supported,

supported in supported supported in
compliance compliance
with IEEE with IEEE
802.1ag 802.1ag and
and IEEE IEEE
802.3ah 802.3ah
Ethernet Supported
performance
monitoring
NSF Function Not Supported Not Not Supported

supported supported supported
Table 5-2 Function list of EGS2

Function N2EGS2
Interface 2 GE
Interface type 1000Base-SX, 1000Base-LX, 1000Base-ZX
Interface board None
Service frame format In compliance with Ethernet II, IEEE 802.3, IEEE 802.1q/p
Uplink bandwidth 16 VC-4
Mapping mode VC-12: VC-12-xv (x≤63); VC-3: VC-3-xv (x≤12)
Number of 48
VCTRUNKs
EPL Supported
EVPL Supported
EPLAN Supported
EVPLAN Not supported
Static MPLS label MartinioE label supported
VLAN Supports VLAN, in compliance with IEEE 802.1q/p
RSTP Supported
Multicast listening Supported

(IGMP snooping)

Function N2EGS2
Encapsulation GFP-F
LPT Supports P2P LPT
LCAS In compliance with ITU-T G.7042
CAR Supported (The granularity is 64 kbit/s.)
QoS traffic Supports port flow, port+VLAN flow and port+VLAN+PRI flow.
classification
CoS Supported
Shaping Not supported
Ethernet Supported
performance
monitoring
Ethernet OAM Not supported
RMON Supported
Link aggregation Supports manual link aggregation
Table 5-3 Function list of EGS4

Function N1EGS4 N3EGS4
Interface 4 x GE
Interface type 1000Base-SX, 1000Base-LX, 1000Base-ZX
Interface board None
format
Mapping mode VC-12: VC-12-xv (x≤64); VC-3: VC-3-xv (x≤24); VC-4: VC-4-xv
(x≤8)
Number of 64
VCTRUNKs
EPL Supported
EVPL Supports VLAN-based and QinQ-based EVPL services.

Function N1EGS4 N3EGS4
EPLAN Supported
EVPLAN Supported
Static MPLS label Not supported
VLAN Supports VLAN and QinQ, in compliance with IEEE 802.1q/p.
RSTP Supported

(IGMP snooping)
Encapsulation GFP-F, LAPS, HDLC
LPT Supports P2P and P2MP LPT Supports P2P and P2MP LPT
BPS Supported
PPS Supported
QoS traffic Supports port flow, port+VLAN flow and port+SVLAN flow.
classification
CoS Supported
Shaping Supported
Flow control Supports flow control based on GE port, in compliance with IEEE
802.3x
Ethernet Supported
performance
monitoring
Ethernet OAM Supported, in compliance with IEEE 802.1ag and IEEE 802.3ah
Link aggregation Supports manual link aggregation, static link aggregation and
distributed link aggregation.
Table 5-4 Function list of EMS4

Function N1EMS4
Interface 4 GE and 16 FE
Interface type 1000Base-SX, 1000Base-LX, 1000Base-ZX, 10Base-T, 100Base-TX,

100Base-FX

Function N1EMS4
Interface board Supports 4 x GE if the N1EMS4 board is not used with an interface
board. Supports 4 x GE and 16 x FE if the N1EMS4 board is used with
interface boards N1ETF8 or N1EFF8.
Protection Supports 1+1 intra-board protection and port level protection.
format
Mapping mode VC-12: VC-12-xv (x≤64); VC-3: VC-3-xv (x≤24); VC-4: VC-4-xv
(x≤8)
Number of 64
VCTRUNKs
EPL Supported
EVPL Supports VLAN-based and QinQ-based EVPL services.
EPLAN Supported
EVPLAN Supported
Static MPLS label Not supported
VLAN Supports VLAN and QinQ, in compliance with IEEE 802.1q/p.
RSTP Supported

(IGMP snooping)
LPT Supports P2P amd P2MP LPT
BPS/PPS Supported
QoS traffic Supports port flow, port+VLAN flow and por+SVLAN flow.
classification
CoS Supported
Shaping Supported
Flow control Supports flow control based on GE/FE port, in compliance with IEEE
802.3x

Function N1EMS4
Ethernet Supported
performance
monitoring
Ethernet OAM Supported, in compliance with IEEE 802.1ag and IEEE 802.3ah
Service mirroring Supported
Link aggregation Supports manual link aggregation, static link aggregation and
distributed link aggregation.
Table 5-5 Function list of EGT2, EFT8, EFT8A and EFT4

Function N1EGT2 N1EFT8 N1EFT8A R1EFT4
Interface 2 GE 16 FE 8 FE 4 FE
Interface type 1000Base-SX, 10Base-T, 10Base-T, 10Base-T,

1000Base-LX, 100Base-TX, 100Base-TX 100Base-TX
1000Base-ZX 100Base-FX
Interface board None Supports 8 x None None

FE if it is not
used with an
interface
board.
Supports 16 x
FE if it is used
with the
N1ETF8 and
N1EFF8
interface
boards.
Service frame In compliance with Ethernet II, IEEE 802.3, IEEE 802.1qTAG
Iformat
JUMBO frame Supported, Supported, Supported by the Supported,

9600 bytes 9600 bytes latter four ports, 9600 bytes
9600 bytes
Uplink 16 VC-4 8 VC-4 4 VC-4 4 VC-4

bandwidth
Mapping mode VC-3: VC-3- VC-12: VC-12: VC-12-xv VC-12: VC-12-

xv (x≤24); VC-12-xv (x≤ (x≤63); VC-3: xv (x≤63);
VC-4: VC-4- 63); VC-3: VC-3-xv (x≤3) VC-3: VC-3-xv
xv (x≤8) VC-3-xv (x≤ (x≤3)
3)

Function N1EGT2 N1EFT8 N1EFT8A R1EFT4
Number of 2 16 8 4
VCTRUNKs
Ethernet Only EPL supported; EVPL, EPLAN and EVPLAN not supported
service types
MPLS Not supported
VLAN Transparent transmission
LPT Supports P2P LPT
CAR Not supported
Ethernet OAM Supported Not supported Not supported Not supported

802.1ag
Ethernet Supported
performance
monitoring
5.1.2 Application
The OptiX OSN 1500 has the Ethernet access function integrated on the SDH transmission
platform.
The OptiX OSN 1500 supports the following types of Ethernet services:
l EPL Service
l EVPL Service
l EPLAN Service
l EVPLAN Service
EPL Service
The EPL implements the point-to-point transparent transmission of Ethernet services. As shown
in Figure 5-1, the Ethernet services of different NEs are transmitted to the destination node
through their respective VCTRUNKs. The Ethernet services are also protected by the SDH self-
healing ring (SHR). This ensures the secure and reliable transmission of services.

Figure 5-1 EPL service based on port

B B
PORT2 VCTRUNK2 VCTRUNK2 PORT2
PORT1 VCTRUNK 1 VCTRUNK 1 POTR1
A A
NE 1 NE 2
OptiX OSN Enterprise

equipment user
EVPL Service
The OptiX OSN 1500 adopts two ways to support EVPL services.
l Port-shared EVPL services. The services are isolated by VLAN tags and share a bandwidth.
As shown in Figure 5-2, traffic classification is performed for the Ethernet service according to
VLAN ID, to distinguish different VLANs from different departments of Companie A. The two
traffics are transmitted in respective VCTRUNKs.
Figure 5-2 Port-shared EVPL services

Headquarters of Department 1
company A
VCTRUNK1 VLAN100
VLAN100 PORT1
VCTRUNK2 VLAN200
VLAN200
PORT1 PORT2
Department 2
NE 1 NE 2
OptiX OSN Enterprise

equipment user
l VCTRUNK-shared EVPL services. OptiX OSN 1500 adopts three ways to realize
convergence and distribution of EVPL services.
– EVPL services based on VLAN ID, as shown in Figure 5-3.
– EVPL services based on MPLS, as shown in Figure 5-4.
– EVPL services based on QinQ, as shown in Figure 5-5.

Figure 5-3 EVPL service based on VLAN ID

B B'
VLAN200 VLAN200
VCTRUNK
VLAN100 VLAN100
A
PORT 1 PORT2 PORT2 PORT 1 A'
NE 1 NE 2
Cyber cafe OptiX OSN

Community
user equipment
user
Figure 5-4 EVPL service based on MPLS

Add label Strip label
PE P P PE
PORT2 PORT2 Department B

Department B
`
VCTRUNK1
Department
Department A
A PORT1 PORT1
NE 1 NE 2
Branch 1 Branch 2
OptiX OSN
Company A
equipment
Figure 5-5 EVPL service based on QinQ

Add label Strip label
C-Aware S-Aware S-Aware C-Aware
Department PORT2 PORT2 Department

B B
VCTRUNK1 `
Department Department
A PORT1 PORT1 A
NE 1 NE 2
Branch 1 Branch 2
Company A OptiX OSN

equipment

EPLAN Service
Though the EPLAN service, NEs can communicate with each other and dynamically share a
bandwidth, the OptiX OSN 1500 adopts virtual bridge (VB) to support Layer 2 switching of
Ethernet data. This is referred to as the EPLAN service.
Each NE in the system can create one or several VBs. Each VB establishes a media access control
(MAC) address table. The system updates the table by self-learning. The data packets accessed
select the mapping VCTRUNK according to the MAC address table, as shown in Figure 5-6.
Figure 5-6 EPLAN service
PORT1
VB VCTRUNK1
Port 1
NE3
1
Department 3 of
company A
VCTRUNK2
VB PORT1
PORT1 VB
VCTRUNK1
VCTRUNK1
Port 1 Port 1
NE 1 NE 2
Department 1 of Department 2 of
company A company A
Access OptiX OSN
Company A
point equipment
EVPLAN Service
The EVPLAN services can dynamically share the bandwidth and support for the data packets
accessed into the same VLAN. When the data services with the same VLAN ID are accessed
into the same NE and dynamically share the bandwidth, the EVPLAN service can meet the
service requirements.
As shown in Figure 5-7, the Ethernet processing boards of the OptiX OSN 1500 adopt VB+S-
VLAN filter table to support the EVPLAN services.

Figure 5-7 EVPLAN service
PORT2
PORT1
Department 3
VCTRUNK2
VCTRUNK1
of company B
VB
Department 3
C-Aware S-Aware
of company A Port 1
NE3
Port 2
VCTRUNK2
VCTRUNK1
C-Aware
PORT2 C-Aware
PORT1
VB PORT2
S-Aware LSP LSP VB PORT1
S-Aware
VCTRUNK1 NE 1 NE 2
VCTRUNK2
Port 2 LSP Port 1
Port 1 Port 2
Department 2
of company B
Department 1 Department 2
of company A Department 1 of company A
of company B
Acess OptiX OSN

Company A Company B
point equipment
5.1.3 Protection
OptiX OSN 1500 provides layered protection on Ethernet services.
The optical transmission layer supports MSP, SNCP, SNCMP and SNCTP.
The protection schemes supported at the Ethernet service layer are as follows:
l LCAS
l STP/RSTP
l Tributary protection switching (TPS)
l Board protection switching (BPS)
l Port protection switching (PPS)
l Link aggregation group (LAG)
l DLAG
l LPT

LCAS
The LCAS provides an error tolerance mechanism to enhance the reliability of the virtual
concatenation function. The LCAS has the following functions:
l When the LCAS is applied in the virtual concatenation technology, the LCAS enables the
configuration of system capacity, the increase and decrease of the concatenated VC
quantity, and the dynamic change of bearer bandwidth (services are not damaged during
the dynamic change).
l The LCAS protects and restores failed members.
As shown in Figure 5-8, the LCAS can dynamically add or delete members to increase or
decrease the bandwidth. Services are not interrupted during this bandwidth adjustment.
Figure 5-8 Dynamic bandwidth adjustment through LCAS
I want another 10 M MSTP network

bandwidth. Member
Member Headquarters
Branch
Member
Branch Member Headquarters
New member
OptiX NE
As shown in Figure 5-9, the LCAS realizes the protection of the Ethernet service. When some
members fail, the faulty members are automatically deleted, whereas other members transmit
data normally. When the faulty members are available again, they are automatically restored,
and the data is loaded to these members again.

Figure 5-9 Virtual concatenation group protection through LCAS

MSTP network
Member
Member
Headquarters
Branch
Failed member
Member
Member
Headquarters
Branch Delete failed

member
OptiX NE
STP/RSTP
The Ethernet boards support the spanning tree protocol (STP) and the rapid spanning tree
protocol (RSTP). When the STP or the RSTP is started, it logically modifies the network
topology to prevent a broadcast storm. The STP or the RSTP realizes link protection by
restructuring the topology.
TPS
The TPS provides equipment level protection for tributary services. When a protected board
becomes faulty, its services are switched to the protection board. This ensures a reliable operation
of the equipment.
The OSN 1500B supports one group of 1:1 TPS protection for the N2EFS0 or N4EFS0 board.
BPS
The BPS is a board-based protection scheme that requires an active board and a standby board.
When the active board detects a link down failure of any port, or detects a board hardware failure,
the cross-connect board switches all the services from the active board to the standby board to
realize the service protection.
The N1EGS4, N3EGS4 and N1EMS4 boards both support BPS.

PPS
The PPS is a port-based protection scheme that requires an active board and a standby board.
When the active board detects a link down failure of any port, or detects a board hardware failure,
the cross-connect board switches the services of one or more affected ports to the standby boards.
In this case, a protection switching for the entire board is not necessary.
Compared with the BPS, the PPS has lesser impact on external systems and the network.
The N1EGS4, N3EGS4 and N1EMS4 boards both support the PPS.
LAG
A link aggregation group (LAG) bundles multiple links that are connected to the same
equipment, to increase the bandwidth and improve the link reliability. An LAG can be regarded
as one link.
The LAG provides the following functions:
l Improves the link availability. In an LAG, members dynamically back up each other. When
one link is interrupted, other members quickly replace the link to provide services.
l Adds the link bandwidth. The LAG is an economical method for the user to increase the
link transmission rate. When multiple physical links are bundled, the user is able to obtain
a data link of higher bandwidth, without an upgrade of the existing equipment. The capacity
of an LAG is equal to the sum of the capacity of all the member links.
l Balances load. Multiple physical links in an LAG share the traffic load and back up each
other.
l Improves the reliability. Members in an LAG dynamically back up each other.
The LAG has three modes: dynamic aggregation, manual aggregation, and static aggregation.
For details, refer to 14.4 Link Aggregation.
The N1EMS4, N1EGS4 and N3EGS4 boards support link aggregation, and currently support
only manual aggregation and static aggregation.
DLAG
The DLAG requires two boards. One board is the working board and the other is the protection
board.
During switching, only the affected ports are switched and the other ports are not switched. The
equipment configured with the DLAG should be connected to the equipment where the LACP
is running. When any intermediate node is between two equipment sets where the DLAG is
configured, the intermediated node should support the transparent transmission of the protocol
packets.
The DLAG can be of modes: revertive or non-revertive.
l Revertive mode
If the working board becomes faulty, the DLAG is switched to the protection board. When the
working board is restored, the DLAG is automatically switched to the working board.
l Non-revertive mode

If the working board becomes faulty, the DLAG is switched to the protection board. When the
working board is restored, the DLAG is not automatically switched to the working board unless
the protection board becomes faulty.
The N1EMS4, N1EGS4 and N3EGS4 boards support distributed link aggregation.
LPT
The link state pass through (LPT) is a link-based protection scheme. In a network, when the
active and standby ports between routers belong to different links, the LPT function is available
for protection. When the working link becomes faulty, the LPT function shuts down the local
port so that the opposite router knows that the working link is abnormal. As a result, services
are switched from the active port to the standby port. Thus, these services are protected.
The LPT function includes P2P and P2MP LPT.
MSP, SNCP, SNCMP and SNCTP

At the optical transmission layer, Ethernet services can be protected by the MSP, SNCP, SNCMP
and SNCTP schemes. For details, refer to 8.2.2 MSP Ring and 8.2.3 SNCP.
5.2 RPR Features

This section describes the functions, application and protection of the RPR features of the OptiX
OSN 1500.
The RPR defined by IEEE 802.17 uses a dual-ring topology in which the two rings are in reverse
directions, as shown in Figure 5-10. The outer ring and the inner ring transmit data packets and
control packets. Hence, this increases the bandwidth utilization. The control packets on the inner
ring carry the control information of the data packets on the outer ring, and the control packets
on the outer ring carry the control information of the data packets on the inner ring. The two
rings protect each other.
Figure 5-10 RPR ring

Node 1
Outer ring data

Outer ring control
Node 2 2.5 Gbit/s RPR Node 4
Inner ring data

Inner ring control
Node 3

5.2.1 Functions
The RPR functions provide the basic functions, service class, topology auto-discovery, spatial
reuse and fairness algorithm.
5.2.2 Application
The RPR boards support the application of RPR features in EVPL and EVPLAN services.
5.2.3 Protection
The RPR services of the OptiX OSN 1500 are protected by various protection schemes.
5.2.1 Functions
The RPR functions provide the basic functions, service class, topology auto-discovery, spatial
reuse and fairness algorithm.
Basic Functions
The EMR0 and EGR2 boards of the OptiX OSN 1500 support the RPR features defined by IEEE
802.17. Table 5-6 lists the basic functions of the RPR boards.
Table 5-6 Function list of RPR boards

Function N2EMR0 N2EGR2
Interface 1 GE and 12 FE 2 GE
Service frame format Ethernet II, IEEE 802.3, IEEE 802.1QTAG
Maximum uplink 16 VC-4 (2.5 Gbit/s)

bandwidth
Mapping granularity VC-3: VC-3-xv (X≤2); VC-4: VC-4-xv (X≤8)
EVPL Supported
EVPLAN Supported
Static MPLS label MartinioE label supported
VLAN Supports 4096 VLAN tags, and the adding, deleting, and
exchange of VLAN tags; compliant with IEEE 802.1q/p.
Spanning tree Supports RSTP and STP
Multicast listening (IGMP Supported

Snooping)
RPR protection Supports the steering, wrapping, wrapping+steering protection

schemes, with the protection switching time being less than 50
ms.

Function N2EMR0 N2EGR2
Encapsulation GFP-F, compliant with ITU-T G.7041.

LAPS, compliant with ITU-T X.86.
LCAS Supported, compliant with ITU-T G.7042
Flow control Supported, compliant with IEEE 802.3X
QoS traffic classification The N2EMR0 and N2EGR2 boards support traffic classification
based on port, port+VLAN ID or port+VLAN ID+VLAN PRI.
Intra-board link Supported

aggregation
Weighted fairness Supported

algorithm
Topology auto-discovery Supported
Maximum number of 255

nodes
Service class Five classes: A0, A1, B_CIR, B_EIR and C
Service Class
The user data has three classes, which are A, B and C. On an RPR ring, Class A is further divided
into the A0 and A1 subclasses. Class B is also divided into the B_CIR (committed information
rate) and B_EIR (excess information rate) subclasses.
Table 5-7 lists the differences among these classes.
Table 5-7 RPR service class

Class Subclass Bandwidth Jitter Fairness Application
Algorithm
A A0 Pre-allocated, Low Irrelevant Real-time

irreclaimable services
A1 Pre-allocated, Low Irrelevant Real-time

reclaimable services
B B_CIR Pre-allocated, Medium Irrelevant Near real-time

reclaimable services
B_EIR Preemptible, not High Relevant Near real-time

pre-allocated services
C C Preemptible, not High Relevant Best effort

pre-allocated transmission

Topology Auto-Discovery
The topology auto-discovery protocol provides an accurate and reliable method to quickly
discover the topologies and their changes, for all the nodes in a ring network. Hence, the topology
auto-discovery realizes the plug and play feature for the RPR.
To increase or decrease the total bandwidth of an RPR, you can use the LCAS function, which
realizes the dynamic increase and decrease of bandwidth without affecting the existing services.
Spatial Reuse
On an RPR, the stripping of unicast frames at the destination node realizes the spatial reuse for
ring bandwidth. As shown in Figure 5-11, the bandwidth of a single ring is 1.25 Gbit/s. Traffic
1 sent from Node 1 to Node 4 is stripped from the ring at the destination Node 4, and thus the
bandwidth behind Node 4 is left unused. In this case, Node 4 is able to send traffic to Node 3 at
a 1.25 Gbit/s bandwidth. In this way, the bandwidth utilization is improved.
Figure 5-11 Spatial reuse

Node 1
Traffic 1
1.25 Gbit/s
Node 2 Dual-ring Node 4

2.5 Gbit/s RPR
Traffic 2
Bandwidth of single ring is 1.25 Gbit/s
1.25Gbit/s
Node 3
Fairness Algorithm
The outer ring and the inner ring of an RPR support independent weighted fairness algorithm.
The fairness algorithm ensures the fair access of lower-class B_EIR and C services. The weight
in the fairness algorithm is configurable so that different nodes can have different access rates.
Weights need to be set for a node on the outer ring and the inner ring separately. In the case of
preemptible bandwidth, these two weights decide the bandwidth at which the node transmits
lower-class services on the inner ring and the outer ring.
As shown in Figure 5-12, the weights of Nodes 2, 3 and 4 on the outer ring are 1. On the outer
ring, assume that the preemptible bandwidth that is available for lower-class services is 1.2 Gbit/
s. In this case, the fairness algorithm allocates 400 Mbit/s each for the lower-class services
transmitted from Nodes 2, 3 and 4 to Node 1.

Figure 5-13 shows a fairness algorithm with different weights, that is, the weights of Nodes 2,
3 and 4 on the outer ring are 1, 3 and 2 respectively. In this case, the fairness algorithm allocates
200 Mbit/s, 600 Mbit/s, and 400 Mbit/s bandwidths for the lower-class services transmitted from
Nodes 2, 3 and 4 to Node 1.
Figure 5-12 Fairness algorithm when the weight is 1
Node Weight
3
Node2 1
2 Node3
Node 2 1
Node4 1
Node 3 Node 1
1
Dual-ring
2.5 Gbit/s RPR
Node 4 Node 6
Traffic Bandwidth
1 400 Mbit/s
Node 5
2 400 Mbit/s
3 400 Mbit/s
Figure 5-13 Fairness algorithm when the weights are different
Node Weight
3
Node2 1
2 Node3
Node 2 3
Node4 2
Node 3 Node 1
1
Dual-ring
2.5 Gbit/s RPR
Node 4 Node 6
Traffic Bandwidth
1 400 Mbit/s
Node 5
2 600 Mbit/s
3 200 Mbit/s
5.2.2 Application
The RPR boards support the application of RPR features in EVPL and EVPLAN services.

EVPL Service
The EVPL service supports traffic classification based on port or port+VLAN, and encapsulates
and forwards the traffic in the MPLS MartinioE format.
Figure 5-14 illustrates the accessing, forwarding and stripping of a unidirectional EVPL service.
Node 2 adds the Tunnel and VC labels into the packet, and sends the packet onto the RPR. Node
3 forwards the packet to the destination Node 4, which then strips the packet.
Figure 5-15 illustrates the EVPL service convergence, in which the traffic classification is based
on port+VLAN so that multiple services can be converged at the GE port of Node 1.
Figure 5-14 EVPL service accessing, forwarding and stripping
Node 1
Dual-ring
2.5 Gbit/s RPR
FE/GE FE/GE
Node 2 Node 4
Action Stripping
LSP
Tunnel 100
Node 3
Action Insertion VC 100
Tunnel 100
VC 100
Destination Node 4
Action Forwarding

Figure 5-15 EVPL service convergence
VLAN 2 VLAN 3 Traffic Tunnel VC Destination

Port1+VLAN 2 200 200 Node 2

VLAN 4 GE
Node 1
FE FE
Node 2 Node 4
VLAN 2 VLAN 4
Dual-ring
2.5 Gbit/s RPR
Node 3
FE
VLAN 3
EVPLAN Service
The EVPLAN service supports traffic classification based on port or port+VLAN, and
encapsulates and forwards the traffic in the stack VLAN format. The EVPLAN service is realized
by creating virtual bridges (VBs) in the board. The VB supports the self-learning of source MAC
addresses and the configuration of static MAC routes.
Figure 5-16 shows an example of the EVPLAN service. Port rpr1 is where the packets are
accessed onto the RPR. By address self-learning, the VB of each node determines the forwarding
port and the destination node of the packets. At Node 1, if the destination MAC address of the
packets is A1, the packets are forwarded through Port 1. If the destination address is A2, the
packets are forwarded through Port 2. If the destination address is B1, B2 or C1, the packets are
forwarded onto the RPR through Port rpr1, added with a stack VLAN tag whose value is 100.
Node 2 forwards packets in the same way.

Figure 5-16 RPR EVPLAN service
A1 A2
MAC forwarding table of node 1
MAC Port stack VLAN
Port 2
A1 port 1 none
Port 1
A2 port 2 none
B1 rpr1 100
Node 1 B2 rpr1 100
B1
C1 rpr1 100
Dual-ring
A2
2.5 Gbit/s RPR
Port 1
Node 2 Node 4
Port 2
B2
MAC forwarding table of node 2
Node 3
MAC Port stack VLAN
A1 rpr1 100
A2 rpr1 100
B1 port 1 none
Port 1
B2 port 2 none
C1 rpr1 100
C1
5.2.3 Protection
The RPR services of the OptiX OSN 1500 are protected by various protection schemes.
The protection schemes of the RPR services include:
l Wrapping, steering and wrapping+steering

l LCAS
l RSTP
l Optical transmission layer protections, such as MSP, SNCP, SNCMP, and SNCTP
Wrapping
When a failure is detected on the ring, the wrapping function performs an automatic loopback
at the nodes that are adjacent to the failure point, to connect the inner ring and the outer ring.
The protection switching time is less than 50 ms. The advantages of this protection scheme are
enhanced protection speed and minimal loss of data, and the disadvantage is the waste of
bandwidth.
Figure 5-17 illustrates the wrapping protection. The traffic is sent from Node 4, passes through
Nodes 3 and 2 in turn, and finally reaches Node 1. When there is a fiber cut between Nodes 2
and 3, they perform an automatic loopback to connect the inner ring and the outer ring, so that
the protection is realized.

Figure 5-17 Wrapping protection
Node 2
Fiber cut
Traffic flow
Node 1
Node 3
Dual-ring
2.5 Gbit/s RPR
Node 6
Node 4
Node 5
Steering
In the steering protection, switching is not performed at the failure point. Instead, the source
node sends the traffic to the destination node through a new route that is generated by the
topology auto-discovery protocol. If the number of nodes on the ring is less than 16, the steering
protection switching time is less than 50 ms. The advantage of this protection scheme is that it
does not waste bandwidth. The disadvantage is that, when the network scale is large, the
protection switching speed is low, and some data is discarded before a new route is generated.
Figure 5-18 illustrates the steering protection. Before a failure occurs on the ring, the traffic is
sent from Node 4, passes through Nodes 3 and 2 in turn, and finally reaches Node 1, through
the outer ring. When there is a fiber cut between Nodes 2 and 3, the topology auto-discovery
protocol discovers a new topology. On the basis of this new topology, the traffic is sent from
Node 4, passes through Nodes 5 and 6 in turn, and finally reaches Node 1, through the inner
ring.

Figure 5-18 Steering protection
Node 2
Fiber cut
Traffic flow before
switching
Dual-ring Node 1
Node 3
2.5 Gbit/s RPR
Traffic flow Node 6

Node 4 after switching
Node 5
Wrapping+Steering
In the wrapping+steering protection, when a failure is detected on the ring, the ring first performs
a wrapping switching to ensure the switching speed and decrease the packet loss. After the
topology auto-discovery protocol generates a new ring topology, the ring performs the steering
protection so that the traffic is sent to the destination through the best route. This reduces the
waste of bandwidth.
Figure 5-19 illustrates the wrapping+steering protection. Before a failure occurs on the ring, the
traffic is sent from Node 4, passes through Nodes 3 and 2 in turn, and finally reaches Node 1,
through the outer ring. When there is a fiber cut between Nodes 2 and 3, a wrapping switching
is first performed so that Nodes 2 and 3 are automatically loopbacked. After the topology auto-
discovery protocol discovers a new topology, a steering switching is performed. As a result, the
traffic passes through Nodes 5 and 6 in turn, and finally reaches Node 1, through the inner ring.

Figure 5-19 Wrapping+steering protection
Node 2
Fiber cut
Traffic flow
Node 1
Node 3
Dual-ring
2.5 Gbit/s RPR
Node 6
Node 4
Node 5
Node 2
Fiber cut
Dual-ring Node 1
Node 3
2.5 Gbit/s RPR
Traffic flow Node 6

Node 4 after switching
Node 5
LCAS
The LCAS function adds and reduces the bandwidth dynamically, and protects the bandwidth.
For details about the LCAS, refer to section 5.1.3 Protection.

RSTP
The RPR boards support the rapid spanning tree protocol (RSTP). The RSTP realizes link
protection by restructuring the topology. When the RSTP is started, it logically modifies the
network topology to prevent a broadcast storm.
MSP, SNCP, SNCMP and SNCTP

At the optical transmission layer, Ethernet services can be protected when the MSP, SNCP,
SNCMP, or SNCTP scheme is used.
5.3 ATM Features

This section describes the functions, application and protection of the ATM features of the OptiX
OSN 1500.
5.3.1 Functions
The OptiX OSN 1500 provides four types of ATM processing boards, which are ADL4, ADQ1,
IDL4, and IDQ1.
5.3.2 Application
The OptiX OSN 1500 supports the application of several types of ATM services.
5.3.3 Protection
The ATM services of the OptiX OSN 1500 are protected at several layers.
5.3.1 Functions
The OptiX OSN 1500 provides four types of ATM processing boards, which are ADL4, ADQ1,
IDL4, and IDQ1.
An ADL4 board can access and process one STM-4 ATM service and an N1ADQ1 board can
access and process four STM-1 ATM services. When working with the N1PL3/N1PL3A/N1PD3
board, the ADL4 or ADQ1 board can access and process E3 ATM services.
An IDL4 board can access and process one STM-4 ATM service and an IDQ1 board can access
and process four STM-1 ATM services. When working with the E1 processing board, the IDL4
or IDQ1 board can access and process IMA services.
Table 5-8 lists the functions of the ADL4 and ADQ1 boards.
Table 5-9 lists the functions of the IDL4 and IDQ1 boards.
Table 5-8 Functions of ADL4 and ADQ1
Function ADL4 ADQ1
Front panel interface 1 x STM-4 4 x STM-1
Optical interface S-4.1, L-4.1, L-4.2 and Ve-4.2 Ie-1, S-1.1, L-1.1, L-1.2 and
specification Ve-1.2
Connector type LC
Optical module type SFP

Function ADL4 ADQ1
E3 ATM interface Accesses 12 x E3 services by using the N1PD3 or N1PL3 or N1PL3A

board.
IMA Not supported
Maximum uplink 8 VC-4, or 12 VC-3 + 4 VC-4

bandwidth
ATM switching 1.2 Gbit/s

capability
Mapping mode VC-3; VC-4: VC-4-xv (x≤4)
Service type CBR, rt-VBR, nrt-VBR and UBR
Number of ATM 2048

connections
Traffic type and QoS IETF RFC2514, ATM forum TM 4.0
Supported ATM Spatial multicast and logical multicast

multicast
connections
ATM protection 1+1, 1:1

Mode (ITU-T I.630)
ATM protection Unidirectional, bidirectional

operation mode
(ITU-T I.630)
ATM protection VP-Ring, VC-Ring

level (ITU-T I.630)
OAM function (ITU- AIS (Alarm Indication Signal), RDI (Remote Defect Indication), LB
T I.610) (Loopback), CC (Continuity Check)
Table 5-9 Functions of IDL4 and IDQ1

Function IDL4 IDQ1
Front panel interface 1 x STM-4 4 x STM-1
Optical interface S-4.1, L-4.1, L-4.2 and Ie-1, S-1.1, L-1.1, L-1.2 and Ve-1.2
specification Ve-4.2
Connector type LC
Optical module type SFP
E3 ATM interface Not supported

Function IDL4 IDQ1
IMA (compliant with Accesses and processes IMA services when working with the E1
ATM Forum IMA 1.1 processing board N1PQ1 or N1PQMA or N1PQM or N2PQ1.
standards) Supports a maximum of 63 IMA E1 services.
Supports the mapping of a maximum of 16 IMA groups to the ATM
port.
Each IMA group supports 1-32 E1 services. Supports the mapping
of a maximum of 16 E1 links (which are not in any IMA group) to
the ATM port.
Supports a maximum of 226 ms of IMA multipath delay.
Maximum uplink 8 VC-4, or 63 VC-12 + 7 VC-4

bandwidth
ATM switching 1 Gbit/s

capability
Mapping mode VC-12; VC-4: VC-4-xv (X≤4)
Service type CBR, rt-VBR, nrt-VBR and UBR
Number of ATM 2048

connections
Traffic type and QoS IETF RFC2514, ATM forum TM 4.0
Supported ATM Spatial multicast and logical multicast

multicast connections
ATM protection 1+1, 1:1

Mode (ITU-T I.630)
ATM protection Unidirectional, bidirectional

operation mode (ITU-
T I.630)
ATM protection level VP-Ring, VC-Ring

(ITU-T I.630)
OAM function (ITU- AIS, RDI, LB, CC

T I.610)
Board level 1+1 Supported, with switching time less than 1s

protection
5.3.2 Application
The OptiX OSN 1500 supports the application of several types of ATM services.
Supported Services and Traffic Types

The OptiX OSN 1500 supports CBR, rt-VBR, nrt-VBR, and UBR services, but does not support
ABR services.

l The CBR services apply to voice services, and video services and circuit emulation services
of a constant bit rate. These services require guaranteed transmission bandwidth and
latency.
l The rt-VBR services apply to audio and video services of a variable bit rate.
l The nrt-VBR services are mainly used for data transmission.
l The UBR services are generally used for LAN emulation and file transfer.
In terms of the supported services and traffic types, the OptiX OSN 1500 meets IETF RFC2514,
ATM Forum TM 4.0, and ATM Forum UNI 3.1 Recommendations. See Table 5-10.
Table 5-10 ATM service types and traffic types

No. Traffic Type Service Parameter
Type
1 atmNoTrafficDescriptor UBR None
2 atmNoClpNoScr UBR.1 Clp01Pcr
CBR Clp01Pcr
3 atmClpNoTaggingNoScr CBR Clp01Pcr, Clp0Pcr
4 atmClpTaggingNoScr CBR Clp01Pcr, Clp0Pcr
5 atmNoClpScr nrt-VBR.1 Clp01Pcr, Clp01Scr, Mbs
6 atmClpNoTaggingScr nrt-VBR.2 Clp01Pcr, Clp0Scr, Mbs
7 atmClpTaggingScr nrt-VBR.3 Clp01Pcr, Clp0Scr, Mbs
8 atmClpTransparentNoScr CBR.1 Clp01Pcr, Cdvt
9 atmClpTransparentScr rt-VBR.1 Clp01Pcr, Clp01Scr, Mbs, Cdvt
10 atmNoClpTaggingNoScr UBR.2 Clp01Pcr, Cdvt
11 atmNoClpNoScrCdvt UBR Clp01Pcr, Cdvt
CBR Clp01Pcr, Cdvt
12 atmNoClpScrCdvt rt-VBR.1 Clp01Pcr, Clp01Scr, Mbs, Cdvt
13 atmClpNoTaggingScrCdvt rt-VBR.2 Clp01Pcr, Clp0Scr, Mbs, Cdvt
14 atmClpTaggingScrCdvt rt-VBR.3 Clp01Pcr, Clp0Scr, Mbs, Cdvt
Application of Bandwidth Exclusive ATM Services

When the bandwidth is not shared, ATM services are processed by the ATM service processing
board, at the ATM layer of only the source and sink NEs. On intermediate NEs, only SDH
timeslot pass-through is performed, without ATM layer processing. In this case, each ATM
service exclusively occupies a VC-3 or VC-4 path. At the central node, the ATM services are
converged to an STM-1 or STM-4 optical port for output.
As shown in Figure 5-20, the 34 Mbit/s ATM services of NE1 and NE3 exclusively occupy a
VC-3 bandwidth each. The 155 Mbit/s ATM service of NE2 exclusively occupies a VC-4

bandwidth. And only the SDH timeslot pass-through is performed at NE3. After the three
services reach the central station NE4, they are converged by the ATM board and are output
through the 622 Mbit/s optical interface on the front panel.
Figure 5-20 Application of bandwidth exclusive ATM services
DSLAM
34M ATM
Traffic
Service
Convergence
NE 1
155M ATM 2.5 Gbit/s SDH

622M ATM
Traffic Ring Traffic
NE 2 NE 4
Router
DSLAM
NE 3
34M ATM
Traffic
DSLAM
Application of Bandwidth Shared ATM Services

The VR-Ring and VC-Ring realize the bandwidth sharing and the statistical multiplexing for
ATM services. The ATM services on each NE share the same VC (VC-3, VC-4, or VC-4-xv)
path and are processed at the ATM layer of all NEs.
As shown in Figure 5-21, NE1 accesses E3 ATM traffic from the tributary board and sends it
to the ATM board for ATM switching and protection configuration (1+1 or 1:1). Then, after the
traffic is encapsulated into VC-4-xv, it is sent to the line by the cross-connect board. NE2
accesses STM-1 ATM traffic from the optical interface, and then performs the ATM switching
and protection configuration. At the same time, the ATM traffic from NE1 is dropped at NE2
for ATM layer processing. Then, the locally accessed traffic and the traffic from the upstream
are encapsulated into the same VC-4-xv and sent to the downstream NE. The processing at NE3
and NE4 is similar. One VP-Ring/VC-Ring has a maximum bandwidth of 300 Mbit/s.

Figure 5-21 VP-Ring/VC-Ring
DSLAM
The ATM traffic from NE1 is dropped to
the NE2,and then sent to VP/VC-Ring 34M ATM
after converged with local service. NE 1 Traffic
155M ATM
Traffic NE 4
Router
VC4-Xv
VP/VC-Ring
NE 2 622M ATM
DSLAM Traffic
NE 3
34M ATM
Traffic
DSLAM
Application of IMA Services

The inverse multiplexing for ATM (IMA) technology is used to demultiplex an ATM integrated
cell flow into several lower rate links. At the other end, the lower rate links are multiplexed to
recover the original integrated cell flow.
The IMA technology is applicable when ATM cells are transmitted through an interface of the
E1 rate or other rates. The IMA technology only provides a path, and does not process service
types and ATM cells. The signals at the ATM layer and a higher layer are transparently
transmitted.
Figure 5-22 illustrates the IMA service networking.

Figure 5-22 IMA service networking
RNC
NE1
T2000
40km
25km
NE2 NE4
NodeB 1 STM-16 two-fiber
bidirectional MSP
ring
NodeB 4
35km 30km
NE3
NodeB 2
NodeB 3
5.3.3 Protection
The ATM services of the OptiX OSN 1500 are protected at several layers.
The protections that are available are as follows:
l ATM layer protections

l Optical transmission layer protections, such as MSP, SNCP, SNCMP, and SNCTP
l 1+1 board level protection for IMA boards
ATM Layer Protections

Compliant with ITU-T I.630, the ATM layer, protections are classified in different ways, as
listed in Table 5-11. You can select a combination of the following protection types as required,
for example, 1+1 bidirectional non-revertive protection.
Table 5-11 Classification of ATM protection
Classification Scheme Protection Type
Bridging function 1+1 protection 1:1 protection
Switching direction Unidirectional protection Bidirectional protection
Connection level VPC protection VCC protection
Protection domain Trail protection SNCP, SNCMP, SNCTP
Revertive mode Revertive protection Non-revertive protection

Classification Scheme Protection Type
Protected object Single connection protection Group connection protection
Optical Transmission Layer Protections

The ATM service is also protected by the self-healing network at the optical transmission layer,
where the protection schemes include MSP, SNCP, SNCMP, and SNCTP. You can set the hold-
off time for the ATM protection switching. In this way, when network impairment occurs, the
MSP, SNCP , SNCMP or SNCTP at the optical transmission layer performs the switching first,
thus achieving the protection of the working ATM service (in this case, the protection switching
at the ATM layer is not performed).
1+1 Board Level Protection for IMA Boards

The IDQ1 and IDL4 boards support the 1+1 board level protection. For the configuration of 1
+1 board level protection, the IDQ1 and IDL4 boards must be inserted in paired slots.
5.4 SAN Features

The OptiX OSN 1500 provides a multiservice transparent transmission processing board,
N1MST4, to access and transparently transmit FC, FICON, ESCON and DVB-ASI services.
The detailed description of the N1MST4 board is as follows:
l The N1MST4 board provides four independent multiservice access ports. All the port
connectors are of the LC (SFP) type.
l Using all the four ports, the N1MST4 board supports 4 x FC (FC100/FICON and FC200)
services, with the total bandwidth of not more than 2.5 Gbit/s. The board also supports the
full-rate transmission of FC services, which means that one FC200 service or two FC100
services are supported.
l The first and second ports support the distance extension function at the SDH side. FC100
supports 3000 km, and FC200 supports 1500 km.
l The first and second ports support the distance extension function at the client side. FC100
supports 40 km, and FC200 supports 20 km.
l Using all the four ports, the N1MST4 board supports 4 x ESCON or 4 x DVB-ASI services.
l All services are encapsulated in the GFP-T format, which is compliant with ITU-T G.7041.
All services are mapped into VC-4 or VC-4-xc (x=4, 8, or 16).
Table 5-12 lists the service types and bit rates provided by the N1MST4 board.
Table 5-12 Service types and bit rates provided by N1MST4
Service Type Bit Rate Remarks
FC100/FICON 1062.5 Mbit/s SAN service
FC200 2125 Mbit/s SAN service
ESCON 200 Mbit/s SAN service

Service Type Bit Rate Remarks
DVB-ASI 270 Mbit/s Video service
5.5 DDN Features

This section describes the functions and application of the DDN features of the OptiX OSN
1500.
5.5.1 Functions
The OptiX OSN 1500 uses the N1DX1/N1DXA processing boards and the N1DM12 interface
board to access and process DDN services.
5.5.2 Application
When the DDN service access and convergence board is configured in the OptiX OSN 1500,
the SDH network is able to access and groom DDN services.
5.5.3 Protection
The OptiX OSN 1500 provides TPS protection for DDN services.
5.5.1 Functions
The OptiX OSN 1500 uses the N1DX1/N1DXA processing boards and the N1DM12 interface
board to access and process DDN services.
l The N1DX1 board processes 8 x 64 kbit/s services and eight framed E1 services and realizes
the service convergence. The N1DX1 also cross-connects N x 64 kbit/s signals at the system
side.
l The N1DXA board cross-connects N x 64 kbit/s signals at the system side.
l The N1DM12 board accesses framed E1 and N x 64 kbit/s services when it works with the
N1DX1 board.
Table 5-13 lists the functions and features of the DDN boards.
Table 5-13 Functions and features of N1DX1 (N1DM12) and N1DXA
Board Feature N1DX1 (N1DM12) N1DXA
Processing Processes 8 x 64 kbit/s and eight Cross-connects 63 x 64 kbit/s

capability framed E1 services, and cross- signals at the system side.
connects 48 x 64 kbit/s signals at the
system side.
Bandwidth at 48 x E1. 63 x E1.

SDH side
Interface N x 64 bit/s interface: RS449, None.

specifications EIA530, EIA530-A, V.35, V.24 and
X.21.Framed E1 interface: CRC4 and
non-CRC4.

Board Feature N1DX1 (N1DM12) N1DXA
Interface 75 ohms or 120 ohms. None.

impedance
Connector type The connectors are on the DM12 None.

board. The DB28 connector is used
for N x 64 bit/s signals, and the DB44
connector is used for framed E1
signals.
Protection Supports 1:N TPS protection with the Not supported.

switching time being less than 50 ms.
Loopback Supports inloop and outloop for all Supports inloop and outloop for
the ports. all the ports.
PRBS self-test Supported. Not supported.
Alarm and A large number of alarms and A large number of alarms and
performance performance events are provided to performance events are provided
facilitate the equipment management to facilitate the equipment
and maintenance. management and maintenance.
5.5.2 Application
When the DDN service access and convergence board is configured in the OptiX OSN 1500,
the SDH network is able to access and groom DDN services.
The N1DX1 and the N1DXA boards are mainly used for the following functions, so various
services such as RS449, EIA530, EIA530-A, V.35, V.24, X.21 and framed E1 can be accessed
to a transmission network.
l Point-to-point transmission for video conferences and routers
l Point-to-multipoint transmission for video conferences and routers
l Multipoint-to-multipoint transmission for video conferences and routers
l Access and convergence of multipoint routers
The N1DX1 and N1DXA boards are applicable to DDN private networks for small-sized and
medium-sized enterprises, government agencies, and banking and security service halls.
5.5.3 Protection
The OptiX OSN 1500 provides TPS protection for DDN services.
In TPS protection, when any working board is faulty or not in position, the DDN services are
switched to the protection board. This ensures the reliable operation of the equipment.
The OptiX OSN 1500 supports one group of 1:N (N≤2) TPS protection for the N1DX1 boards.

Product Description 6 DCN Features
6 DCN Features
About This Chapter
The OptiX OSN 1500 supports several DCN schemes.
6.1 Overview
The element management system (EMS) sets up communication with NEs through a data
communication network (DCN), to manage and maintain these NEs.
6.2 HWECC
The equipment supports the HWECC protocol, which is a private protocol defined by Huawei.
6.3 IP Over DCC
The equipment supports the IP over DCC protocol.
6.4 OSI Over DCC
The equipment supports the OSI over DCC protocol.

6 DCN Features Product Description
6.1 Overview
The element management system (EMS) sets up communication with NEs through a data
communication network (DCN), to manage and maintain these NEs.
In a DCN, the EMS and NEs are regarded as network nodes, which can be connected through
Ethernet or physical data communication channels (DCCs).
In practical networking, the EMS and NEs can be located on different floors in a building, in
different buildings, or even in different cities. Therefore, the connection between the EMS and
NEs usually requires an external DCN that consists of equipment such as LAN switch and
routers. On the other hand, the DCN among NEs is referred to as an internal DCN. This section
describes the internal DCN that consists of SDH NEs. See Figure 6-1.
Figure 6-1 DCN network
T2000
IP/OSI External DCN

DCN
HW ECC or
IP/OSI over
DCC
Internal DCN
OptiX optical transmission equipment
LAN switch
6.1.1 Background of SDH DCN

With the development of network scale, OAM of a network becomes more and more difficult.
6.1.2 SDH DCN Solutions
The OptiX OSN 1500 provides multiple DCN solutions.
6.1.3 DCC Resource Allocation Modes
The OptiX OSN 1500 supports different DCC resource allocation modes.

6.1.1 Background of SDH DCN

With the development of network scale, OAM of a network becomes more and more difficult.
In a DCN, the DCC bytes in SDH overheads are used as physical channels for DCN management.
The customer does not need to set up private DCN channels. For a DCN, the SDH provides the
following bandwidth:
l By using the D1-D3 bytes in SDH regenerator section overheads (RSOH), the SDH
provides a 192 kbit/s bandwidth for the DCN.
l By using the D4-D12 bytes in SDH multiplex section overheads (MSOH), the SDH
provides a 576 kbit/s bandwidth for the DCN.
l By using the D1-D12 bytes in SDH section overheads, the SDH provides a 768 kbit/s
bandwidth for the DCN.
Figure 6-2 shows the positions of DCC bytes in SDH overheads.
Figure 6-2 Positions of DCC bytes in SDH overheads
* *
A1 A1 A1 A2 A2 A2 J0
B1 E1 F1 RSOH
D1 D2 D3
AU PTR
B2 B2 B2 K1 K2
D4 D5 D6
D7 D8 D9 MSOH
D10 D11 D12
S1 M1 E2
6.1.2 SDH DCN Solutions

The OptiX OSN 1500 provides multiple DCN solutions.
The OptiX OSN 1500 supports the DCN networking by using the following protocols:
l HWECC
l TCP/IP (IP over DCC)
l OSI (OSI over DCC)
The HWECC protocol is a private protocol developed by Huawei to support the DCN networking
of OptiX equipment. The HWECC protocol features easy configuration and application. As it
is a private protocol, HWECC protocol does not meet the management requirements for hybrid
networking by using the equipment from other vendors.

The TCP/IP and OSI protocols are standard communication protocols that solve the management
issue in the case of hybrid networking with equipment from other vendors. These two protocols
can also be used in a network that consists of only Huawei equipment.
NOTE
When OptiX equipment is interconnected with other vendors' equipment that does not support the TCP/IP
and OSI standard communication protocols, Huawei provides the transparent transmission function for
DCC bytes, and provides relevant Ethernet service channels to transparently transmit the OAM information.
6.1.3 DCC Resource Allocation Modes

The OptiX OSN 1500 supports different DCC resource allocation modes.
Table 6-1 lists the DCC resource allocation modes supported by the OptiX OSN 1500.
Table 6-1 DCC allocation modes of the OptiX OSN 1500

DCC Allocation Q2CXL/R1CXL Q3CXL
Channel type Supports the D1-D3 and D4-D12 channel types.
Operation Mode 1 Supports 40 D1-D3 channels. Supports 80 D1-D3 channels.

mode
Mode 2 Supports 10 D1-D3 channels. Supports 20 D1-D3 channels.
Supports 10 D4-D12 channels. Supports 20 D4-D12 channels.

Supports 6 D4-D12 channels. Supports 12 D4-D12 channels.

Supports 4 D4-D12 channels.
Protocol type Supports HWECC, IP and OSI protocols.
Default mode Mode 1
The Q3CXL/R1CXL board can also provide two 2 Mbit/s external clock interfaces, which can
be used to transparently transmit DCC information. For details, refer to 2.19 DCC Transparent
Transmission Through External Clock Interfaces.
6.2 HWECC
The equipment supports the HWECC protocol, which is a private protocol defined by Huawei.
6.2.1 Features
The HWECC protocol is used to transmit OAM information among Huawei OptiX equipment.
6.2.2 Application
The HWECC protocol has three typical applications depending on the networking.
6.2.1 Features
The HWECC protocol is used to transmit OAM information among Huawei OptiX equipment.

In hybrid networking with equipment from other vendors, the HWECC protocol is not able to
identify the OAM information from other vendors' equipment, but can transparently transmit
such OAM information. By using the existing DCC resources, the user is able to meet the
requirements of a centralized management of equipment.
The HWECC protocol has the following features:
l The protocol provides a flexible networking environment.

l NEs can be connected through optical interfaces or Ethernet interfaces for embedded
control channel (ECC) communication.
l The protocol provides transparent transmission for the OAM information from other
vendors' equipment.
NOTE
In the OptiX OSN 1500, each slot supports a maximum of eight ECC channels.
6.2.2 Application
The HWECC protocol has three typical applications depending on the networking.
OAM Information Transmitted by OptiX OSN Equipment Only

When OAM information is transmitted only among the OptiX OSN equipment, a gateway NE
is required for the communication with the T2000. The T2000 is connected to the gateway NE
through the Qx interface and tests, manages and maintains the entire network.
The T2000 system helps improve the network service quality and ensure a reasonable use of
network resources. A non-gateway NE is connected to the gateway NE through ECC, to realize
the transmission of the OAM information.
In some cases, extended ECC communication through Ethernet interfaces is also available
among NEs. See Figure 6-3.
Figure 6-3 Networking with extended ECC
HUB1 GNE1 NE6

NE6 HUB2 NE7 NE12
PC
NE2 NE5 NE8 NE11
NE3 NE4 NE9 NE10
Network cable Subnet1 Subnet2

Fiber

OAM Information Transparently Transmitted by OptiX OSN Equipment

When there is OptiX OSN equipment between third-party equipment, the OAM information of
the third-party equipment can be transparently transmitted through D4-D12 bytes of the OptiX
OSN equipment. See Figure 6-4.
Figure 6-4 OAM information transparently transmitted by OptiX OSN equipment (ECC)
D4-D12
D1-D3 Transparent D1-D3

transmission
Third party Third party
equipment equipment
OAM Information Transparently Transmitted by Third-Party Equipment

When there is third-party equipment between OptiX OSN equipment, the OAM information of
the OptiX OSN equipment can be transparently transmitted through D4-D12 bytes of the
equipment. See Figure 6-5.
Figure 6-5 OAM information transparently transmitted by third-party equipment (ECC)
Third party D4-D12 Third party

equipment equipment
Transparent
transmission
D1-D3 D1-D3
6.3 IP Over DCC

The equipment supports the IP over DCC protocol.

6.3.1 Features
The OptiX OSN equipment can transmit network management information by using the IP over
DCC protocol.
6.3.2 Application
The IP over DCC protocol has two typical applications depending on the networking.
6.3.1 Features
The OptiX OSN equipment can transmit network management information by using the IP over
DCC protocol.
The IP over DCC protocol has the following features:
l The TCP/IP protocol realizes the compatibility with the equipment from other vendors. In
this case, the network management is simplified.
l The Layer 3 functions of protocol stacks are adopted. In this case, additional overheads or
server trails are not required for the transmission of the OAM information of other vendors'
equipment.
l The protocol provides flexible networking modes.
l Several application layer protocols are supported.
6.3.2 Application
The IP over DCC protocol has two typical applications depending on the networking.

the OptiX OSN equipment can be transparently transmitted by the third-party equipment, by
using the IP over DCC protocol. See Figure 6-6.
Figure 6-6 OAM information transparently transmitted by the third-party equipment (IP)
Third party
equipment
IP over DCC Third party

equipment


the third-party equipment can be transparently transmitted by the OptiX OSN equipment, by
using the IP over DCC protocol. See Figure 6-7.
Figure 6-7 OAM information transparently transmitted by the OptiX OSN equipment (IP)

equipment equipment
IP over DCC
Third party
equipment
Third party
equipment
6.4 OSI Over DCC

The equipment supports the OSI over DCC protocol.
6.4.1 Features
The OSI over DCC protocol is used for hybrid networking between the OptiX OSN equipment
and other optical network equipment that supports OSI over DCC.
6.4.2 Application
The OSI over DCC protocol has two typical applications depending on the networking.
6.4.1 Features
The OSI over DCC protocol is used for hybrid networking between the OptiX OSN equipment
and other optical network equipment that supports OSI over DCC.
The OSI over DCC protocol has the following features:
l In a transmission network that consists of equipment from different vendors, the OSI over
DCC protocol enables the transparent transmission of OAM information at the network
layer, and thus provides a more flexible networking.
l The user does not need to set up additional DCN channels. The existing DCC resources
realize the centralized management of equipment from different vendors.

6.4.2 Application
The OSI over DCC protocol has two typical applications depending on the networking.

the OptiX OSN equipment can be transparently transmitted by third-party equipment, by using
the OSI over DCC protocol.
As shown in Figure 6-8, Huawei equipment is located at the network edges, and the equipment
from other vendors is located in the backbone network. The OAM information between the
T2000 and the OptiX OSN equipment needs to be forwarded by the equipment from other
vendors. In this case, each subnet that consists of the Huawei equipment must have a minimum
of one gateway NE.
Figure 6-8 OAM information transparently transmitted by the third-party equipment (OSI)
OSI Third party

protocol equipment
stack
OSI
protocol
stack
OSI over DCC
Third party
equipment
OSI
protocol
stack

the third-party equipment can be transparently transmitted by the OptiX OSN equipment, by
using the OSI over DCC protocol.
As shown in Figure 6-9, the Huawei equipment is located in the backbone network, and the
equipment from other vendors is located at the network edges. The OAM information between
the network management system and the equipment of other vendors needs to be forwarded by
the Huawei equipment.
NOTE
In actual application, a network cannot always be divided in this manner. A more common hybrid
networking is that the equipment from different vendors coexists at the core layer and the peripheral layer.

Figure 6-9 OAM information transparently transmitted by the OptiX OSN equipment (OSI)

equipment equipment
OSI protocol stack
OSI
protocol
stack
OSI o ver DCC
Third party
equipment
Third party
OSI protocol
equipment
stack

Product Description 7 ASON Features
7 ASON Features
About This Chapter
The OptiX GMPLS control plan (GCP) is the ASON software developed by Huawei. The OptiX
GCP applies to the OptiX OSN product series. By using this software, the traditional network
can evolve into the ASON network. The OptiX OSN product series support the ASON features.
7.1 Automatic Discovery of the Topologies

The automatic discovery of the topologies includes the automatic discovery of the control links
and TE links.
7.2 End-to-End Service Configuration
The ASON network supports end-to-end service configuration, which is very convenient.
7.3 Mesh Networking Protection and Restoration
The ASON provides mesh networking protection to enhance service survivability and network
security.
7.4 ASON Clock Tracing
ASON NEs support both the traditional clock tracing mode and the ASON clock tracing mode.
In an ASON domain, some or all ASON NEs can be set with the ASON clock tracing mode. In
this way, these ASON NEs form an ASON clock subnet.
7.5 SLA
The ASON network can provide services of different QoS to different clients.
7.6 Diamond Services
Diamond services have the best protection ability. When there are enough resources in the
network, diamond services provide a permanent 1+1 protection. Diamond services are applicable
to voice and data services, VIP private line, such as banking, security and aviation.
7.7 Gold Services
Gold services are applicable to voice and significant data services. Compared with diamond
services, gold services have greater bandwidth utilization.
7.8 Silver Services
The service restoring time ranges from one second to a few secondsfrom hundred milliseconds
to a few seconds. The silver level service is suitable for those data or internet services that have
low real-time requirement.

7 ASON Features Product Description
7.9 Copper Services

The copper services are seldom used. Generally, temporary services, such as the abrupt services
in holidays, are configured as copper services.
7.10 Iron Services
The iron services are also seldom used. Generally, temporary services are configured as iron
services. For example, when service volume soars, during holidays, the services can be
configured as iron services to fully use the bandwidth resources.
7.11 Tunnels
Tunnels are mainly used to carry VC-12 or VC-3 services. Tunnels are also called as ASON
server trails.
7.12 Service Association
The service association can be used to associate the same service accessed from different points
into the ASON network.
7.13 Service Optimization
After the topology changes several times, the ASON may have less satisfactory routes and thus
requires service optimization. Service optimization involves creating a new LSP, switching the
optimized service to the new LSP, and deleting the original LSP to change and optimize the
service without disrupting the service. Of course, the service route can be restricted during the
service optimization.
7.14 Service Migration
OptiX GCP supports the conversion between ASON services, and between ASON services and
traditional services. The service conversion is in-service conversion, which would not interrupt
the services.
7.15 Reverting Services to Original Routes
After many changes in an ASON network, service routes may differ from the original routes.
You can revert all service to the original routes.
7.16 Preset Restoring Trail
Customers may require that the services route to a specified trail in the case of trail failure. To
this end, the OptiX GCP provides the function of presetting the trail for restoration. This function
helps increase the controllability of service routing.
7.17 Shared Mesh Restoration Trail
For a revertive silver service, a restoration trail can be reserved. In the case of rerouting, the
silver service reroutes to the reserved restoration trail. Such a restoration trail is called a shared
mesh restoration trail.
7.18 Equilibrium of Network Traffic
The ASON network distributes the service traffic to different routes as possible.
7.19 Shared Risk Link Group
In the ASON network, the SRLG needs to be set when a group of optical fibers are in one cable.
7.20 ASON Trail Group
The ASON supports amalgamation of ASON and LCAS.
7.21 Protocol Encryption
You can encrypt the RSVP and OSPF in an ASON domain to improve the security of the network.
7.22 Alarms of the Control Plane
To increase the network maintainability, the ASON network supports the reporting alarms of
the control plane.

7.1 Automatic Discovery of the Topologies

The automatic discovery of the topologies includes the automatic discovery of the control links
and TE links.
7.1.1 Auto-Discovery of Control Links

The ASON network automatically discovers the control links through the OSPF-TE protocol.
7.1.2 Auto-Discovery of TE Links
The ASON network spreads the TE links to the entire network through the OSPF-TE protocol.
7.1.1 Auto-Discovery of Control Links

The ASON network automatically discovers the control links through the OSPF-TE protocol.
When the fiber connection (including the inter-station fiber automatically discovered and the
intra-station fiber manually configured) is complete in an ASON network, each ASON NE uses
the OSPF protocol to discover the control links and then floods the information about its own
control links to the entire network. See Figure 7-1. As a result, each NE obtains the information
of the control links in the entire network and also obtains the information about the network-
wide control topology. The following figure shows the details. Each ASON NE then computes
the shortest route to any ASON NE and writes these routes into the route forwarding table, which
is used for the signaling RSVP to transmit and receive packets.
Figure 7-1 Auto-discovery of control links
ASON domain

ASON domain
When the fiber connection in the entire network is complete, ASON NEs automatically discover
the network-wide control topology and report the topology information to the management
system for real-time display. See Figure 7-2.
Figure 7-2 Management of control topology
R1 R4
R2
R3
: ASON NE
: User equipment

R1 R4
R2
R3
: ASON NE
: User equipment
7.1.2 Auto-Discovery of TE Links

The ASON network spreads the TE links to the entire network through the OSPF-TE protocol.
After an ASON NE creates a control channel between neighboring NEs through LMP, the TE
link verification can be started. Each ASON NE floods its own TE links to the entire network
through OSPF-TE. Each NE then gets the network-wide TE links, that is, the network-wide
resource topology.
ASON software detects change in the resource topology in real time, including the deletion and
addition of links, and the change in the link parameters, and then reports the change to NMS,
which performs a real-time refresh.
As shown in Figure 7-3, if one TE link is cut, the NM updates the resource topology displayed
on the NM in real time.

Figure 7-3 TE link auto-discovery
R1 R4
R2
R3
: ASON NE
: User equipment
R1 R4
R2
R3
: ASON NE
: User equipment
7.2 End-to-End Service Configuration

The ASON network supports end-to-end service configuration, which is very convenient.

The ASON supports both SDHWDM permanent connections and end-to-end ASON services.
To configure an ASON service, you only need to specify its source node, sink node, bandwidth
requirement, and protection level. Service routing and cross-connection at intermediate nodes
are all automatically completed by the network. You can also set explicit node, excluded node,
explicit link and excluded link to constrain the service routing.
Compared with the service configuration of SDH networks, it fully utilizes the routing and
signaling functions of the ASON NEs and thus it is convenient to configure services.
For example, consider the configuration of a 155 Mbit/s ASON service between A and I in
Figure 7-4. The network automatically finds the A-D-E-I route and configures cross-connection
at nodes A, D, E and I. Although there is more than one route from A to I, the network calculates
the best route according to the configured algorithm. It is assumed that A-D-E-I is the best route.
The service is created as follows:
l Choose the bandwidth granularity.
l Choose the server level.
l Choose the source node.
l Choose the sink node.
l Create the service.
Figure 7-4 End-to-end service configuration
R1 R4
E
I
D
F
C
A
B
H
G
R3
R2
: ASON NE
: User equipment

R1 R4
E
I
D F
C
A
B
H
G
R2
R3
: ASON NE
: User equipment
7.3 Mesh Networking Protection and Restoration

The ASON provides mesh networking protection to enhance service survivability and network
security.
As a main networking mode of ASON, mesh features high flexibility and scalability. Compared
with the traditional SDH networking mode, the mesh networking does not need to reserve 50%
bandwidth. Thus, it can save bandwidth resources to satisfy increasingly large bandwidth
demand. In addition, WDM network, this networking mode also provides more than one
recovery route for each services so it can best utilize the network resources and enhance the
network security.
As shown in Figure 7-5, when the C-G link fails, to restore the service, the network calculates
another route from D to H and creates a new LSP to transmit the service.

Figure 7-5 Trail restoration
R1 R4
E
I
D
F
A C
B
H
G
R2
R3
: ASON NE
: User equipment
Recovery route
R1 R4
E
I
D
F
C
A
B
H
G
R2
R3
: ASON NE
: User equipment
7.4 ASON Clock Tracing

ASON NEs support both the traditional clock tracing mode and the ASON clock tracing mode.
In an ASON domain, some or all ASON NEs can be set with the ASON clock tracing mode. In
this way, these ASON NEs form an ASON clock subnet.
In an ASON clock subnet, each ASON NE automatically traces the best clock source. The clock
is then automatically traced and switched. In this way, clock interlock is avoided. In addition,
the clock configuration is simplified. For an ASON domain with many ASON NEs, several
ASON clock subnets should be created if more than 20 ASON NEs are on the clock tracing link

in a clock subnet. Each ASON clock subnet generates its own clock tracing relation to trace the
primary source in the local subnet. In each ASON clock subnet, the change of primary source
and link does not affect the clock tracing relation in other ASON clock subnets. Generally, one
ASON clock subnet is created in one ASON domain.
Advantages of the ASON Clock Tracing

The ASON clock tracing has the following advantages.
l Simple configuration: For one ASON clock subnet, only the primary clock need be created
to realize auto-tracing and auto-switching of the clock.
l Auto-tracing and auto-switching: In an ASON clock subnet, the clock has the auto-tracing
and auto-switching features.
l The ASON tracing avoids the clock interlock.
Clock Protection Protocol

To realize the ASON clock tracing, all ASON NEs within the ASON clock subnet must start the
standard SSM protocol.
Primary Reference Clock Source

Within the ASON clock subnet, the ASON software automatically sets the clock tracing relation.
At the edge of an ASON clock subnet, the external clock source, or internal clock source of edge
NEs should be manually set as the primary reference clock source for the ASON clock subnet.
The following clock sources can be set as the primary clock reference source.
l Line clock source
l External clock source
l Internal clock source of edge NEs
For one ASON clock subnet, several primary reference clock sources can be set. The ASON
clock subnet, however, traces only one of these primary reference clock sources. The other clock
sources back up the traced clock source. When the selected primary reference clock source fails,
the entire subnet automatically traces another backup primary reference clock source. In this
way, a new clock tracing tree is established. A priority should be set for the primary reference
clock source.
As shown in Figure 7-6, in an ASON clock subnet, primary and secondary clock sources are
configured at NE A and NE B respectively. Other ASON NEs in the ASON clock subnet
automatically create clock tracing trees by computation. In this way, the entire subnet traces the
primary BITS and all clocks in the subnet keep synchronous. When the primary BITS fails, each
ASON NE creates the clock tracing tree by re-computation. In this way, the entire subnet traces
the secondary BITS and all clocks in the subnet keep synchronous.

Figure 7-6 ASON clock subnet
BITS BITS
Primary base B Standby base

clock source clock source
A
:ASON NE
: BITS
Interfacing Mode
By default, the ASON software automatically creates the clock tracing tree according to the
network topology. In this way, each ASON NE then can automatically trace an available clock
source. If necessary, set the interfacing mode of some optical interfaces to the clock quality not
detected mode to adjust the clock tracing tree. In this way, these optical interfaces are excluded
from the options of the clock tracing sources for ASON NEs.
Regeneration Source
A regeneration source is a device used to regenerate clock signals. If an NE is configured with
such a device, the system tracing clock of the NE is strengthened and the quality of the out-link
clock is increased. During the computation for creating the clock tracing tree, the clock signals
strengthened by the regeneration source are selected with priority.
For configuration of the regeneration source, 2M input and output interfaces are used. An NE
receives the upstream clock signals and outputs them to the regeneration device. The regenerated
clock signals then return to the NE through the 2M input interface. The clock then works as the
system tracing clock for the NE. In this way, clock signals are strengthened and the line clock
signals output from the NE are also strengthened.
Clock Tracing Relation in the ASON Clock Subnet

The clock tracing relation in the ASON clock subnet is as follows:
l The ASON clock subnet take priority to trace the primary source of the highest clock
quality.
l If multiple primary reference clock sources are of the same quality, the ASON clock subnet
traces the primary reference clock source of the highest priority.

l If multiple primary reference clock sources are of the same quality and priority, the ASON
clock subnet traces the clock source in the trail with the least hops to generate multiple
clock tracing trees. In this way, too long clock tracing trail is avoided.
l If all the primary reference clock sources are invalid, the ASON clock subnet traces the
internal clock source with the smallest node ID. Thus, clocks in the entire network are
synchronized.
Hybrid Network of the ASON Clock Subnet and Traditional Clock Subnet
If the traditional clock subnet works in the SSM disabled mode, you should configure the quality
and priority of the primary reference clock source in the ASON clock subnet.
If the traditional clock network works in the standard SSM mode, you should configure only the
quality of the primary reference clock source in the ASON clock subnet.
If the traditional clock subnet works in the extended SSM mode, you should only modify the
subnet to the standard SSM mode, and then form a hybrid network with the ASON clock subnet.
Modifying the Traditional ASON Subnet to the ASON Clock Subnet

If the ASON NE is working in the traditional clock tracing mode and in the SSM disabled mode,
you should create the ASON clock subnet and configure the quality and priority of the primary
reference clock source.
If the ASON NE is working in the traditional clock tracing mode and in the standard SSM mode,
you should directly create the ASON clock subnet and configure the priority of the primary
reference clock source.
If the ASON NE is working in the traditional clock tracing mode and in the extended SSM mode,
you should modify the extended SSM mode to the standard SSM mode. Then you should create
the ASON clock subnet and configure the priority of the primary reference clock source.
7.5 SLA
The ASON network can provide services of different QoS to different clients.
The service level agreement (SLA) is used to classify services according to the service protection,
as listed in Table 7-1Table 7-2.
Table 7-1 Service level
Service Protection and Implementation Switching and

Restoration Scheme Means Rerouting Time
Diamond Protection and restoration SNCP and rerouting Switching time < 50ms
service Rerouting time < 2 s
Gold Protection and restoration MSP and rerouting Switching time < 50ms
service Rerouting time < 2 s
Silver Restoration Rerouting Rerouting time < 2 s

service

Service Protection and Implementation Switching and

Restoration Scheme Means Rerouting Time
Copper No protection - -
service No restoration
Iron Preemptable MSP -

service
Table 7-2 Service level
Service Protection and Implementatio Switching Rerouting

Restoration n Means Time Time
Scheme
Diamond Protection and 1+1 protection Less than 50ms Several seconds
service restoration and rerouting
Silver Restoration Rerouting - Several seconds

service
Copper No protection - - -
service No restoration
Table 7-3 lists details of the TE links used by ASON services.
Table 7-3 TE links used by ASON services
Service Level Working Protection Non-Protection

Resource of TE Resource of TE Resource of TE Link
Link Link
Diam Service Not used Not used Used

ond creation
servic
e Service Not used Used when the Used with the priority
rerouting resource is not
enough
Service Not used Not used Used

optimization
Gold Service Used with the Not used Used when the
servic creation priority resource is not enough
e
Service Used with the Used when the Used when the
rerouting priority resource is not resource is not enough
enough
Service Used with the Not used Used when the

optimization priority resource is not enough

Service Level Working Protection Non-Protection

Resource of TE Resource of TE Resource of TE Link
Link Link
Silver Service Not used Not used Used

servic creation
e
Service Not used Used when the Used with the priority
rerouting resource is not
enough
Service Not used Not used Used

optimization
Copp Service Not used Not used Used

er creation
servic
e Service Not used Not used Used
optimization
Iron Service Not used Used with the Used when the
servic creation priority resource is not enough
e
7.6 Diamond Services

Diamond services have the best protection ability. When there are enough resources in the
network, diamond services provide a permanent 1+1 protection. Diamond services are applicable
to voice and data services, VIP private line, such as banking, security and aviation.
A diamond service is a service with 1+1 protection from the source node to the sink node. It is
also called a 1+1 service. For a diamond service, there are two different LSPs available between
the source node and the sink node. The two LSPs should be as separate as possible. One is the
working LSP and the other is the protection LSP. The same service is transmitted to the working
LSP and the protection LSP at the same time. If the working LSP is normal, the sink node receives
the service from the working LSP; otherwise, from the protection LSP.
Figure 7-7 shows a diamond service.

Figure 7-7 Diamond Services

Working LSP
R1 R4
E
I
D
F
A C
B
H
G
R2
R3
Protection LSP
:ASON NE
:User equipment
Working LSP
R1 R4
E I
D
F
C
A
B
H
G
R2
R3
Protection LSP : ASON NE
: User equipment
There are three types of diamond services.

l Permanent 1+1 diamond service: rerouting is triggered once an LSP fails.
l Rerouting 1+1 diamond service: rerouting is triggered only when both LSPs fail.
l Non-rerouting diamond service: rerouting is never triggered.
Table 7-4Table 7-5 lists the attributes of the permanent 1+1 diamond service.
Table 7-6Table 7-7 lists the attributes of the rerouting 1+1 diamond service.
Table 7-8Table 7-9 lists the attributes of the non-rerouting 1+1 diamond service.

Table 7-4 Attributes of the permanent 1+1 diamond services

Attribute Permanent 1+1 Diamond Service
Requirements for Sufficient non-protection resources are available between the

creation source node and the sink node.
Protection and restoration l If the resources are sufficient, two LSPs are always available
for a permanent 1+1 diamond service. One is the active LSP
and the other is the standby LSP.
l If the resources are not sufficient, one LSP can still be
reserved for a permanent 1+1 diamond service to ensure the
service survivability.
Rerouting
Revertive l Revertive services support reverting to the original route

automatically.
l Non-revertive services support reverting to the original route
manually.
Service migration l Supports migration between permanent SNCP connections

and diamond services.
l Supports migration between diamond services and silver
services.
l Supports migration between diamond services and copper
services.
Service switching Supports manual switching.
Service optimization Supports service optimization.
Service association Does not support service association.
ASON server trail Does not support diamond ASON server trails.
Alarms to trigger R_LOS, R_LOF, B2_EXC, B2_SD, MS_AIS, MS_RDI,

rerouting AU_AIS
Table 7-5 Attributes of the permanent 1+1 diamond services

Requirements for Sufficient non-protection resources are available between the source
creation node and the sink node.
Protection type Supports intra-board 1+1 protection. The protection schemes are OTU
intra-board dual fed and OTU+OLP dual fed.

Protection and l If the resources are sufficient, two LSPs are always available for a
restoration permanent 1+1 diamond service. One is the active LSP and the other
is the standby LSP.
l If the resources are not sufficient, one LSP can still be reserved for a
permanent 1+1 diamond service to ensure the service survivability.
Rerouting
Revertive Supports reverting to the original route manually.
Service migration Supports migration between diamond services and traditional 1+1
services.
Service Supports service optimization.

optimization
Alarms to trigger The FIU detects the MUT_LOS alarm or the FIU is out of service.
rerouting
Table 7-6 Attributes of the rerouting 1+1 diamond service
Attribute Rerouting 1+1 Diamond Service
creation node and the sink node
Protection and l When the standby LSP fails, services are not switched. Rerouting is
restoration not triggered.
l When the active LSP fails, services are switched to the standby LSP
for transmission. Rerouting is not triggered.
l When both the active and the standby LSPs fail, rerouting is triggered
to create a new LSP to restore services.
Rerouting

automatically.
manually.
Service migration l Supports migration between permanent SNCP connections and

diamond services.
l Supports migration between diamond services and silver services.
l Supports migration between diamond services and copper services.

optimization

Service Does not support service association.

association
ASON server trail Does not support diamond ASON server trails
Alarms to trigger R_LOS, R_LOF, B2_EXC, B2_SD, MS_AIS, MS_RDI, AU_AIS

rerouting
Table 7-7 Attributes of the rerouting 1+1 diamond service

Requirements Sufficient non-protection resources are available between the

for creation source node and the sink node.
Protection type Supports intra-board 1+1 protection. The protection schemes are
OTU intra-board dual fed and OTU+OLP dual fed.
Protection and l When the standby LSP fails, services are not switched.
restoration Rerouting is not triggered.
l When the active LSP fails, services are switched to the standby
LSP for transmission. Rerouting is not triggered.
l When both the active and the standby LSPs fail, rerouting is
triggered to create a new LSP to restore services.
Rerouting
Service Supports migration between diamond services and traditional 1+1

migration services.
Service Supports manual switching.

switching

optimization
rerouting
Table 7-8 Attributes of the non-rerouting 1+1 diamond service

Attribute Non-rerouting 1+1 diamond service
Requirements Sufficient non-protection resources are available between the source node
for creation and the sink node

Protection and l When the active LSP fails, services are switched to the standby LSP
restoration for transmission. Rerouting is not triggered.
l When the standby LSP fails, services are not switched. Rerouting is
not triggered.
l When both the active and the standby LSPs fail, rerouting is not
triggered.
Service l Supports migration between permanent SNCP connections and

migration diamond services.
l Supports migration between diamond services and silver services.

switching

optimization
Service Does not support service association.

association
ASON server Does not support diamond ASON server trails.

trail
Table 7-9 Attributes of the non-rerouting 1+1 diamond service
Requirements Sufficient non-protection resources are available between the source node
for creation and the sink node.
Protection type Supports intra-board 1+1 protection. The protection schemes are OTU
intra-board dual fed and OTU+OLP dual fed.
Protection and l When the active LSP fails, services are switched to the standby LSP
restoration for transmission. Rerouting is not triggered.
l When the standby LSP fails, services are not switched. Rerouting is
not triggered.
l When both the active and the standby LSPs fail, rerouting is not
triggered.
Service Supports migration between diamond services and traditional 1+1

migration services.

switching

optimization

7.7 Gold Services

Gold services are applicable to voice and significant data services. Compared with diamond
services, gold services have greater bandwidth utilization.
A gold service needs only one LSP. This LSP must use working resource of TE links or non-
protection resource of TE links. When a fiber on the path of a gold service is cut, the ASON
triggers MSP switching to protect the service at first. If the multiplex section protection fails,
the ASON triggers rerouting to restore the service.
As shown in Figure 7-8, a gold service can be configured from A to I.
Figure 7-8 Gold services
R4
R1 E MSP
I
D
F
MSP C
A
B MSP
H
G
R2
R3
:ASON NE
:User equipment
Table 7-10 lists the attributes of gold services.
Table 7-10 Attributes of gold services
Attribute Gold Service
Requirements for Sufficient working resources or non-protection resources are

creation available between the source node and the sink node.
Multiplex section l Supports using the working resources of a 1:1 linear multiplex
protection section protection chain to create gold services.
l Supports using the working resources of a two-fiber
bidirectional multiplex section protection ring to create gold
services.
l Supports using the working resources of a four-fiber
bidirectional multiplex section protection ring to create gold
services.

Attribute Gold Service
Protection and When a fiber is cut for the first time, MS switching is performed to
restoration protect services. When MS switching fails, rerouting is then
triggered to restore services.
Rerouting

automatically.
manually.
Preset restoring trail Supports setting the preset restoring trail.
Service migration l Supports migration between permanent connections and gold

services.
l Supports migration between gold services and silver services.
l Supports migration between gold services and copper services.
ASON server trail Supports gold ASON server trails.
Alarms to trigger R_LOS, R_LOF, B2_EXC, B2_SD, MS_AIS, MS_RDI, AU_AIS

rerouting
7.8 Silver Services

The service restoring time ranges from one second to a few secondsfrom hundred milliseconds
to a few seconds. The silver level service is suitable for those data or internet services that have
low real-time requirement.
Silver services are also called rerouting services. Upon an LSP failure, periodical rerouting is
performed until the rerouting succeeds. If there are not enough resources, service may be
interrupted.
As shown in Figure 7-9, A-B-G-H-I is a silver service trail. If the fiber between B and G is cut,
the ASON triggers rerouting from A to create a new LSP that does not pass the cut fiber. Hence,
services are protected.

Figure 7-9 A silver service
E
R1 R4
E
LSP after rerouting
I
D F
A C
B
H
G
R2
R3
Original LSP
: ASON NE
: User equipment
R1 R4
E
LSP after rerouting
I
D
F
C
A
B
H
G
R2
Original LSP R3
: ASON NE
: User equipment
Table 7-11Table 7-12 lists the attributes of silver services.
Table 7-11 Attributes of silver services
Attribute Silver Services

Service restoration When the original LSP fails, rerouting is triggered to create a new
LSP to restore services.
Rerouting


automatically.
manually.
Shared mesh restoration Supports setting the shared mesh restoration trial for revertive
trail silver trials.
Service migration l Supports migration between permanent connections and silver

services.
l Supports migration between diamond services and silver
services.
l Supports migration between gold services and silver services.
l Supports migration between silver services and copper
services.
Service optimization l Supports service optimization.

l If a revertive silver service reroutes, it cannot be optimized
before reverting to its original route.
Service association Supports service association.
ASON server trail Supports silver ASON server trails.
Alarms to trigger R_LOS, R_LOF, B2_EXC, B2_SD, MS_AIS, MS_RDI,

rerouting AU_AIS
Table 7-12 Attributes of silver services


Service restoration When the original LSP fails, rerouting is triggered to create a new
LSP to restore services.
Rerouting
Service migration Supports migration between traditional non-protection services

and silver services.

rerouting
7.9 Copper Services

The copper services are seldom used. Generally, temporary services, such as the abrupt services
in holidays, are configured as copper services.
Copper services are also called non-protection services. If an LSP fails, services do not reroute
and are interrupted. Table 7-13Table 7-14 lists the attributes of copper services.
Table 7-13 Attributes of copper services
Attribute Silver Service
Service restoration Does not support rerouting.
Service migration l Supports migration between permanent connections and copper

services.
l Supports migration between gold services and copper services.
l Supports migration between silver services and copper services.

optimization
ASON server trail Supports ASON server trails.
Table 7-14 Attributes of copper services
Attribute Silver Service
Service restoration Does not support rerouting.
Service migration Supports migration between traditional non-protection services and

copper services.

optimization

7.10 Iron Services

The iron services are also seldom used. Generally, temporary services are configured as iron
services. For example, when service volume soars, during holidays, the services can be
configured as iron services to fully use the bandwidth resources.
An iron service is also called a preemptable service. Iron services apply non-protection resources
or protection resources of the TE link to create LSPs. When an LSP fails, services are interrupted
and rerouting is not triggered.
l When the iron service uses the protection resources of the TE link, if the MS switching
occurs, the iron service is preempted and the service is interrupted. After the MS is
recovered, the iron service is restored. The interruption, preemption and restoration of the
iron service are all reported to the NMS.
l When the iron service uses the non-protection resources, if the network resources are
insufficient, the iron service may be preempted by the rerouted silver service or diamond
service. Thus, the service is interrupted.
Table 7-15 lists the attributes of iron service.
Table 7-15 Attributes of iron services
Attribute Iron Service
Requirements Sufficient protection resources or non-protection resources are available

for creation between the source node and the sink node.
Multiplex To create iron services, the following resources can be used:

section l Protection resources of 1:1 linear MSP
protection
l Protection resources of two-fiber bidirectional MSP
l Protection resources of four-fiber bidirectional MSP
Service Does not support rerouting.

restoration
Service Supports migration between iron services and extra permanent

migration connections.

optimization
7.11 Tunnels
Tunnels are mainly used to carry VC-12 or VC-3 services. Tunnels are also called as ASON
server trails.
When lower order services are to be created, first create a VC-4 tunnel. The protection level for
the tunnel can be gold, silver or copper. Then, use the management system to complete the
configuration of the lower order service. See Figure 7-10.

Figure 7-10 Tunnel
VC4 tunnel VC12 service
R1 R4
R3
R2
: ASON NE
ASON domain : User equipment
The configuration of a tunnel is different from that of the above-mentioned service types. Its
cross-connection from the tributary board to the line board can only be configured manually. As
shown in Figure 7-11, there is a tunnel between NE1 and NE2 which can be a gold ASON server
trail, silver ASON server trail or copper ASON server trail. During service creation, the ASON
automatically chooses the line boards of NE1 and NE2 and the timeslots of the line boards.
After creating tunnels, you must manually create and delete the lower order cross-connection
from the tributary board to the line board. During rerouting or optimization of the tunnels,
however, the cross-connections at the source and sink nodes automatically switch to the new
ports.
NOTE
In addition, the end-to-end tunnel and lower order service can be created.
Figure 7-11 Lower cross-connection
VC12 ASON server trail VC12
NE1 VC4 NE2
Cross-
connection
VC12
Tributary
Line unit
unit

Table 7-16 lists the attributes of tunnels.
Table 7-16 Attributes of tunnels

Attribute Gold Tunnel Silver Tunnel Copper Tunnel
Requirements Same as gold services Same as silver Same as copper

for creation services services
Service Same as gold services Same as silver Does not support

restoration services rerouting
Rerouting l Supports rerouting l Supports rerouting Does not support

lockout. lockout. rerouting
l Supports rerouting l Supports rerouting
priority. priority.
Revertive Not supported Not supported Not supported
Pre- Not supported Supported Not supported

configuration
of restoring
route
Service Not supported Supported Supported

association
Service l Supports migration between tunnel services and permanent

migration connections.
l Supports migration between silver tunnels and copper tunnels.
l Supports migration between gold tunnels and silver tunnels.
l Supports migration between gold tunnels and copper tunnels.
Service Supports service optimization..

optimization
Tunnel level VC-4
7.12 Service Association

The service association can be used to associate the same service accessed from different points
into the ASON network.
Service association involves associating two ASON services that have different routes. During
the rerouting or optimization of either service, the rerouting service avoids the route of the
associated service. Service association is mainly used for services (dual-source) accessed from
two points.
As shown in Figure 7-12Figure 7-13, D-E-I and A-B-G-H are two associated LSPs. When the
fiber between B and G is cut, the rerouting of the A-B-G-H LSP avoids the D-E-I LSP.

Figure 7-12 Service association
R1 R4
E I
1＋1 protection
D
F 1＋1 protection
C
A
B
H
G
R2
R3 : ASON NE
: User equipment
Figure 7-13 Service association
R1 R4
E
1＋1protection 1＋1protection
I
D
F
C
A
B
H
G
R2
R3
: ASON NE
: User equipment
Table 7-17 lists the attributes of service association.
Table 7-17 Attributes of service association

Attribute Service Association
Service Supports optimization of associated services.

optimization
Rerouting When one service reroutes, it avoids the route of the associated service.

Attribute Service Association
Service type l Supports the association of two silver services.

l Supports association of two copper services.
l Supports the association of a silver service and a copper service.
l Supports the association of two silver services.
l Supports association of two copper services.
l Supports the association of a silver service and a copper service.
l Supports the association of two silver tunnels.
l Supports the association of two copper tunnels.
l Supports the association of a silver tunnel and a copper tunnel.
7.13 Service Optimization

After the topology changes several times, the ASON may have less satisfactory routes and thus
requires service optimization. Service optimization involves creating a new LSP, switching the
optimized service to the new LSP, and deleting the original LSP to change and optimize the
service without disrupting the service. Of course, the service route can be restricted during the
service optimization.
CAUTION
For the NG WDM products, the LSP must be changed in wavelength trail optimization, which
involves the switching of the WSS component. As a result, the services might be interrupted due
to the service optimization. Be cautious to use the function.
LSP optimization has the following features.
l Only manual optimization is supported.

l The optimization does not change the protection level of the optimized service.
l During optimization, rerouting, downgrade/upgrade, or deleting operations are not allowed.
l During creation, rerouting, downgrading/upgrading, starting or deleting operations,
optimization is not allowed.
l The following service types support optimization: diamond, gold, silver,and copper and
tunnel services.
7.14 Service Migration

OptiX GCP supports the conversion between ASON services, and between ASON services and
traditional services. The service conversion is in-service conversion, which would not interrupt
the services.

Service Migration between ASON Trails and Permanent Connections

Currently, Huawei's OptiX GCP supports:
l Migration between diamond services and permanent SNCP connections
l Migration between gold services and permanent connections
l Migration between silver services and permanent connections
l Migration between copper services and permanent connections
l Migration between iron services and permanent connections
l Migration between tunnel services and server trail.
l Migration between static 1+1 services and diamond services
l Migration between static unprotected services and silver services
l Migration between static unprotected services and copper services
Service Migration between ASON Trails

Currently, Huawei's OptiX GCP supports:
l Migration between diamond services and silver services
l Migration between diamond services and copper services
l Migration between silver services and copper services
l Migration between gold services and silver services
l Migration between gold services and copper services
l Migration between gold tunnels and silver tunnels
l Migration between gold tunnels and copper tunnels
l Migration between silver tunnels and copper tunnels
7.15 Reverting Services to Original Routes

After many changes in an ASON network, service routes may differ from the original routes.
You can revert all service to the original routes.
CAUTION
The operation reverting network-wide services to original routes interrupts the services. Be
cautious to perform the operation.
Original Route
Generally, the route during ASON service creation is the original route of the ASON service. If
the original route recovers after rerouting of the ASON services, the services can be adjusted to
the original route manually or automatically. In addition, the current route can be set to the
original route after rerouting of the ASON services.
ASON services are classified into revertive services and non-revertive services. If the original
route recovers after rerouting, the revertive services can be manually or automatically reverted

to the original route. If the original route recovers after rerouting, the non-revertive services can
be only manually reverted to the original route. Before the non-revertive services revert to the
original route, the resources of the original route may be used by other services.
Revertive Services
The ASON services supporting the service reverting are as follows:
l Diamond services
l Gold services
l Silver services
l Tunnels
Description on Service Reverting

For the detailed description of reverting, refer to the Table 7-19Table 7-18.
Table 7-18 Reverting service to original routes

Attribution Non-Revertive Service Revertive Service
Prerequisites The original route has no failures The original route has no failures.
and has free timeslots.
Reverting mode Manually reverting. Manually reverting or automatically

reverting.
Batch reverting Supported. Not supported.
Timeslots Only if the original timeslots in the Services reverting to original routes.
original route are spare and is Services reverting to original
"Reverting to original timeslots" timeslots.
set, the service can revert to the
original timeslots.
Modifying Supported. Supported.

original route
Reversion lock - Supported.
Table 7-19 Description on service reverting

Attribute Description
Reverting The original route is faulty and

condition there are idle resources.
Reverting mode Manually reverting.
Batch reverting Supported.
Modifying Supported.
original route

7.16 Preset Restoring Trail

Customers may require that the services route to a specified trail in the case of trail failure. To
this end, the OptiX GCP provides the function of presetting the trail for restoration. This function
helps increase the controllability of service routing.
The OptiX GCP supports setting a preset restoring trail for a diamond/silver/goldsilver ASON
trail. When the ASON trail reroutes, the service is restored to the preset restoring trail.
7.17 Shared Mesh Restoration Trail

For a revertive silver service, a restoration trail can be reserved. In the case of rerouting, the
silver service reroutes to the reserved restoration trail. Such a restoration trail is called a shared
mesh restoration trail.
When a service configured with the shared mesh restoration trail reroutes, the service uses the
resources on this trail with priority. If all resources on the shared mesh restoration trail are usable,
these resources are used for service restoration. If only partial resources on the shared mesh
restoration trail are usable, these resources are used with priority for computation of a restoration
trail. The other resources may be faulty or used by other services that share the trail.
As shown in Figure 7-14, the shared mesh restoration trail for two revertive silver services share
the TE link and timeslots between G and H. When the revertive silver service 1 (A-B-C) reroutes,
the service directly reroutes to the shared mesh restoration trail 1 (A-G-H-C). When the revertive
silver service 2 (D-E-F) reroutes, the service directly reroutes to the shared mesh restoration trail
2 (D-G-H-F). If both silver services reroute, only one of them can reroute to the shared mesh
restoration trail, for the two restoration trails share the TE link and timeslots between G and H.
Figure 7-14 Shared mesh restoration trail

Revertive silver service 1
A B C
Share MESH
restoration trail 1
G H
Share MESH
restoration trail 2
D E
F
Revertive silver service 2

Features of the Shared Mesh Restoration Trail

The shared mesh restoration trail has the following features.
l Only the revertive silver service can be configured with the shared mesh restoration trail.
l A shared mesh restoration trail cannot be set to concatenation services at different levels.
l For a silver service configured with the shared mesh restoration trail, the revertive attribute
cannot be changed.
l The resources on a shared mesh restoration trail can only be the unprotected resources of
TE links.
l For a silver service configured with the shared mesh restoration trail, do not set the preset
restoration trail.
Differences Between Shared Mesh Restoration Trail and Preset Restoration Trail
The shared mesh restoration trail and the preset restoration trail have the following differences.
l For a preset restoration trail, only route information of the trail is recorded and no resources
are actually reserved. In this way, the resources for a preset restoration trail may be used
by other services. When the service reroutes, the preset restoration trail cannot be used.
l For a shared mesh restoration trail, resources are actually reserved. The reserved resources
cannot be used by other services. In this way, services can be restored with the best effort.
In addition, to increase the resource utilization, the shared mesh restoration trails for
different services can share some resources.
7.18 Equilibrium of Network Traffic

The ASON network distributes the service traffic to different routes as possible.
The ASON calculates a best route according to the CSPF algorithm. If there are many services
between two nodes, there may be several services sharing a same route. The traffic equilibrium
function is used to avoid this situation. As shown in Figure 7-15, there are many silver services
between R2 and R4. To make the network more safe and reliable, the ASON allocates them to
different routes averagely as possible such as A-D-E-I, A-B-C-F-I and A-B-G-H-I.

Figure 7-15 Traffic equilibrium
R1 R4
E
I
D
F
C
A
B
H
G
R2
R3
: ASON NE
: User equipment
R1 R4
E
I
D
F
C
A
B
H
G
R2
R3
: ASON NE
: User equipment
7.19 Shared Risk Link Group

In the ASON network, the SRLG needs to be set when a group of optical fibers are in one cable.
The SRLG is the shared risk link group. Fibers in the same optical cable have the same risks,
that is, when the cable is cut, all fibers are cut. Hence, an ASON service should not be rerouted
to another link that has the same risk.
Hence, the SRLG needs to be correctly set for the links sharing the same risk in the network so
as to avoid that the LSP after rerouting of the ASON services and the faulty link share the same

risk and to shorten the service restoration time during ASON service rerouting. You can change
the SRLG attribute.
7.20 ASON Trail Group

The ASON supports amalgamation of ASON and LCAS.
LCAS
LCAS is Link Capacity Adjustment Scheme. With LCAS enabled, the bandwidth of VCTRUNK
can be adjusted dynamically without affecting services. As shown in Figure 7-16, VCTRUNK1
is bound with four VC4s, with two transmitted over path 1 and two over path 2. If the VC4 in
path 1 fails, the two VC4s in path 2 will transmit all Ethernet service without affecting the service
of VCTRUNK1. You can add VC4 on either path if necessary.
Figure 7-16 LCAS (different path)
Path 1
VCTRUNK1
Router A Router B
NE1 NE2
Path 2
If these VC4s are transmitted over a path, adding/deleting VC4 will not affect the service. As
shown in Figure 7-17, VCTRUNK1 is bound with four VC4s. If the first VC4 fails, the Ethernet
service remains unaffected.
Figure 7-17 LCAS (same path)
VCTRUNK1
NE1 NE2
Router A Router B
ASON Trail Group

An ASON trail group associates all member trails for the same LCAS service within one LSP
group. These member trails then can be added, deleted or modified. To provide virtual services
with the error tolerance ability, these member trails must be as separate as possible.

Each ASON trail group is identified by an ID. The ASON NE allocates an ID to each ASON
trail group. The member trails within an ASON trail share the same source and sink. The trails
must also be as separated as possible.
7.21 Protocol Encryption

You can encrypt the RSVP and OSPF in an ASON domain to improve the security of the network.
An external entity may modify the OSPF-TE protocol packets of the network, counterfeit a node
of this network and transmit packets, or receive the packets transmitted by nodes in the network
and repeat the attack. To prevent these network insecurities, the ASON provides the function to
encrypt protocols. In an ASON domain, the RSVP and OSPF-TE protocols are encrypted for
authentication.
The RSVP authentication is configured for nodes and the OSPF-TE authentication for
interconnected interfaces (slots and optical interfaces).
The authentication can be non-authentication, plain text authentication or MD5 authentication.
The check succeeds only when the authentication modes and passwords of adjacent nodes are
the same.
7.22 Alarms of the Control Plane

To increase the network maintainability, the ASON network supports the reporting alarms of
the control plane.
Alarms on the control plane include node alarms, link alarms and service alarms. Node alarms
indicate whether the node ID and authentication code are correct, and whether the node ID and
authentication code are associated with neighbors. Link alarms indicate the link availability, and
whether the configuration of link timeslot and MS is correct. Service alarms indicate whether
the services are interrupted, whether the service level is downgraded, and whether the service
trail is changed.

Product Description 8 Protection
8 Protection
About This Chapter
The OptiX OSN 1500 supports equipment level protection and network level protection.
8.1 Equipment Level Protection

The equipment level protection includes TPS protection, 1+1 protection for boards and 1+1
protection for power supplies.
8.2 Network Level Protection
The network level protection includes MSP protection, SNCP protection and DNI protection.

8 Protection Product Description
8.1 Equipment Level Protection

The equipment level protection includes TPS protection, 1+1 protection for boards and 1+1
protection for power supplies.
8.1.1 TPS Protection for Tributary Boards

The equipment supports TPS protection of many service types.
8.1.2 1+1 Hot Backup for the Cross-Connect, Timing and SCC Units
With the 1+1 protection for the cross-connect, timing and SCC units, the equipment can run in
a safe manner.
8.1.3 1+1 Protection for Ethernet Boards
The Ethernet boards support the 1+1 BPS, PPS and DLAG protection schemes.
8.1.4 1+1 Protection for ATM Boards
The N1IDL4 and N1IDQ1 boards of the OptiX OSN 1500 support board level 1+1 protection.
8.1.5 1+1 Hot Backup for the Power Interface Unit
The equipment supports 1+1 backup for the PIU.
8.1.6 Protection for the Wavelength Conversion Unit
The WDM board that supports the 1+1 protection is the N1LWX.
8.1.7 1:N Protection for the +3.3 V Board Power Supply
The equipment supports 1:N protection for the +3.3 V board power supply. With this protection,
the board can be supplied with power in a reliable manner.
8.1.8 Board Protection Schemes Under Abnormal Conditions
The protection schemes under abnormal conditions include undervoltage protection and
overvoltage protection.
8.1.1 TPS Protection for Tributary Boards

The equipment supports TPS protection of many service types.
Table 8-1 and Table 8-2 lists the supported TPS protection schemes and boards. Table 8-3 lists
the TPS protection parameters.
Table 8-1 TPS protection schemes and supported boards
Service Type Protection Scheme Supported Boards
E1/T1 One 1:N protection (N ≤ 2) N1PQM, N1PQ1, N2PQ1a
E1 Two 1:N protections (N ≤ 2) R1PD1, R2PD1
E3/T3/E4/STM-1 One 1:1 protection N1PD3, N1PL3, N2PD3, N2PL3,

N2PQ3, N1SPQ4, N2SPQ4,
N1SEP1
DDN One 1:N protection (N ≤ 2) N1DX1
Ethernet One 1:1 protection N2EFS0, N4EFS0

a: The N1PQ1 and N2PQ1 boards do not support T1 services.
Table 8-2 TPS protection schemes and supported boards of the OptiX OSN 1500A
E1 Two 1:N protections (N ≤ 2) R1PD1, R2PD1
E3/T3/E4/STM-1 One 1:1 protection N1PL3, N2PL3, N1SEP1
Table 8-3 TPS protection parameters

Parameter Description
Priority 1-X: X is equal to the number of working boards. Priority 1 is the

highest priority.
Switching type Forced switching, manual switching, lockout of switching
Switching condition Any of the following conditions triggers the switching:

l The clock of the working board is lost.
l The working board is offline.
l The working board is cold reset.
l The hardware of the working board fails.
l A switching command is issued.
Switching time ≤ 50 ms
Revertive mode Revertive
WTR time 300s to 720s. The WTR time of 600s is recommended.
8.1.2 1+1 Hot Backup for the Cross-Connect, Timing and SCC Units
With the 1+1 protection for the cross-connect, timing and SCC units, the equipment can run in
a safe manner.
For the OptiX OSN 1500, the cross-connect, timing and SCC units are integrated in the CXL
series boards. The CXL series boards adopt a 1+1 hot backup mechanism so that the cross-
connect and timing units are protected. Table 8-4 lists the 1+1 hot backup parameters of the
cross-connect, timing and SCC units.

Table 8-4 1+1 hot backup parameters of the cross-connect, timing and SCC units
Slots for working and Slot 4 and slot 5

protection boards

l The working board is cold reset.
l The board is warm reset and the switching protocol is triggered.
Revertive mode Non-revertive. After successful switching, the original protection

board becomes the working board, and the original working board
becomes the protection board.
8.1.3 1+1 Protection for Ethernet Boards

The Ethernet boards support the 1+1 BPS, PPS and DLAG protection schemes.
l The N1EMS4, N1EGS4 and N3EGS4 boards support the 1+1 BPS, PPS and DLAG
protection.
Table 8-5 lists the 1+1 protection parameters for Ethernet boards.
Table 8-5 1+1 protection parameters of Ethernet boards

Parameter BPS, PPS DLAG
Slots for The bandwidth of the protection board is not less than the bandwidth of the
working and working board.
protection
boards

Parameter BPS, PPS DLAG
Switching Any of the following conditions Any of the following conditions

condition triggers the switching: triggers the switching:
l The port status of the working l The port to be protected on the
board is Link Down. working board is in the Link
l The clock of the working board is Down state.
lost. l The clock of the working board is
l The hardware of the working lost.
board fails. l The hardware of the working
l The working board is off line. board fails.
l A switching command is issued. l The working board is off line.
l The working board fails to
transmit and receive packets, but
the protection board transmits
and receives packets
successfully.
Switching ≤ 350 ms In full duplex mode: ≤ 4 s

time In auto-negotiation mode: ≤ 500 ms
When a protection group needs to perform the BPS or PPS or DLAG protection switching, the
following conditions must be met.
l The equipment interconnected with the protection group must have the same working mode
as the protection group.
l The transmit end and the receive end should be connected directly through optical fibers
or network cables. No intermediate equipment should be present between the two ends.
l The working mode should not be modified. Otherwise, the protection group becomes
abnormal.
CAUTION
The equipment cannot detect the modification of the working mode at the receive end of the
protection group.
8.1.4 1+1 Protection for ATM Boards

The N1IDL4 and N1IDQ1 boards of the OptiX OSN 1500 support board level 1+1 protection.
Table 8-6 lists the 1+1 protection parameters of ATM boards.

Table 8-6 1+1 protection parameters of ATM boards
Slots for working and Configurable as required.

protection boards

l A manual switching command is issued.
l The working board is under a cold reset.
l The power supply of the working board fails.
l The clock of the working board fails.
Revertive mode Non-revertive
8.1.5 1+1 Hot Backup for the Power Interface Unit

The equipment supports 1+1 backup for the PIU.
The OptiX OSN 1500 can access two -48 V DC power supplies by using two R1PIU or
R1PIUA boards. These two power supplies provide a mutual backup for each other. When either
of them fails, the other power supply provides a backup to ensure normal operation of the
equipment.
8.1.6 Protection for the Wavelength Conversion Unit

The WDM board that supports the 1+1 protection is the N1LWX.
In the OptiX OSN 1500, the arbitrary bit rate wavelength conversion unit N1LWX has two types:
One is single fed and single receiving, and the other is dual fed and selective receiving.
A dual fed and selective receiving N1LWX board supports intra-board protection, and one board
of this type can realize optical channel protection. The single fed and single receiving LWX
boards support inter-board protection, that is, 1+1 inter-board hot backup protection.
Table 8-7 lists the 1+1 inter-board protection parameters of the N1LWX board.
Table 8-7 1+1 inter-board protection parameters of N1LWX
Slots for working and Configurable as required.

protection boards


Revertive mode Non-revertive
8.1.7 1:N Protection for the +3.3 V Board Power Supply

The equipment supports 1:N protection for the +3.3 V board power supply. With this protection,
the board can be supplied with power in a reliable manner.
The OptiX OSN 1500 provides reliable power backup for the +3.3 V power supply of other
boards, including the SCC and service boards by using the power backup unit on the R1AUX
or R2AUX board. When the power supply of a board fails, the backup power supply immediately
provides backup to ensure the normal operation of the board.
8.1.8 Board Protection Schemes Under Abnormal Conditions

The protection schemes under abnormal conditions include undervoltage protection and
overvoltage protection.
Power-Down Protection During Software Loading

The verification function is provided for applications and data. After software loading is
interrupted, the basic input/output system (BIOS) does not boot any applications or data that are
not successfully or completely loaded. Instead, the BIOS waits for the loading to be resumed,
until the software is successfully and completely loaded.
Overvoltage or Undervoltage Protection for Power Supply

The power board provides a lightning protection component to effectively avoid the damage
that may be caused by transient high voltages such as lightning.
When a board is in undervoltage, the board automatically resets its CPU so that the software can
re-initialize the chip.
The software provides mirroring protection for key registers whose abnormality can affect
services. In this case, when the value of such a register is changed due to unstable voltages, the
value can be restored to normal.
When a board is in undervoltage, the power system also automatically turns off the power supply
on the main loop so that the system is protected.
Board Temperature Detection

Temperature detection circuits are built in boards (for example, the cross-connect and timing
board) that generates a large amount of heat. When the board detects a high temperature, an
alarm is generated to prompt the maintenance personnel about cleaning the fans.
8.2 Network Level Protection

The network level protection includes MSP protection, SNCP protection and DNI protection.

8.2.1 Linear MSP

The linear MSP rings supported by the equipment are 1+1 single-ended switching, 1+1 dual-
ended switching and 1:N dual-ended switching MSP rings.
8.2.2 MSP Ring
The MSP rings supported by the equipment are four-fiber MSP ring and two-fiber MSP ring.
8.2.3 SNCP
The subnet connection protection schemes are SNCP, SNCMP and SNCTP.
8.2.4 DNI
The DNI is a protection scheme used for the dual-node interconnection topology.
8.2.5 Fiber-Shared Virtual Trail Protection
When the fiber-shared virtual trail protection is used, an STM-16, STM-4 or even STM-1 optical
channel is logically divided into several lower order or higher order channels. These channels
are then connected to other links at the channel layer to form rings. In the case of the rings at
the channel layer, protection schemes such as the MSP, SNCP and non-protection can be set
accordingly.
8.2.6 Optical-Path-Shared MSP
In the optical-path-shared MSP scheme, an optical interface can be configured into multiple
MSP groups, so multiple MSP rings can share the same fiber and optical interface.
8.2.7 RPR Protection
The RPR protection schemes are Wrapping and Steering.
8.2.8 VP-Ring/VC-Ring Protection
The protection scheme at the ATM layer is VP-Ring/VC-Ring.
8.2.1 Linear MSP

The linear MSP rings supported by the equipment are 1+1 single-ended switching, 1+1 dual-
ended switching and 1:N dual-ended switching MSP rings.
The linear MSP is mainly used in a chain network. The OptiX OSN 1500 provides 1+1 and 1:N
(N≤14) protection schemes, and supports a maximum of 12 linear MSPs. In the 1:N protection
scheme, extra services are supported to be transmitted on the protection system. The switching
time of linear MSP is less than 50 ms, as required in ITU-T G.841.
For details, refer to the OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System Planning
Guidelines.
Table 8-8 lists the linear MSP parameters.
Table 8-8 Linear MSP parameters
Protection Revertive Switching Switching Default Switching

Type Mode Protocol Time WTR Condition
Time
1+1 single- Non- Not ≤ 50 ms - Any of the

ended revertive required following
switching conditions
triggers the
switching:


Type Mode Protocol Time WTR Condition
Time
1+1 single- Revertive Not ≤ 50 ms 600s l R_LOS

ended required l R_LOF
switching
l MS_AIS
1+1 dual- Non- APS ≤ 50 ms - l B2_EXC
ended revertive protocol
l B2_SD
switching
(optional)
1+1 dual- Revertive APS ≤ 50 ms 600s l Forced
ended protocol switching
switching l Manual
1:N dual- Revertive APS ≤ 50 ms 600s switching
ended protocol l Exercise
switching switching
8.2.2 MSP Ring

The MSP rings supported by the equipment are four-fiber MSP ring and two-fiber MSP ring.
The OptiX OSN 1500 supports the hybrid application of two-fiber and four-fiber MSP rings,
with the switching time less than 50 ms, as required in ITU-T G.841.
Table 8-9 lists the maximum number of MSP rings supported by the OptiX OSN 1500.
For details, refer to the OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System Planning
Guidelines.
Table 8-9 Maximum number of MSP rings supported by the OptiX OSN 1500
Protection Scheme Maximum Number of MSP
Rings Supported
STM-16 four-fiber MSP ring 1
STM-16 two-fiber MSP ring 2
Table 8-10 lists the MSP ring parameters.

Table 8-10 MSP ring parameters

Type Mode Mode Time WTR Condition
Time
Two-fiber Revertive l Forced ≤ 50 ms 600s Any of the

bidirectional switching following
MSP l Manual conditions
switching triggers the
switching:
l Exercise
switching l R_LOS
l R_LOF
Two-fiber Revertive l Forced ≤ 50 ms 600s l MS_AIS
unidirectional switching
MSP l B2_EXC
l Manual
l B2_SD
switching
(Optional)
l Exercise
l Forced
switching
switching
Four-fiber Revertive l Forced ≤ 50 ms 600s l Manual
bidirectional switching - switching
MSP ring l Exercise
l Manual switching
switching -
ring
l Exercise
switching -
ring
l Forced
switching -
span
l Manual
switching -
span
l Exercise
switching -
span
The MSP supported by the OptiX OSN 1500 has the following features.
Adjustable MS Bandwidth
The MS bandwidth refers to the number of VC-4s used by an MSP ring or chain.
In the case of the MSP, the OptiX OSN 1500 supports the bandwidth adjustment by VC-4 without
interrupting services. For an STM-16 bidirectional MSP ring, the MS bandwidth ranges from
one VC-4 to eight VC-4s. For an STM-16 four-fiber bidirectional MSP ring, the MS bandwidth
ranges from one VC-4 to 16 VC-4s.

Upgradeable MS Bandwidth
The OptiX OSN 1500 supports in-service upgrade of the MS bandwidth without interrupting
services. For example, an STM-4 MSP ring can be upgraded to an STM-16 MSP ring without
interrupting services.
Two Sets of K Bytes at the Multiplex Section

For STM-16 optical interfaces, the OptiX OSN 1500 is able to process two sets of K bytes at
the multiplex section. In this case, two MSP rings can be set up in one optical interface.
MS Squelching
The OptiX OSN 1500 supports the squelching of misconnected services at the VC-4 level.
In an MSP ring, each protection timeslot is shared by different spans or occupied by extra traffic.
When there is no extra traffic in the ring, and a multipoint failure causes a node to be isolated
from the ring, traffics that occupy the same timeslot may try to preempt this timeslot. As a result,
the misconnection of services occurs. When extra traffic is transmitted in the protection path,
the traffic on the working path may preempt the protection timeslot that is being used by extra
traffic, even if only one point fails in the ring. As a result, the misconnection also occurs.
To prevent service misconnection, each OptiX OSN 1500 node sets up a detailed list of
connections. Each node knows the source and the sink of any AU-4. With the automatic
protection switching (APS) commands, each node can detect in advance the possibility of
misconnection. By inserting the AU-AIS alarm, each node then discards these services that may
be misconnected.
8.2.3 SNCP
The subnet connection protection schemes are SNCP, SNCMP and SNCTP.
The OptiX OSN 1500 supports the SNCP, SNCMP, and SNCTP of the VC-12, VC-3, VC-4,
and AU-3 services.
SNCP
The OptiX OSN 1500 supports the end-to-end conversion between an unprotected trail and an
SNCP-protected trail. See Figure 8-1.

Figure 8-1 End-to-end conversion between an unprotected trail and an SNCP-protected trail
The unprotected trail
NE2 NE6
NE1 NE3 NE5 NE7
NE4 NE8
Convert to an unprotected trail Convert to an SNCP-protected trail

The working trail
NE2 NE6
NE1 NE3 NE5 NE7
NE4 NE8
The protction trail
In the trail management window of the T2000, you can convert an exiting unprotected trail to
an SNCP-protected trail. In the opposite way, you can also convert an SNCP-protected trail to
an unprotected trail. In addition, the following trail-level operations are supported:
l Manual switching to protection path

l Manual switching to working path
l Forced switching to protection path
l Forced switching to working path
l Wait-to-restore (WTR) time setting
l Revertive mode setting
Table 8-11 lists the SNCP parameters.
Table 8-11 SNCP parameters
Protection Revertive Switching Default Switching

Type Mode Time WTR Time Conditions
SNCP Revertive ≤ 50 ms 600s Any of the following

conditions triggers the
switching:
l R_LOS
l R_LOF
l AU_LOP
l TU_LOP

Protection Revertive Switching Default Switching

Type Mode Time WTR Time Conditions
Non-revertive ≤ 50 ms - l MS_AIS
l AU_AIS
l TU_AIS
l HP_UNEQ
(Optional)
l HP_TIM (Optional)
l B2_EXC
l B3_EXC (Optional)
l B3_SD (Optional)
l BIP_EXC
l BIP_SD
SNCMP
The SNCMP is an N+1 (which means multiple protection paths protect a working path)
protection scheme. The SNCMP is different from the SNCP in that the SNCP is a 1+1 protection
scheme.
The SNCMP provides multiple protection paths for a service. In this case, the service protection
is implemented by a mechanism of multiple fed at the source and selective receiving at the sink.
The SNCMP is supplementary to the SNCP.
Figure 8-2 illustrates the principle of multipath protection. The source broadcasts services to
multiple paths, and the sink determines which service to receive according to the service priority
and then the service quality. When services are correctly received on both the working and
protection paths, the sink selects the service from the working path.
Figure 8-2 Principle of multipath protection

A B
Working
Protection 1
Source Sink
Intermediate
Protection 2 subnetworks
Protection 3

In the SNCMP networking shown in Figure 8-3, two protection paths protect a working path,
and Protection 2 is a protection path that uses microwave as the transmission media. Under
normal conditions, NE3 receives the service from the working path.
Figure 8-3 SNCMP networking
NE 3
NE 4
NE 2
Microware
Protection 1 NE 1 Working
Radio
Protection 2
Microware
Radio
When the transmission between NE1 and NE2 becomes faulty, as shown in Figure 8-4, NE3
receives the service from the higher priority protection path Protection 1.

Figure 8-4 SNCMP service route in the case of single point failure
NE 3
NE 4
NE 2
Microware
Protection 1 NE 1 Working
Radio
Protection 2
Microware
Radio
When the transmissions between NE1 and NE2, and between NE1 and NE4, both become faulty,
as shown in Figure 8-5, NE3 receives the service from the second protection path Protection 2.

Figure 8-5 SNCMP service route in the case of multipoint failure
NE 3
NE 4
NE 2
Working Microware
Protection 1
NE 1 Radio
Protection 2
Microware
Radio
SNCTP
The SNCTP provides protection paths at the VC-4 level. When the working path is faulty, all
its services can be switched to the protection path.
The SNCTP is different from the SNCP in that the SNCTP checks the status of only the entire
VC-4 path, and such a check is irrelevant to the levels of services in the path. When the working
path is faulty, relevant higher order alarms are raised, and then all services in the working path
are switched to the protection path. If the fault is relevant only to lower order services, lower
order alarms are raised, and the switching does not occur.
8.2.4 DNI
The DNI is a protection scheme used for the dual-node interconnection topology.
The OptiX OSN 1500 supports the DNI protection, which is compliant with the ITU-T G.842.
The DNI network topology protection scheme effectively enhances the reliability of inter-ring
services. The DNI realizes the protection of services between two rings, which are networked
by the equipment from different vendors and adopt different protection schemes. The DNI
provides protection in the case of fiber failure and node failure.
The DNI provides protection for services between the following rings:
l Two SNCP rings
l An SNCP ring and an MSP ring
l Two MSP rings

Figure 8-6 illustrates a DNI protection of two SNCP rings.
Figure 8-6 DNI protection of two SNCP rings

NE A
SNCP Ring
1
NE C NE D
NE E NE F
SNCP Ring
2
NE G
Selecting Point
Forward Working Routing
Reverse Working Routing
When any of the following faults occurs, the inter-ring services can be protected.
l A fiber cut occurs on SNCP Ring 1.
l A fiber cut occurs on SNCP Ring 2.
l A fiber cut occurs on the two SNCP rings.
l NE C (primary node) or NE D (secondary node) is faulty.
l NE E (primary node) or NE F (secondary node) is faulty.
l NE C and NE E are faulty.
l NE D and NE F are faulty.
The primary node and the secondary node protect each other. When one node is faulty, inter-
ring services are not affected.

8.2.5 Fiber-Shared Virtual Trail Protection

When the fiber-shared virtual trail protection is used, an STM-16, STM-4 or even STM-1 optical
channel is logically divided into several lower order or higher order channels. These channels
are then connected to other links at the channel layer to form rings. In the case of the rings at
the channel layer, protection schemes such as the MSP, SNCP and non-protection can be set
accordingly.
Figure 8-7 shows the fiber-shared virtual trail protection.
Figure 8-7 Fiber-shared virtual trail protection
STM-16
STM-16
STM-4 STM-4
SNCP MSP
8.2.6 Optical-Path-Shared MSP

In the optical-path-shared MSP scheme, an optical interface can be configured into multiple
MSP groups, so multiple MSP rings can share the same fiber and optical interface.
A prerequisite for this function is that the optical interface board must be able to process multiple
sets of independent K bytes. N1SL16, N2SL16, N3SL16 and N1SF16 of the OptiX OSN 1500
support the configuration of shared optical paths. An STM-16 optical interface supports a
maximum of two sets of K bytes.
Figure 8-8 shows the networking of two-fiber optical-path-shared MSP supported by the OptiX
OSN 1500.

Figure 8-8 Optical-path-shared MSP
STM-4 Optical- STM-4

STM-4
path-shared
MSP ring
STM-16
STM-4 Optical-
path-shared
MSP ring
STM-4 STM-4
For example, two lower-rate west line units share one higher-rate east line unit, as shown in
Figure 8-9.
Figure 8-9 One higher-rate line shared by two lower-rate lines
MSP ring 1
STM-4
STM-16
MSP ring 2 STM-4
The OptiX OSN 1500 also supports the line units of the same rate to form a shared protection
in two directions, as shown in Figure 8-10. In this case, the west STM-16 line units can only
add part of their VC-4s into the MSP ring protection group.
Figure 8-10 One line shared by two lines of the same rate
MSP ring 1
STM-16
STM-16
MSP ring 2 STM-16

8.2.7 RPR Protection

The RPR protection schemes are Wrapping and Steering.
Figure 8-11 shows a bidirectional RPR that is of a reverse dual-ring structure. The outer ring
and the inner ring both transmit data packets and control packets. The control packets on the
inner ring carry the control information of the data packets on the outer ring, and the control
packets on the outer ring carry the control information of the data packets on the inner ring.
The RPR has the following advantage: On the RPR, every node assumes that the packets added
to the ring will finally reach their destination, regardless of which path is used. A node can only
perform three types of operations on the packets, that is, insertion (adding a new packet onto the
ring), forwarding (forwarding the packet), and stripping (dropping the packet locally). Compared
with a mesh network, an Ethernet ring considerably decreases the communication traffic among
nodes. This is because a mesh network determines the forwarding port on the basis of every
single packet.
Figure 8-11 Example of bidirectional RPR

Node 4
Outer ring
Inner ring
Node 3 Node 5
RPR
Node 2 Node 1
In the case of a fiber cut, the RPR provides the wrapping and steering functions for packets.
The wrapping function connects the inner ring and the outer ring at the two nodes that are adjacent
to the fiber cut point. See Figure 8-12.

Figure 8-12 RPR wrapping protection
Node 4
Outer ring
Inner ring
Node 3 Node 5
RPR
Node 2 Node 1
Wapping
The steering function reversely transmits packets from the transmit node in the case of a fiber
cut. See Figure 8-13.
Figure 8-13 RPR steering protection
Node 4
Outer ring
Inner ring
Node 3 Node 5
RPR
Node 1
Node 2
Steering
In both protection schemes, the packets can reach their destination in a reverse direction, and
the service failure time is less than 50 ms. During the protection switching, the wrapping function
is usually performed first. After the new topology and the new service trail are created, the
steering function is then performed. Such a mechanism ensures that packets are not lost during
the protection switching, and that the protection switching time is decreased.
8.2.8 VP-Ring/VC-Ring Protection

The protection scheme at the ATM layer is VP-Ring/VC-Ring.

Figure 8-14 shows the principle of VP-Ring/VC-Ring protection at the ATM layer. The VP-
Ring/VC-Ring protection scheme reserves the protection resources, and can be applied on any
physical topology. The reserved protection resources include routes and bandwidths.
Figure 8-14 VP-Ring/VC-Ring protection

NE2
Working path
ATM ATM
service service
NE1 Protection path NE3
NE4
The OptiX OSN 1500 provides protection for virtual paths (VPs) and virtual channels (VCs),
and protects ATM services through a dual fed and selective receiving mechanism. Two
connections (VP/VC), which represent the working path and the protection path, are set up at
the source node NE1 and the sink node NE3. In normal conditions, the receive end selects the
service from the working path. When the primary ring becomes faulty, the receive end detects
the failure and triggers the protection. In this way, the receive end selects the service from the
protection path, and thus the ATM service is protected.

Product Description 9 Clock
9 Clock
About This Chapter
The equipment can trace several clock sources. It also provides the clock protection function.
9.1 Clock Source

The OptiX OSN 1500 can trace different types of clock sources, which are as follows:
9.2 Clock Working Mode
The OptiX OSN 1500 supports the clock working mode that complies with ITU-T G.781. The
modes are as follows:
9.3 Clock Outputs
The OptiX OSN 1500 supports three clock output schemes and two external clock outputs.
9.4 Clock Protection
The OptiX OSN 1500 provide the function for managing the SSM. The standard SSM and
extended SSM can be configured for clock protection switching.
9.5 Tributary Retiming
The retiming function is performed to combine service data and reference timing signals from
a digital synchronization network, and then to transmit the signals to the receiver.

9 Clock Product Description
9.1 Clock Source

The OptiX OSN 1500 can trace different types of clock sources, which are as follows:
l External clock source

l Line clock source
l Tributary clock source
l Internal clock source
The OptiX OSN 1500 supports priority setting for clock sources. By default, the internal clock
source is of the lowest priority.
9.1.1 External Clock Source
The OptiX OSN 1500 support two external clock source inputs.
9.1.2 Line Clock Source
The OptiX OSN 1500 can trace the line clock source.
9.1.3 Tributary Clock Source
The OptiX OSN 1500 can trace tributary clock sources.
9.1.4 Internal Clock Source
When all the line, tributary and external clock sources in the priority list are not usable, or when
only the internal clock source is available in the priority list, the OptiX OSN 1500 uses the
internal clock source as the system clock.
9.1.1 External Clock Source

The OptiX OSN 1500 support two external clock source inputs.
l Two 75-ohm external clock inputs (2048 kbit/s or 2048 kHz)
l Two 120-ohm external clock inputs (2048 kbit/s or 2048 kHz)
9.1.2 Line Clock Source

The OptiX OSN 1500 can trace the line clock source.
9.1.3 Tributary Clock Source

The OptiX OSN 1500 can trace tributary clock sources.
The specific tracing relation is as follows.
l When tracing tributary clock sources, the NE can only trace the first port (corresponding
to the first physical port) or the second port (corresponding to the ninth physical port)
displayed on the T2000 for the PQ1, PQM and PD1.
to the first physical port) or the second port (corresponding to the fourth physical port)
displayed on the T2000 for the PD3, PQ3.
to the first physical port) displayed on the T2000 for the PL3, DX1.

to any physical port) displayed on the T2000 for the SPQ4.
9.1.4 Internal Clock Source

When all the line, tributary and external clock sources in the priority list are not usable, or when
only the internal clock source is available in the priority list, the OptiX OSN 1500 uses the
internal clock source as the system clock.
9.2 Clock Working Mode

The OptiX OSN 1500 supports the clock working mode that complies with ITU-T G.781. The
modes are as follows:
l Locked mode
l Holdover mode
l Free-run mode
9.2.1 Locked Mode
In the locked mode, the OptiX OSN 1500 traces one clock source from the line clock source,
tributary clock source and the external clock source.
9.2.2 Holdover Mode
If all the clock sources are lost, the OptiX OSN 1500 uses the frequency information stored
before the clock source is lost. The frequency information complies with the related phase
standard defined in ITU-T G.813.
9.2.3 Free-Run Mode
The OptiX OSN 1500 works under the inherent frequency of its internal crystal oscillator whose
frequency stability is not lower than ±4.6 ppm.
9.2.1 Locked Mode

In the locked mode, the OptiX OSN 1500 traces one clock source from the line clock source,
tributary clock source and the external clock source.
9.2.2 Holdover Mode

If all the clock sources are lost, the OptiX OSN 1500 uses the frequency information stored
before the clock source is lost. The frequency information complies with the related phase
standard defined in ITU-T G.813.
9.2.3 Free-Run Mode

The OptiX OSN 1500 works under the inherent frequency of its internal crystal oscillator whose
frequency stability is not lower than ±4.6 ppm.
9.3 Clock Outputs

The OptiX OSN 1500 supports three clock output schemes and two external clock outputs.
The OptiX OSN 1500 supports the following clock outputs:

l Line clock outputs

l Tributary clock outputs
l External clock outputs
NOTE
For tributary clock outputs, the OptiX OSN 1500 supports the tributary retiming function, which helps
improve the quality of the output tributary clock.
The OptiX OSN 1500 supports two external clock outputs:

l Two 75-ohm external clock outputs (2048 kbit/s or 2048 kHz)
l Two 120-ohm external clock outputs (2048 kbit/s or 2048 kHz)
NOTE
For external clock outputs, only two 75-ohm or two 120-ohm clocks can be used, but both the clocks cannot
be applied.
9.4 Clock Protection

The OptiX OSN 1500 provide the function for managing the SSM. The standard SSM and
extended SSM can be configured for clock protection switching.
The OptiX OSN 1500 provide the synchronization status message (SSM) function for
synchronous clocks. Either the standard SSM or the extended SSM can be configured to realize
the protection switching of clocks.
9.4.1 Clock Configuration with SSM Not Enabled
In the case of the OptiX OSN 1500, when the SSM is not enabled, it indicates that the S1 byte
is not used. In this case, the clock sources are selected or switched according to the priority list.
The clock source with the highest priority is the tracing source.
9.4.2 Clock Configuration with Standard SSM Enabled
The standard SSM allows the OptiX OSN 1500 to choose the clock source of the highest quality
to prevent the generation of clock tracing ring.
9.4.3 Clock Configuration with Extended SSM Enabled
The standard SSM cannot prevent the clock lock ring in all cases. In this case, Huawei provides
the concept of the clock source ID.
9.4.1 Clock Configuration with SSM Not Enabled

In the case of the OptiX OSN 1500, when the SSM is not enabled, it indicates that the S1 byte
is not used. In this case, the clock sources are selected or switched according to the priority list.
The clock source with the highest priority is the tracing source.
The priority list can be manually configured. Figure 9-1 shows the clock configuration and the
priority list when the SSM is not enabled.

Figure 9-1 Clock networking with SSM not enabled
BITS Node 1
Priority 1: BITS
Priority 2: Internal
Slot 8 Slot 11
Slot 11
Node 2 Slot 8 Node 4
Priority 1: Slot 11 Priority 1: Slot 8
Priority 2: Slot 8 Priority 2: Slot 11
Priority 3: Internal Slot 8 Slot 11 Priority 3: Internal
Slot 11 Slot 8
Node 3
Priority 1: Slot 11
Clock tracing Priority 2: Slot 8
Priority 3: Internal
9.4.2 Clock Configuration with Standard SSM Enabled

The standard SSM allows the OptiX OSN 1500 to choose the clock source of the highest quality
to prevent the generation of clock tracing ring.
Figure 9-2 shows the application of the standard SSM.

Figure 9-2 Application of the standard SSM
BITS
Node 1
Fiber
break
Slot 8 Slot 11
Slot 11
Slot 8
Node 2 Node 4
Slot 8 Slot 11
Slot 11 Slot 8
Node 3
Node, Node 2 automatically select the

Clock clock source of the highest quality.
tracing
9.4.3 Clock Configuration with Extended SSM Enabled

The standard SSM cannot prevent the clock lock ring in all cases. In this case, Huawei provides
the concept of the clock source ID.
The extended SSM uses the first four bits of the S1 byte as the clock source ID and the latter
four bits to indicate the quality of the clock source. The first four bits of the S1 byte is used to
specify the unique ID of a clock source. These four bits are transmitted along with the SSM.
When receiving the S1 byte, a node checks if the clock source ID is transmitted by itself. If the
clock source ID is transmitted by itself, the node considers the clock source as unavailable. In
this way, this avoids the occurrence of the clock lock ring.
Figure 9-3 shows the clock lock ring formed when the standard SSM is enabled.
Figure 9-4 shows the application of the clock source ID when the extended SSM is enabled.

Figure 9-3 Clock lock ring formed when the standard SSM is enabled
BITS BITS
BITS
Node 1
failure Node 1
Node 2 Node 4
Node 2 Node 4
Clock mutual tracing
Node 3 caused by BITS failure Node 3
Clock
tracing
Figure 9-4 Application of clock source ID
BITS
BITS
failure
Node 1
Node 2 Node 4
Node 3
Node 1 finds that the ID sent from Node 4 is 1,
which is originated from itself. Node 1 will not
trace it to avoid the clock mutual tracing.
Clock tracing
A clock source ID can be manually set. In the case of the configuration of clock protection for
an SDH ring network, the clock ID is always manually set, to effectively avoid the occurrence
of clock lock ring. The clock ID occurs only at key nodes rather than all the nodes in an SDH
network. To set the clock source ID, do as follows:
l Allocate a clock ID for every external BITS.
l Allocate a clock ID for the internal clock source of every node that has an external BITS.
l In case of signals that travel from a chain or a ring into another ring, allocate a clock ID
for the internal clock source of every junction node.

l In case of signals that travel from a chain or a ring into another ring, allocate a clock ID
for the line clock source (if any line source is involved at a junction node) in the direction
that the signal travels at every junction node.
9.5 Tributary Retiming

The retiming function is performed to combine service data and reference timing signals from
a digital synchronization network, and then to transmit the signals to the receiver.
9.5.1 Retiming Principle

With the retiming technology, the 2048 kbit/s tributary in an SDH system is able to transmit
reference timing signals.
9.5.2 Application of the Retiming Function
PDH signals can pass through an SDH network with or without retiming.
9.5.1 Retiming Principle

With the retiming technology, the 2048 kbit/s tributary in an SDH system is able to transmit
reference timing signals.
Figure 9-5 shows the retiming principle.
Figure 9-5 Retiming principle diagram

Extract clock ( f0 )
SDH clock
source SEC
Extract clock ( f1 )
PLL
f0
Desynchronization Retiming buffer
f1
Input tributary signal
Input tributary signal
The retiming function is performed in the following process:
l The phase-lock loop (PLL) is used to extract clock f1 from the received tributary signals.
l The desynchronization function is used to recover the tributary signal data in an error-free
manner, and then to store the data in the retiming buffer.
l The SDH equipment clock (SEC) f0, which is synchronous with the digital synchronization
network, is extracted and then added into the tributary signal data.
In this way, the output tributary signals carry a good timing reference, which serves the
synchronous service equipment.
9.5.2 Application of the Retiming Function

PDH signals can pass through an SDH network with or without retiming.

PDH Signals Passing Through an SDH Network Without Retiming

Figure 9-6 shows how PDH signals pass through an SDH network without retiming. On the
synchronous service equipment i, the reference frequency f1 locks on f0 to avoid a periodical
slip. When PDH signals are adapted into the SDH transmission network, pointer justifications
cause phase jumps of output PDH signals, and thus frequency f1 of the output PDH signals
becomes asynchronous with f0. As a result, the frequency of output signals cannot be used as a
timing reference for equipment k, such as a digital stored program control (SPC) switch.
Figure 9-6 SDH transmission network without retiming

SDH transmission network
PRC
f1 f0
f0
S D
f1 f1 Synchronous
Synchronous
S SDH SDH D service
service
S MUX MUX D equipment k
equipment i
S D
f 1: PDH signal frequency The tributary signal frequency

f 0: Frequency that traces an SDH PRC cannot be used as a synchronization
S : Synchronization clock for equipment k.
D : Desynchronization
R : Retiming
PRC: SDH primary reference clock
PDH Signals Passing Through an SDH Network with Retiming

Figure 9-7 shows how PDH signals pass through an SDH network with retiming. On the
synchronous service equipment i, the reference frequency f1 locks on f0 to avoid a periodical
slip. At the network output end, the retiming function provides a local timing reference f0, and
thus jitters and wanders caused by pointer justifications are absorbed. Frequency f1 of the output
PDH signals is still synchronous with f0, so equipment k can extract tributary timing signals for
the synchronization purpose.

Figure 9-7 SDH transmission network with retiming

Transmission network
PRC
f1 f0
f0
S D
Synchronous f1 Synchronous
service S SDH SDH D service
equipment S MUX MUX D equipment
i f0 k
S D R
f1: PDH signal frequency The tributary signal frequency can

f0: Frequency that traces an SDH PRC f0 be used as a synchronization clock
S: Synchronization for equipment k.
D: Desynchronization SEC
R: Retiming
PRC: SDH primary reference clock
SEC: SDH equipment clock
The transmission network in Figure 9-7 can be a single SDH network, or a combination of
several SDH and PDH networks.

Product Description 10 OAM
10 OAM
About This Chapter
10.1 Operation and Maintenance

The cabinet, boards and functions of the OptiX OSN 1500 system are designed according to the
customer requirements to facilitate the operation and maintenance of the equipment. Hence, the
OptiX OSN 1500 system provides powerful equipment maintenance capability for customers.
10.2 Network Management
management system. The T2000 manages the OSN, SDH, Metro and DWDM equipment in the
entire network. In compliance with ITU-T Recommendations, the T2000 adopts a standard

10 OAM Product Description
10.1 Operation and Maintenance

The cabinet, boards and functions of the OptiX OSN 1500 system are designed according to the
customer requirements to facilitate the operation and maintenance of the equipment. Hence, the
OptiX OSN 1500 system provides powerful equipment maintenance capability for customers.
Alarm and Performance Management

l In the case of any emergency, the CXL board generates audible and visual alarms to prompt
the network administrators to take proper measures.
l The AUX board provides three alarm input interfaces, one alarm output interface to
facilitate operation and maintenance of the equipment.
l Each board provides running and alarm indicators to help the network administrators to
locate and handle faults quickly.
l Alarm storms can be suppressed. If the number of reported alarms exceeds 930, the NE
reports that the excessive alarms are generated. Then it does not report excessive alarms.
l The connectivity of the network cable between NEs can be automatically monitored. After
detecting any faults, they automatically report the relevant alarms.
l The working temperature of some boards can be queried.
l When the MSP or TPS switching occurs, the state of an alarm or of a performance event
is not changed in the working path. Thus, the service administrator focuses on the service
state only.
ALS Function
The OptiX OSN 1500 provides the automatic laser shutdown (ALS) function for the SDH optical
interfaces.
l When a fiber that connects two optical interfaces is cut, an R-LOS alarm is generated at
the optical interface of the local end. If the R_LOS alarm lasts for 500 ms, the laser of the
transmit optical interface at the local end is automatically shut down. By default, the laser
pulse is generated at the 60-second interval and lasts for 2s every time.
l After the fiber connection is restored, the optical interface at the opposite end detects the
laser pulse generated from the local end. The laser of the optical interface at the opposite
end then continuously launches laser beams. After receiving the laser beams launched by
the opposite end, the laser of the local end then also continuously launches the laser beams.
As a result, the two optical interfaces can communicate with each other and the R-LOS
alarm is cleared.
Optical Power Management

l The OptiX OSN 1500 supports in-service detection of the optical power of SDH and
Ethernet optical interfaces.
l The OptiX OSN 1500 provides the function to query the parameters of the SDH optical
module. The parameters that can be queried include the optical interface type, fiber mode
(single-mode or multi-mode), transmission distance, transmission rate and wavelength.
l The optical interface board uses the pluggable optical module. Users can choose single-
mode or multi-mode optical modules according to the requirement. This facilitates the
maintenance.

Product Description 10 OAM
l The optical power threshold of the boards can be queried.
Multiple Maintenance Methods

l The OptiX OSN 1500 provides the orderwire phone function for management personnel
at different node sites to communicate with each other.
l The T2000 can be used to dynamically monitor the equipment running status and alarms
of each NE in a network.
l The in-service upgrade of the board software and the in-service loading of NE software are
supported. The board software and the FPGA can be remotely loaded with the error-proof
loading and resumable loading functions.
l The OptiX OSN 1500 supports the remote maintenance function. When the equipment
becomes faulty, the maintenance personnel can use the public phone network to remotely
maintain the OptiX OSN 1500 system.
l The N1PQ1, N1PQM, N2PQ1, line boards and Q3CXL1/4/16 support the PRBS test and
the remote bit error test.
l The OptiX OSN 1500 provides the press-to-collect function for fault data. This function
reduces the data collection time before service restoration. By using this function, the user
is able to selectively collect fault data, and to manually interrupt the collection according
to the requirement.
l The OptiX OSN 1500 provides the board version replacement function. This helps to
replace the board of an old version with the board of a new version. After the replacement,
the configuration and service status of the new version board are the same as the
configuration and service status of the old version board.
l Ethernet boards provide the OAM function. This function is used to automatically detect
faults in Ethernet, and to help locate and isolate these faults.
l The power consumption of the equipment and boards can be queried and controlled. After
a board is inserted, it does not work if the total power consumption of the boards exceeds
the power consumption threshold of the equipment.
l The port status can be queried.
10.2 Network Management

management system. The T2000 manages the OSN, SDH, Metro and DWDM equipment in the
entire network. In compliance with ITU-T Recommendations, the T2000 adopts a standard
The OptiX OSN 1500 supports the simple network management protocol (SNMP), which solves
the uniform NMS problem for the networking of equipment from different vendors.

Product Description 11 Security Management
11 Security Management
About This Chapter
11.1 Authentication Management
Considering the security, only the legal user can log in to the NE after authentication.
11.2 Authorization Management
Proper authority assignment to different NE users can ensure the successful operations
performed by each user and the security of the NE system.
11.3 Network Security Management
Safe data transmission between the T2000 and NEs is the prerequisite for the T2000 to effectively
manage the NEs.
11.4 System Security Management
Considering the security, the system provides some security policies, which must be executed
forcibly.
11.5 Log Management
The OptiX OSN 1500 provides log management functions.

11 Security Management Product Description
11.1 Authentication Management

Considering the security, only the legal user can log in to the NE after authentication.
l NE login management: You can successfully log in to the NE only by entering a valid user
name and a valid password.
l NE user switching: On a client, only one user is allowed to operate the NE each time. For
this reason, if multiple users intend to operate the same NE simultaneously, they need to
be switched to ensure that the data is unique.
l Forcibly making other users exit from the NE: To avoid errors caused by simultaneous
configuration by multiple users, or to prevent other users from illegally logging in to the
NE, one user can forcibly make other users who are at lower level exit from the NE.
l NE login locking: After the locking function is enabled, a user whose level is lower than
that of the current user is not allowed to log in to the NE.
l NE setting locking: You can lock the settings of functional modules of the NE to prevent
other users from operating the locked modules.
l Query the online NE users.
11.2 Authorization Management

Proper authority assignment to different NE users can ensure the successful operations
performed by each user and the security of the NE system.
l NE user management:
– According to the operation authorities, NE users are divided into five levels, which
involve monitoring level, operation level, maintenance level, system level, and
debugging level in an ascending order.
– According to the T2000, NE users are classified into LCT NE users, EMS NE users,
CMD NE users, and general NE users.
– Create NE users, assign authorities, or specify a user flag.
– Modify the user name, change the password, modify the operation authority, or change
the user flag.
– Delete NE users.
l NE user group management:
– According to the operation authority, by default, NE user groups are divided into
administrator group, super administrator group, operator group, monitoring personnel
group, and maintenance personnel group.
– Modify the group of a user.
11.3 Network Security Management

Safe data transmission between the T2000 and NEs is the prerequisite for the T2000 to effectively
manage the NEs.
l The T2000 communicates with NEs through the security socket layer (SSL) protocol.
Therefore, the data is complete and safe.

l Set the ACL rule to filter the received IP packets, control the data traffic in the network,
and to avoid malicious attack. According to the system security level, the ACL rule is
divided into basic ACL and advanced ACL.
– For an NE that requires lower security level, you can set the basic ACL rule only to
check the source address of the IP packets only.
– For an NE that requires higher security level, you can set the advanced ACL rule. In
this case, the NE checks the source address, sink address, source port, sink port, and
protocol type of the received IP packets.
– If both the advanced and the basic ACL rules are available, the NE adopts the advanced
ACL rule to check the packets.
– Query the ACL rule.
– Modify the ACL rule.
– Delete the ACL rule.
l An NE can access the T2000 by using any of the following methods:
– Access over the Ethernet network. By default, an NE allows the T2000 to access it over
the Ethernet network.
– Access through the OAM port.
l Control the access to NEs by using LCT: If the T2000 LCT needs to be used to manage
NEs, you can enable the LCT access authority allowed by the NE on the T2000.
l When the T2000 communicates with an NE, confidential data (such as user name and
password) is encrypted.
11.4 System Security Management

Considering the security, the system provides some security policies, which must be executed
forcibly.
l Query or set the Warning Screen information of the NE.
l Query and set the Warning Screen switch of the NE to decide whether to report an alarm
after a user logs in to the NE.
l Query or set the earliest expiry time and the latest expiry time of the password.
l Query or set the maximum number of illegal login attempts.
l Query or set the maximum number of overdue password attempts.
l Query or set the password uniqueness.
11.5 Log Management

The OptiX OSN 1500 provides log management functions.
11.5.1 NE Security Log Management
The NE security logs record the operations performed by all the NE users and the operation
results. By querying these logs, the administrator can trace and review the operations.
11.5.2 Syslog Management
The system log service (Syslog service) is used for the security management on an NE. For
unified control by maintenance engineers, all types of information are transmitted to the log
server in the format complying with the system log (Syslog) protocol.

11 Security Management Product Description
11.5.1 NE Security Log Management

The NE security logs record the operations performed by all the NE users and the operation
results. By querying these logs, the administrator can trace and review the operations.
l Query the security logs of the NE.
l Set forwarding NE logs to the Syslog Server.
11.5.2 Syslog Management

The system log service (Syslog service) is used for the security management on an NE. For
unified control by maintenance engineers, all types of information are transmitted to the log
server in the format complying with the system log (Syslog) protocol.
The OptiX OSN 1500 supports:
l Enabling and disabling of Syslog protocol
l Setting of Syslog protocol transmit modes: UDP (by default) and TCP
l Adding and deletion of Syslog servers
l Coexisting of multiple Syslog servers and the sending of logs to multiple servers at the
same time
l Reporting of alarms upon the communication disconnection between the Syslog server and
the NE
Figure 11-1 shows how the Syslog protocol is transmitted in a network. To ensure the security
of system logs, make sure that at least two system log servers are available in a network.
Normally, IP protocol is used for the communication between the NE and the system log servers.
The communication between NEs can be realized through several methods, for example, ECC
mode or IP over DCC mode.
Figure 11-1 Schematic diagram of Syslog protocol transmitting

NE B
NMS NE A NE C
(client) (client)
ECC/ IP OVER DCC

TCP/IP
real time
Syslog Server B
security log
Syslog Server A
NE D
NOTE
Normally, a system log server is a workstation or server that is dedicated to storing the system logs of all
NEs in a network.
A forwarding gateway NE receives the system logs of other NEs and forwards the logs to the system log
server. In Figure 11-1, NE A and NE C are forwarding gateway NEs.
When IP protocol is adopted on each NE for communication, every NE can directly communicate
with the two system log servers through the IP protocol. Hence, configure the IP addresses and

port numbers on the NE, and the system is able to transmit the NE logs to the two Syslog servers
through the auto addressing function of IP protocol. No forwarding gateway NE is required.
When ECC mode is adopted on each NE for communication, the NE that does not directly
connect to the Syslog servers cannot communicate with the servers. The logs of the NE must be
transmitted to a gateway NE that directly communicates with the Syslog servers through ECC.
Then, the logs are forwarded to the Syslog servers by the gateway NE. Hence, the forwarding
gateway NE must be configured, for example, configure NE A as the forwarding gateway NE
for NE D.

Product Description 12 Technical Specifications
12 Technical Specifications
About This Chapter
The technical specifications provide the specifications of the optical interfaces, electrical
interfaces and environment.
12.1 Interface Types

The OptiX OSN 1500 supports optical interfaces of different types.
12.2 Specifications of the Optical Interface
The OptiX OSN 1500 supports SDH optical interfaces, Ethernet optical interfaces and ATM
optical interfaces. This section lists the specifications of these optical interfaces.
12.3 Specifications of Electrical Interfaces
The OptiX OSN 1500 supports PDH electrical interfaces, DDN electrical interfaces and auxiliary
interfaces.
12.4 Clock Timing and Synchronization Performance
The clock interfaces and synchronization performance of the OptiX OSN 1500 complies with
related ITU-T Recommendations.
12.5 Transmission Performance
The transmission performance of the OptiX OSN 1500 complies with ITU-T standards.
12.6 Timeslot Numbering
The OptiX OSN 1500 supports two numbering schemes for TU-12.
12.7 Cabinet and Subrack Specification
The technical specifications of the subrack and cabinet provide the dimensions and weight.
12.8 Power Supply Specification
The OptiX OSN 1500 supports the input of -48 V or -60 V DC power supply.
12.9 Electromagnetic Compatibility
The OptiX OSN 1500 is designed in accordance with the ETS 300 386 and ETS 300 127
standards stipulated by the ETSI. The equipment has passed the electromagnetic compatibility
(EMC) related tests.
12.10 Safety Certification
The OptiX OSN 1500 has received several safety certifications.

12 Technical Specifications Product Description
12.11 Environmental Specification

The OptiX OSN 1500 requires a proper environment for normal operation.
12.12 Environment Requirement
The OptiX OSN 1500 requires a different environment for storage, transportation and operation.
This section lists the environment requirements.
12.13 Power Consumption and Weight of Boards
Different boards have different power consumption and weight.

12.1 Interface Types

The OptiX OSN 1500 supports optical interfaces of different types.
Table 12-1 lists the optical interfaces of the OptiX OSN 1500.
Table 12-1 Optical interfaces of the OptiX OSN 1500
Interface Type Rate and Feature
SDH optical interface 155520kbit/s, 622080kbit/s, 2488320kbit/s, 2666057 kbit/s
Ethernet interface 10/100Base-TX, 100Base-FX, 1000Base-SX, 1000Base-LX,

1000Base-ZX
ATM interface 34368 kbit/s, 155520 kbit/s, 622080 kbit/s
PDH/SDH electrical 1544 kbit/s, 2048 kbit/s, 34368 kbit/s, 44736 kbit/s, 139264 kbit/s,
interface 155520 kbit/s
DDN electrical RS449, EIA530, EIA530-A, V.35, V.24, X.21, Framed E1

interface
Clock interface OptiX OSN 1500A:

Two 120-ohm clock interfaces (2048 kbit/s or 2048 kHz)
OptiX OSN 1500B:
Alarm interface Three alarm input interfaces, one alarm output interfaces, alarm
concatenated interfaces, four cabinet alarm indicator interfaces
Auxiliary interface Administration interface, orderwire interface, data interface
12.2 Specifications of the Optical Interface

The OptiX OSN 1500 supports SDH optical interfaces, Ethernet optical interfaces and ATM
optical interfaces. This section lists the specifications of these optical interfaces.
12.2.1 SDH Optical Interface

The OptiX OSN 1500 supports SDH optical interfaces of different types.
12.2.2 Ethernet Optical Interface
The OptiX OSN 1500 supports Ethernet optical interfaces of different types.
12.2.3 ATM Optical Interface
The ATM optical interfaces include STM-1 and STM-4 ATM optical interfaces.
12.2.4 Laser Safety Class
The safety class of the laser on each board is CLASS 1 or CLASS 1M.

12.2.1 SDH Optical Interface

The OptiX OSN 1500 supports SDH optical interfaces of different types.
Table 12-2 lists the specifications for the STM-1 optical interface of the OptiX OSN 1500.
Table 12-2 Specifications of the STM-1 optical interface of the OptiX OSN 1500
Item Specification
Nominal bit rate 155 520 kbit/s
Classification code I-1 Ie-1 S-1.1 L-1.1 L-1.2 Ve-1.2
Transmission 0 to 2 0 to 2 2 to 15 20 to 40 60 to 80 80 to 100
distance (km)
Operating 1260 to 1270 to 1261 to 1263 to 1480 to 1480 to

wavelength (nm) 1360 1380 1360 1360 1580 1580
Fiber Type Single- Multi- Single- Single- Single- Single-

mode LC mode LC mode mode LC mode mode LC
LC LC
Mean launched -15 to -8 -20 to -15 to -8 -5 to 0 -5 to 0 -3 to 0

power (dBm) -14
Receiver minimum -23 -30 -28 -34 -34 -34

sensitivity (dBm)
Minimum overload -8 -14 -8 -10 -10 -10

(dBm)
Minimum extinction 8.2 10 8.2 10 10 10

ratio (dB)
Item Specification
Nominal bit rate 622 080 kbit/s
Classification code I-4 S-4.1 L-4.1 L-4.2 Ve-4.2
Transmission distance (km) 0 to 2 2 to 15 20 to 40 50 to 80 80 to 100
Operating wavelength (nm) 1261 to 1274 to 1280 to 1480 to 1480 to

1360 1356 1335 1580 1580
Fiber Type Single-mode LC
Mean launched power (dBm) -15 to -8 -15 to -8 -3 to 2 -3 to 2 -3 to 2

Item Specification
Receiver minimum -23 -28 -28 -28 -34

sensitivity (dBm)
Minimum overload (dBm) -8 -8 -8 -8 -13
Minimum extinction ratio 8.2 8.2 10 10 10.5

(dB)
Item Specification
Nominal bit rate 2 488 320 kbit/s
Classification I-16 S-16.1 L-16.1 L-16.2 L-16.2 V-16.2 U-16.2

code (Je) (Je) (Je) (BA
(BA) +PA)
Transmission 0 to 2 2 to 15 25 to 40 50 to 80 to 100 105 to 145 to

distance (km) 80 140 170
Operating 1266 1260 to 1280 to 1500 to 1530 to 1530 to 1550.12

wavelength to 1360 1335 1580 1560 1565
(nm) 1360
Mean launched -10 to -5 to 0 -2 to 3 -2 to 3 5 to 7 Without Without

power (dBm) -3 BA: -2 BA and
to 3 PA: -2 to
3
With With
BA: 13 BA: 15 to
to 15 18
Receiver -18 -18 -27 -28 -28 -28 Without

minimum BA and
sensitivity PA: -28
(dBm)
With PA:
-34
Minimum -3 0 -9 -9 -9 -9 Without
overload (dBm) BA and
PA: -9
With PA:
-10

Item Specification
Maximum 12 - - 1200 to 2000 2800 3400

chromatic 1600
dispersion
(ps/nm)
Minimum 8.2 8.2 8.2 8.2 8.2 8.2 8.2

extinction ratio
(dB)
Table 12-5 lists the specifications for the STM-16 (FEC) optical interface of the OptiX OSN
1500.
Table 12-5 Specifications of the STM-16 (FEC) optical interface of the OptiX OSN 1500
Item Specification
Nominal bit rate 2 666 057 kbit/s
Classification code Ue-16.2c Ue-16.2d Ue-16.2f
Code contenta SF16+BA SF16+BA SF16+BA(17dB)+RA

(14dB)+PA (17dB)+PA +PA
Operating wavelength (nm) 1550.12 1550.12 1550.12
Mean launched power (dBm) Without BA and Without BA and Without BA, RA and
PA: -5 to -1 PA: -5 to -1 PA: -5 to -1
With BA: 13 to With BA: 13 to With BA: 15 to 18

15 15
Receiver minimum Without BA and Without BA and Without BA, RA and

sensitivity (dBm) PA: -27.5 PA: -27.5 PA: -27.5
With PA: -37 With PA: -37 With PA: -42
Minimum overload point -10 -10 -10

(dBm) b
Minimum extinction ratio 10 10 10

(dB) c
a: The number in the bracket indicates the corresponding parameter, for example, BA (14)
indicates that the optical power of the signal after it is amplified by the BA is 14 dBm. "FEC
+BA+PA" indicates that the optical interface specifications include FEC, BA and PA.
b: The parameter is that of the PA.
c: Parameters in the table are of the optical modules, excluding the amplifiers.

The STM-16 optical interfaces of the OptiX OSN 1500 can output wavelengths that comply
with ITU-T G.694.1. The output wavelengths can be directly added to the WDM system. Table
12-6 lists the wavelengths and frequencies of the STM-16 optical interfaces.
Table 12-6 Wavelengths and frequencies of STM-16 optical interfaces
No. Frequency Wavelength No. Frequency Wavelength (nm)

(THz) (nm) (THz)
1 192.1 1560.61 21 194.1 1544.53
2 192.2 1559.79 22 194.2 1543.73
3 192.3 1558.98 23 194.3 1542.94
4 192.4 1558.17 24 194.4 1542.14
5 192.5 1557.36 25 194.5 1541.35
6 192.6 1556.56 26 194.6 1540.56
7 192.7 1555.75 27 194.7 1539.77
8 192.8 1554.94 28 194.8 1538.98
9 192.9 1554.13 29 194.9 1538.19
10 193.0 1553.33 30 195.0 1537.40
11 193.1 1552.52 31 195.1 1536.61
12 193.2 1551.72 32 195.2 1535.82
13 193.3 1550.92 33 195.3 1535.04
14 193.4 1550.12 34 195.4 1534.25
15 193.5 1549.32 35 195.5 1533.47
16 193.6 1548.51 36 195.6 1532.68
17 193.7 1547.72 37 195.7 1531.90
18 193.8 1546.92 38 195.8 1531.12
19 193.9 1546.12 39 195.9 1530.33
20 194.0 1545.32 40 196.0 1529.55
Table 12-7 lists the specifications of the colored optical interface of the OptiX OSN 1500.
Table 12-7 Specifications of the colored optical interface of the OptiX OSN 1500
Item Specification
Nominal bit rate 2 488 320 kbit/s 2 666 057 kbit/s

Item Specification
Dispersion limit (km) 170 640 640
Mean launched power (dBm) -2 to 3 -5 to -1 -5 to -1
Receiver minimum sensitivity -28 -28 -28

(dBm)
Minimum overload point (dBm) -9 -9 -9
Maximum chromatic dispersion 3400 10880 10880

(ps/nm)
Minimum extinction ratio (dB) 8.2 10 10
OSNR (dB) Without FEC: 20 With FEC: 16
Without FEC: 21
12.2.2 Ethernet Optical Interface

The OptiX OSN 1500 supports Ethernet optical interfaces of different types.
The specification of the Ethernet optical interface of the OptiX OSN 1500 equipment comply
with IEEE 802.3 standards. Table 12-8 lists the specifications.
Table 12-8 Parameters specified for the Ethernet optical interfaces of the OptiX OSN 1500
Parameter Value
Type of Interface 1000BA 1000BA 1000BAS 1000BA 100BAS 100BAS

SE-ZX SE-VX E-LX (10 SE-SX E-FX (15 E-FX (2
(80 km) (40 km) km) (0.5 km) km) km)
Type of Fiber Single- Single- Single- Multi- Single- Single-

mode LC mode LC mode LC mode LC mode LC mode LC
Launched -2 to +5 -4.5 to 0 -9 to -3 -9.5 to 0 -15 to -8 -19 to -14

Optical Power
(dBm)
Operating 1480 to 1270 to 1270 to 770 to 1261 to 1270 to

Wavelength 1580 1355 1355 860 1360 1380
Range (nm)
Minimum -3 -3 -3 0 -7 -14
Overload (dBm)
Receiver -22 -23 -19 -17 -28 -30

Sensitivity
(dBm)

Parameter Value
Minimum 9 9 9.5 9.5 10 10

Extinction Ratio
(dB)
12.2.3 ATM Optical Interface

The ATM optical interfaces include STM-1 and STM-4 ATM optical interfaces.
Table 12-9 and Table 12-10 list the specifications of the ATM optical interfaces of the OptiX
OSN 1500.
Table 12-9 Performance of the STM-1 ATM optical interfaces of the OptiX OSN 1500
Item Specification
Nominal bit rate 155520 kbit/s
Classification code Ie-1 S-1.1 L-1.1 L-1.2 Ve-1.2
Transmission distance 0 to 2 2 to 15 20 to 40 60 to 80 80 to 100

(km)
Operating wavelength 1260 to 1261 to 1263 to 1480 to 1480 to

(nm) 1360 1360 1360 1580 1580
Mean launched power -20 to -14 -15 to -8 -5 to 0 -5 to 0 -3 to 0

(dBm)
Receiver minimum -31 -28 -34 -34 -34

sensitivity (dBm)
Minimum overload -14 -8 -10 -10 -10

(dBm)
Minimum extinction ratio 10 8.2 10 10 10

(dB)
Table 12-10 Performance of the STM-4 ATM optical interfaces of the OptiX OSN 1500
Item Specification
Nominal bit rate 622080 kbit/s
Classification code S-4.1 L-4.1 L-4.2 Ve-4.2
Transmission distance 2 to 15 20 to 40 50 to 80 80 to 100

(km)

Item Specification
Operating wavelength 1274 to 1356 1280 to 1335 1480 to 1580 1480 to 1580
(nm)
Mean launched power -15 to -8 -3 to 2 -3 to 2 -3 to 2

(dBm)
Receiver minimum -28 -28 -28 -34

sensitivity (dBm)
Minimum overload -8 -8 -8 -13

(dBm)
Minimum extinction 8.2 10 10 10.5

ratio (dB)
12.2.4 Laser Safety Class

The safety class of the laser on each board is CLASS 1 or CLASS 1M.
Table 12-11 lists the safety classes of lasers used for the OptiX OSN 1500.
Table 12-11 Laser safety class

Laser Safety Board
Class
CLASS 1 N1SL16, N2SL16, N3SL16, N1SL16A, N2SL16A, N3SL16A, N1SF16,

N1SL4, N1SL4A, N2SL4, R1SL4, N1SLQ4, N1SLQ4A, N2SLQ4,
N1SLD4, N1SLD4A, N2SLD4, R1SLD4, N1SLT1, N1SLQ1A,
N1SLQ1, N2SLQ1, R1SLQ1, N1SL1, N1SL1A, N2SL1, R1SL1,
N2SLO1, N1EGT2, N2EGS2, N1EMS4, N1EGS4, N3EGS4, N2EGR2,
N2EMR0, N1ADL4, N1ADQ1, N1IDL4, N1IDQ1, N1MST4, N1OU08,
N2OU08, N1EFF8, Q2CXL1, Q3CXL1, Q2CXL4, Q3CXL4, Q2CXL16,
Q3CXL16, R1CXLL1, R1CXLD1, R1CXLQ1, R1CXLL4, R1CXLD4,
R1CXLQ4, R1CXLL16
CLASS 1M BA2, BPA, 61COA, N1COA, 62COA, N1FIB, ROP, N1MR2A,

N1MR2B, N1MR2C, N1LWX, TN11OBU1, TN11MR2, TN11MR4,
TN11CMR2, TN11CMR4
12.3 Specifications of Electrical Interfaces

The OptiX OSN 1500 supports PDH electrical interfaces, DDN electrical interfaces and auxiliary
interfaces.
12.3.1 PDH Electrical Interface

The OptiX OSN 1500 supports PDH electrical interfaces of several types.

12.3.2 DDN Interface

The OptiX OSN 1500 supports DDN interfaces.
12.3.3 Auxiliary Interface
The OptiX OSN 1500 provides many auxiliary interfaces.
12.3.1 PDH Electrical Interface

The OptiX OSN 1500 supports PDH electrical interfaces of several types.
Table 12-12 lists the specifications of the PDH electrical interfaces of the OptiX OSN 1500.
Table 12-12 Specifications of PDH electrical interfaces
Interface Type 1544 2048 34368 44736 139264 155520

kbit/s kbit/s kbit/s kbit/s kbit/s kbit/s
Code B8ZS, HDB3 HDB3 B3ZS CMI CMI

AMI
Signal bit rate at ITU-T G.703- ITU-T G.703-compliant

the output compliant
interface
Attenuation
tolerance at the
input interface
Frequency
deviation
tolerance at the
input interface
Anti-interference - - - -
capability of
input interface
12.3.2 DDN Interface

The OptiX OSN 1500 supports DDN interfaces.
Table 12-13 lists the DDN interface types.
Table 12-13 DDN interface types
Interface Type Description Standard
Framed E1 Framed E1 signal Physical and electrical features comply with ITU-T
interface type G.703. The frame structure complies with ITU-T G.
704.
N x 64 kbit/s V.35 interface Complies with ITU-T V.35.

interface
V.24 interface Complies with ITU-T V.24.

Interface Type Description Standard
X.21 interface Complies with ITU-T X.21.
RS-449 interface Complies with EIA RS-449 (RS-423A, RS-422A).
RS-530 interface Complies with EIA RS-530.
RS-530A Complies with EIA RS-530A.

interface
12.3.3 Auxiliary Interface

The OptiX OSN 1500 provides many auxiliary interfaces.
RS-232 Interfaces
Table 12-14 lists the specifications of the RS-232 electrical interfaces. The RS-232 interfaces
are S1, S2, S3 and S4 interfaces on the EOW or S1 and S2 interfaces on the AMU.
Table 12-14 Specifications of the RS-232 interfaces
Item Specification
Bit rate 19.2 kbit/s to the maximum
Mode RS-232 Tx & Rx data only
Electrical level ±5 V to ±15 V
RS-422 Interfaces
Table 12-15 lists the specifications of the RS-422 electrical interfaces. The RS-422 interfaces
are S1, S2, S3 and S4 interfaces on the EOW or S1 and S2 interfaces on the AMU.
Table 12-15 Specifications of the RS-422 interfaces
Item Specification
Bit rate 19.2 kbit/s to the maximum
Mode RS-422 Tx & Rx data only
Electrical level ±2.0 V
Orderwire Phone Interface

Table 12-16 lists the specifications of the orderwire phone interfaces.

Table 12-16 Specifications of the orderwire phone interface

Item Specification
Speech channel interface
Impedance 600 ohms
Bandwidth 300 Hz to 3400 Hz
Operating current 18 mA
Input gain -4/0/0 dB
Output gain 0/-7/0 dB
Signaling DTMF compliant with ITU-T Q.23
12.4 Clock Timing and Synchronization Performance

The clock interfaces and synchronization performance of the OptiX OSN 1500 complies with
related ITU-T Recommendations.
12.4.1 Clock Interface Type

The OptiX OSN 1500 provides the external clock input interfaces and clock output interfaces.
12.4.2 Timing and Synchronization Performance
The timing and synchronization performance of the OptiX OSN 1500 complies with ITU-T G.
813.
12.4.1 Clock Interface Type

The OptiX OSN 1500 provides the external clock input interfaces and clock output interfaces.
Table 12-17 lists the clock features of the OptiX OSN 1500.
Table 12-17 Clock features

Clock Type Feature
External OptiX OSN 1500A:

synchronization Two 120-ohm 2048 kbit/s (G.703) or 2048 kHz (G.703) clock inputs
source
OptiX OSN 1500B:
Two 75-ohm 2048 kbit/s (G.703) or 2048 kHz (G.703) clock inputs
Two 120-ohm 2048 kbit/s (G.703) or 2048 kHz (G.703) clock inputs
Synchronization OptiX OSN 1500A:

output Two 120-ohm 2048 kbit/s (G.703) or 2048 kHz (G.703) clock outputs
OptiX OSN 1500B:
Two 75-ohm 2048 kbit/s (G.703) or 2048 kHz (G.703) clock outputs
Two 120-ohm 2048 kbit/s (G.703) or 2048 kHz (G.703) clock outputs

12.4.2 Timing and Synchronization Performance

The timing and synchronization performance of the OptiX OSN 1500 complies with ITU-T G.
813.
Table 12-18 lists the timing and synchronization performance of the OptiX OSN 1500
equipment.
Table 12-18 Timing and synchronization performance
Output Jitter Output Frequency of Internal Long-Term Phase Variation

Oscillator in the Free-Run Mode in the Locked Mode
G.813 compliant G.813 compliant G.813 compliant
12.5 Transmission Performance

The transmission performance of the OptiX OSN 1500 complies with ITU-T standards.
Table 12-19 lists the performance of the output jitter and bit error in an SDH/PDH network.
Table 12-19 Transmission performance
Jitter at STM-N Interface Jitter at PDH Interface Bit Error
G.813/G.825 compliant G.823/G.783 compliant G.826 compliant
12.6 Timeslot Numbering

The OptiX OSN 1500 supports two numbering schemes for TU-12.
Table 12-20 and Table 12-21 list the details.
Table 12-20 Numbering TU-12s in a VC-4 (scheme I)
TUG2 TUG2 TUG2 TUG TUG TUG TUG

(7-1) (7-2) (7-3) (7-4) (7-5) (7-6) (7-7)
TU-3 (3-1) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1
TU-3 (3-2) 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 4 4 4
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2
TU-3 (3-3) 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 6 6 6 6
3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3

Table 12-21 Numbering TU-12s in a VC-4 (scheme II)
TUG2 TUG2 TUG2 TUG2 TUG2 TUG2 TUG2

(7-1) (7-2) (7-3) (7-4) (7-5) (7-6) (7-7)
TU-3 (3-1) 1 2 4 4 2 4 7 2 4 1 3 5 1 3 5 1 3 5 1 4 6
2 3 5 6 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1
TU-3 (3-2) 2 2 4 5 2 4 8 2 5 1 3 5 1 3 5 1 3 5 2 4 6
3 4 6 7 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2
TU-3 (3-3) 3 2 4 6 2 4 9 3 5 1 3 5 1 3 5 1 3 6 2 4 6
4 5 7 8 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3
12.7 Cabinet and Subrack Specification

The technical specifications of the subrack and cabinet provide the dimensions and weight.
Table 12-22 lists the technical specifications of the ETSI cabinets.
Table 12-22 Technical specifications of the ETSI cabinets
Dimensions (mm) Weight (kg)
600 (W) x 300 (D) x 2000 (H) 55
600 (W) x 600 (D) x 2000 (H) 79
600 (W) x 300 (D) x 2200 (H) 60
600 (W) x 600 (D) x 2200 (H) 84

NOTE
All dimensions are in mm. The following figure shows the dimensions of
the width, the depth and the height.
H
W
D
Table 12-23 lists the technical specifications of the 19-inch standard cabinets.
Table 12-23 Technical specifications of the 19-inch standard cabinets
600 (W) x 600 (D) x 2000 (H) 90
600 (W) x 600 (D) x 2200 (H) 110

Table 12-24 lists the technical specifications of the OptiX OSN 1500A subrack.
Table 12-24 Technical specifications of the OptiX OSN 1500A subrack
444 (W) x 262 (D) x 131 (H) 8 (with the backplane, fan and two PIU
boards)
Table 12-25 lists the technical specifications of the OptiX OSN 1500B subrack.
Table 12-25 Technical specifications of the OptiX OSN 1500B subrack
444 (W) x 263 (D) x 221 (H) 9 (with the backplane, fan and two PIU
boards)
12.8 Power Supply Specification

The OptiX OSN 1500 supports the input of -48 V or -60 V DC power supply.
Table 12-26 lists the specifications of the power supply.
Table 12-26 Power supply specifications
Item Specification
Power supply mode DC power supply
Nominal voltage -48 V or -60 V
Voltage range -38.4 V to -57.6 V or -48 V to -72 V
Maximum power OptiX OSN 1500A: 290 W

consumption OptiX OSN 1500B: 320 W
Maximum current OptiX OSN 1500A: 4.5 A

OptiX OSN 1500B: 6 A
12.9 Electromagnetic Compatibility

The OptiX OSN 1500 is designed in accordance with the ETS 300 386 and ETS 300 127
standards stipulated by the ETSI. The equipment has passed the electromagnetic compatibility
(EMC) related tests.
Table 12-27 lists the passed EMC-related test specifications.

Table 12-27 EMC test results

Item Standard
Radiated emission CISPR22 Class

AEN55022 Class A
Conducted emission for DC port CISPR22 Class A

EN55022 Class A
Conducted emission for signal CISPR22 Class A

ports EN55022 Class A
Immunity to Radiated ETSI EN 300 386 V1.3.3

Electromagnetic Field IEC 61000-4-3(80 MHz-2700 MHz: 10 V/m)
Immunity to electrostatic discharge ETSI EN 300 386 V1.3.3

IEC 61000-4-2 (Air Discharge:±8 kV; Contact
Discharge:±6 kV)
Immunity to electrical fast transient ETSI EN 300 386 V1.3.3

bursts for DC ports IEC 61000-4-4(±1 kV)
Immunity to electrical fast transient ETSI EN 300 386 V1.3.2

bursts for signal ports IEC 61000-4-4(±1 kV)
Immunity to surges for DC ports ETSI EN 300 386 V1.3.3

IEC 61000-4-5(Line to Line: ±1 kV, Line to
Ground: ±2 kV)
Immunity to surges for signal ports ETSI EN 300 386 V1.3.3

IEC 61000-4-5(±1 kV)
Immunity to continuous conducted ETSI EN 300 386 V1.3.3

interference for DC ports IEC 61000-4-6(10 V)
Immunity to continuous conducted ETSI EN 300 386 V1.3.3

interference for signal ports IEC 61000-4-6(10 V)
Immunity To Continuous Voltage ETSI EN 300 386 V1.3.3

dips and Short Interruption and IEC 61000-4-29
Voltage Variation for DC Power
Port
12.10 Safety Certification

The OptiX OSN 1500 has received several safety certifications.
Table 12-28 lists the safety certifications that the OptiX OSN 1500 has received.

Table 12-28 Safety certifications

Item Standard
Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) CISPR22 Class A

CISPR24
EN55022 Class A
EN50024
ETSI EN 300 386 Class A
ETSI ES 201 468
CFR 47 FCC Part 15 Class A
ICES 003 Class A
AS/NZS CISPR22 Class A
GB9254 Class A
VCCI Class A
Safety IEC 60950-1

IEC/EN41003
EN 60950-1
UL 60950-1
CSA C22.2 No 60950-1
AS/NZS 60950-1
BS EN 60950-1
IS 13252
GB4943
Laser safety FDA rules

21 CFR 1040.10 and 1040.11
IEC60825-1
IEC60825-2
EN60825-1
EN60825-2
GB7247
Health ICNIRP Guideline

1999-519-EC
EN 50385
OET Bulletin 65
IEEE Std C95.1
Environment protection RoHS

12.11 Environmental Specification

The OptiX OSN 1500 requires a proper environment for normal operation.
The OptiX OSN 1500 can operate normally for a long term in the environment defined in Table
12-29.
Table 12-29 Environment specifications for long-term operation
Item Range
Altitude ≤ 4850 m
Air pressure 55 kPa to 106 kPa
Temperature 0°C to 45°C
Relative humidity 10% to 90%
Anti-seismic performance ETS300-019-2-3-AMD
12.12 Environment Requirement

The OptiX OSN 1500 requires a different environment for storage, transportation and operation.
This section lists the environment requirements.
The following international standards are taken as the reference for specifying the environment
requirements.
l ETS (European Telecommunication Standards) 300 019-1-3: Class 3.2 Partly temperature-
controlled location
l NEBS GR-63-CORE: Network Equipment-Building System (NEBS) Requirements:
Physical Protection
12.12.1 Environment for Storage
The OptiX OSN 1500 requires a proper climate for storage.
12.12.2 Environment for Transportation
The OptiX OSN 1500 requires a proper climate for transportation.
12.12.3 Environment for Operation
The OptiX OSN 1500 requires a proper climate for operation.
12.12.1 Environment for Storage

The OptiX OSN 1500 requires a proper climate for storage.
Climate
Table 12-30 lists the climate requirements for storage.

Table 12-30 Climate requirements for storage
Item Range
Altitude ≤ 4850 m
Temperature -40°C to +70°C
Temperature change rate ≤ 1 °C/min
Waterproof Requirement
The requirement for storing the equipment on the customer site is that generally, the equipment
must be stored indoors.
There should be no water on the floor or water entering the equipment carton. The equipment
should be placed away from places where there are possibilities of water leakage, such as near
the auto fire-fighting facilities and heating facilities.
If the equipment is stored outdoors, ensure that following conditions are met.
l The carton must be intact.

l Take rainproof measures to prevent water from entering the carton.
l There should be no water on the ground where the carton is placed.
l The carton must be free from direct exposure to sunlight.
Biological Environment
l Avoid the growth of microbes, such as eumycete and mycete.
l Take anti-rodent measures.
Air Cleanness
l The air must be free from explosive, electric-conductive, magnetic-conductive or corrosive
dust.
l The density of the mechanical active substances complies with the requirements defined
by Table 12-31.
Table 12-31 Density requirements for mechanical active substances during storage
Mechanical Active Substance Content
Suspending dust ≤ 5.00 mg/m3
Precipitable dust ≤ 20.0 mg/m2·h
Gravel ≤ 300 mg/m3

l The density of the chemical active substances complies with the requirements defined by
Table 12-32.
Table 12-32 Density requirements for chemical active substances during storage
Chemical Active Substance Content
SO2 ≤ 0.30 mg/m3
H2S ≤ 0.10 mg/m3
NO2 ≤ 0.50 mg/m3
NH3 ≤ 1.00 mg/m3
Cl2 ≤ 0.10 mg/m3
HCl ≤ 0.10 mg/m3
HF ≤ 0.01 mg/m3
O3 ≤ 0.05 mg/m3
Mechanical Stress
Table 12-33 lists the requirements for mechanical stress during storage.
Table 12-33 Requirements for mechanical stress during storage

Item Sub-Item Range
Random vibration Acceleration spectral - 0.02 m2/s3 -

density
Frequency range 5 Hz to 20 Hz 20 Hz to 50 50 Hz to 100

Hz Hz
dB/oct +12 - -12
12.12.2 Environment for Transportation

The OptiX OSN 1500 requires a proper climate for transportation.
Climate
Table 12-34 lists the climate requirements for transportation.

Table 12-34 Climate requirements for transportation
Item Range
Altitude ≤ 4850 m
Temperature -40°C to +70°C
Temperature change rate ≤ 1°C/min
Solar radiation ≤ 1120 W/s2
Heat radiation ≤ 600 W/s2
Air flowing speed ≤ 30 m/s
Waterproof Requirement
Ensure that the following conditions are met when transporting the equipment:
l The carton must be intact.

l Take rainproof measures to prevent water from entering the carton.
l There should be no water in the transportation tool.
Air Cleanness
dust.
by Table 12-35.
Table 12-35 Density requirements for mechanical active substances during transportation
Mechanical Active Substance Content
Suspending dust No requirement
Gravel ≤ 100 mg/m3

Table 12-36.
Table 12-36 Density requirements for chemical active substances during transportation
SO2 ≤ 1.00 mg/m3
H2S ≤ 0.50 mg/m3
NO2 ≤ 1.00 mg/m3
NH3 ≤ 3.00 mg/m3
Cl2 -
HCl ≤ 0.50 mg/m3
HF ≤ 0.03 mg/m3
O3 ≤ 0.10 mg/m3
Mechanical Stress
Table 12-37 lists the requirements for transporting the OptiX OSN 1500 equipment.
Table 12-37 Requirements for mechanical stress during transportation
Item Sub-Item Range
Random vibration Acceleration spectral 1 m2/s3 -3 dBA

density
Frequency range 5 Hz to 20 Hz 20 Hz to 200 Hz
Impact Impact response 100 m/s2, 11 ms, 100 times on each

spectrum I (sample surface
weight > 50 kg)
Impact response 180 m/s2, 6 ms, 100 times on each surface

spectrum II (sample
weight ≤ 50 kg)
Fall-off Weight (kg) Height (m)
< 10 1.0
< 15 1.0
< 20 0.8
< 30 0.6
< 40 0.5

Item Sub-Item Range
< 50 0.4
< 100 0.3
> 100 0.1

NOTE
Impact response spectrum is the maximum acceleration response curve generated by the equipment
that is spurred by a specified impact. Static load is the pressure from the top, which the equipment
with the package can endure when the equipment is placed in a specific manner.
12.12.3 Environment for Operation

The OptiX OSN 1500 requires a proper climate for operation.
Climate
Table 12-38 list the climate requirements for operation of the OptiX OSN 1500.
Table 12-38 Requirements for temperature and humidity

Temperature Relative Humidity
Long-term Short-term operation Long-term Short-term operation

operation operation
0°C to 45°C -5°C to 55°C 10% to 90% 5% to 95%

NOTE
The temperature and humidity values are tested in a place that is 1.5 m above the floor and 0.4 m in front
of the equipment. Short-term operation means that the consecutive working time of the equipment does
not exceed 96 hours, and the accumulated working time every year does not exceed 15 days.
Air Cleanness
dust.
by Table 12-39.

Table 12-39 Requirements for the density of the mechanical active substance
Mechanical Active Content

Substance
Dust particle ≤ 3 x 105 particles/m3
Suspending dust ≤ 0.2 mg/m3
Gravel ≤ 20 mg/m3
Table 12-40.
Table 12-40 Density requirements for chemical active substances during operation
SO2 ≤ 0.30 mg/m3
H2S ≤ 0.10 mg/m3
NH3 ≤ 1.00 mg/m3
Cl2 ≤ 0.10 mg/m3
HCl ≤ 0.10 mg/m3
HF ≤ 0.01 mg/m3
O3 ≤ 0.05 mg/m3
NOX ≤ 0.50 mg/m3
Mechanical Stress
Table 12-41 lists the requirements of mechanical stress for operation.
Table 12-41 Requirements for mechanical stress during operation
Item Sub-Item Range
Sinusoidal Velocity ≤ 5 mm/s -

vibration
Acceleration - ≤ 2 m/s2
Frequency range 5 Hz to 62 Hz 62 Hz to 200 Hz
Impact Impact response Half-sin wave, 30 m/s2, 11 ms, three times on

spectrum II each surface

Item Sub-Item Range
Static load 0 kPa

NOTE
Impact response spectrum is the maximum acceleration response curve generated by an equipment that is
spurred by a specified impact. Static load is the pressure from the top, which the equipment with package
can endure when the equipment is placed in a specific manner.
12.13 Power Consumption and Weight of Boards

Different boards have different power consumption and weight.
Table 12-42 lists the power consumption and weight of the boards.
Table 12-42 Power consumption and weight of the boards

Board Power Weight Board Power Weight
Consumption (kg) Consumption (kg)
(W) (W)
SDH Processing Boards
N1SLT1 22 1.2 N1SLQ4 17 1.0
N1SLQ1 15 1.0 N1SLQ4A 17 1.0
N1SLQ1 15 1.0 N2SLQ4 16 1.0

A
N2SLQ1 15 1.0 N1SLD4 17 1.0
R1SLQ1 12 0.54 N1SLD4A 17 1.0
N1SL1 17 1.0 N2SLD4 15 1.0
N2SL1 14 1.0 R1SLD4 11 0.5
N1SL1A 17 1.0 N1SL4 17 1.0
R1SL1 10 0.5 N2SL4 15 1.0
N1SF16 26 1.1 N1SL4A 17 1.0
N1SL16, 20 1.1 R1SL4 10 0.5

N2SL16
N3SL16 22 1.1 N1SL16A, 20 1.1

N2SL16A
N1SEP1 17 1.0 N3SL16A 22 0.9
PDH Processing Boards
N1PQM 22 1.0 N2PQ3 13 0.9


(W) (W)
N1SPQ4 24 0.9 N1PL3 15 1.0
N2SPQ4 24 0.9 N1PL3A 15 1.1
N1PQ1 19 1.0 N2PL3 12 0.9
N2PQ1 13 1.0 N1PD3 19 1.1
R1PL1A, 7 0.5 N2PD3 12 0.9

R1PL1B
R1PD1 15 0.5 N2PL3A 12 0.9
R2PD1 15 0.6 N1DXA 10 0.8
N1DX1 15 1.0 - - -
Interface Boards and Protection Switching Boards
N1EU08 11 0.4 N1ETS8 0 0.4
N1MU04 2 0.4 N1TSB4 3 0.3
N1OU08 6 0.4 N1TSB8 0 0.3
N2OU08 6 0.4 N1C34S 0 0.3
N1EU04 6 0.4 N1D12S 0 0.4
R1L75S 5 0.3 N1D34S 0 0.4
R1L12S 4 0.3 N1D75S 0 0.4
N1DM12 0 0.5 N1D12B 0 0.3
N1ETF8 2 0.4 - - -
Data Processing Boards
N1EGS4 70 1.1 N1EFF8 6 0.4
N3EGS4 70 1.1 N1EFS0 35 1.0
N2EGR2 40 1.1 N2EFS0 35 1.0
N2EGS2 43 1.0 N4EFS0 35 1.0
N1EGT2 29 0.9 N1EFS4 30 1.0
N2EMR0 50 1.2 N2EFS4 30 1.0
N1EMS4 65 1.1 N1ADQ1 41 1.0
R1EFT4 14 0.5 N1ADL4 41 0.9
N1EFT8 26 1.0 N1MST4 26 0.9


(W) (W)
N1EFT8 26 1.0 N1IDL4 41 1.0

A
N1IDQ1 41 1.0 - - -
Cross-connect and System Control Boards
Q2CXL1 40 1.1 R1CXLQ4 50 1.0

6, ,
Q2CXL4, R1CXLQ1
Q2CXL1 ,
R1CXLD4
,
R1CXLD1
,
R1CXLL1
6,
R1CXLL4,
R1CXLL1
Q3CXL1 46 1.2 - - -
6,
Q3CXL4,
Q3CXL1
Other Boards
N1LWX 30 1.1 TN11CM 0 0.8

R2
N1MR2B 0 1.0 TN11CM 0 0.9

R4
N1MR2C 0 1.0 N1FIB 0 0.4
TN11MR 0 0.9 TN11OBU 16 1.3

2 1
TN11MR 0.2 0.9 R1FAN 20 1.0

4
N1BA2 20 1.0 AUX 19 1.0
N1BPA 20 1.0 R1AMU 8 0.5
N2BPA 11 1.2 EOW 10 0.4
PIU, 2 1.3 - - -
PIUA

Product Description 13 Compliant Standards
13 Compliant Standards
About This Chapter
This chapter lists the standards that OptiX OSN 1500 complies with.
13.1 ITU-T Recommendations

13.2 IEEE Standards
13.3 IETF Standards
13.4 ANSI Standards
13.5 Environment Related Standards
13.6 EMC Standards
13.7 Safety Compliance Standards
13.8 Protection Standards
13.9 ASON Standards

13 Compliant Standards Product Description
13.1 ITU-T Recommendations

Table 13-1 ITU-T recommendations
Recommendation Description
G.652 Characteristics of a single-mode optical fiber cable
G.655 Characteristics of a non-zero dispersion-shifted single-mode

optical fiber and cable
G.661 Definition and test methods for the relevant generic parameters of
optical fiber amplifiers
G.662 Generic characteristics of optical fiber amplifier devices and sub-

systems
G.663 Application related aspects of optical fiber amplifier devices and

sub-systems
G.671 Transmission characteristics of optical components and

subsystems
G.691 Optical interfaces for single channel STM-64 and other SDH
systems with optical amplifiers
G.692 Optical interfaces for multichannel systems with optical amplifiers
G.694.1 Spectral grids for WDM applications: DWDM frequency grid
G.694.2 Spectral grids for WDM applications: CWDM wavelength grid
G.702 Digital hierarchy bit rates
G.703 Physical/electrical characteristic of hierarchical digital interfaces
G.704 Synchronous frame structures used at 1544, 6312, 2048, 8448 and
44736kbit/s hierarchical levels
G.7041 Generic framing procedure (GFP)
G.7042 Link capacity adjustment scheme (LCAS)
G.706 Frame alignment and cyclic redundancy check(CRC) procedures

relating to basic frame structures defined in Recommendation G.
704
G.707 Network node interface for the synchronous digital hierarchy

(SDH)
G.709 Interfaces for the Optical Transport Network (OTN)
G.773 Protocol suites for Q-interfaces for management of transmission

systems

G.774 1, G.774 2, G.774 Synchronous Digital Hierarchy (SDH) management information

3, G.774 4, G.774 5 model for the network element view
G.774.6 Synchronous digital hierarchy(SDH) unidirectional performance

monitoring for the network element view
G.774.7 Synchronous digital hierarchy(SDH) management of lower order

path trace and interface labeling for the network element view
G.774.9 Synchronous digital hierarchy(SDH) configuration of linear

multiplex section protection for the network element view
G.774.10 Synchronous digital hierarchy(SDH) configuration of linear

multiplex section protection for the network element view
G.775 Loss of signal (LOS) and alarm indication signal (AIS) defect
detection and clearance criteria
G.7710 Common equipment management function requirements
G.780 Vocabulary of terms for synchronous digital hierarchy(SDH)

networks and equipment
G.781 Synchronization layer functions
G.783 Characteristics of Synchronous Digital Hierarchy (SDH)

equipment functional blocks
G.784 Synchronous Digital Hierarchy (SDH) management
G.801 Digital transmission models
G.803 Architectures of transport networks based on the Synchronous

Digital Hierarchy (SDH)
G.805 Generic functional architecture of transport networks
G.806 Characteristics of transport equipment - Description methodology

and generic functionality
G.808.1 Generic protection switching - Linear trail and subnetwork

protection
G.810 Definitions and terminology for synchronization networks
G.811 Timing characteristics of primary reference clocks
G.812 Timing requirements of slave clocks suitable for use as node

clocks in synchronization networks
G.813 Timing characteristics of SDH equipment slave clocks (SEC)
G.821 Error performance of an international digital connection operating

at a bit rate below the primary rate and forming part of an integrated
services digital network

G.822 Controlled slip rate objectives on an international digital

connection
G.823 The control of jitter and wander within digital networks which are
based on the 2048kbit/s hierarchy
based on the 1544kbit/s hierarchy
based on the Synchronous Digital Hierarchy (SDH)
G.826 Error performance parameters and objectives for international,

constant bit rate digital paths at or above the primary rate
G.828 Error performance parameters and objectives for international,

constant bit rate synchronous digital paths
G.829 Error performance events for SDH multiplex and regenerator

sections
G.831 Management capabilities of transport networks based on the

Synchronous Digital Hierarchy (SDH)
G.841 Types and characteristics of SDH network protection architectures
G.842 Cooperation of the SDH network protection structures
G.957 Optical interfaces of equipments and systems relating to the

synchronous digital hierarchy
G.958 Digital line systems based on the synchronous digital hierarchy

for use on optical fiber cables
I.121 Broadband aspects of ISDN
I.150 B-ISDN asynchronous transfer mode functional characteristics
I.311 B-ISDN general network aspects
I.321 B-ISDN operation and maintenance principles and functions
I.361 B-ISDN ATM layer specification
I.630 ATM protection switching
M.3010 Principles for a telecommunication management network
Q.811 Lower layer protocol profiles for the Q3-interface
Q.812 Upper layer protocol profiles for the Q3-interface
V.24 List of definitions for interchange circuits between data terminal

equipment (DTE) and data circuit-terminating equipment (DCE)
V.35 Data transmission at 48 kilobits per second using 60-108 kHz

group band circuits

V.28 Electrical characteristics for unbalanced double-current

interchange circuits
X.21 Use on public data networks of Data Terminal Equipment (DTE)

which is designed for interfacing to synchronous V-Series
modems
X.85 Link Access Procedure-SDH (LAPS)
X.86 Ethernet over LAPS
13.2 IEEE Standards

Table 13-2 IEEE standards
Standard Description
IEEE 802.17 Resilient packet ring access method and physical layer specifications
IEEE 802.1ad Virtual bridged local area networks — Amendment 4: Provider bridges
IEEE 802.1ag Connectivity fault management
IEEE 802.1d Media access control (MAC) bridges
IEEE 802.1q Virtual bridged local area networks
IEEE 802.1s Multiple Spanning Trees
IEEE 802.1w Rapid Reconfiguration of Spanning Tree
IEEE 802.3 Carrier sense multiple access with collision detection (CSMA/CD)
access method and physical layer specification
IEEE 802.3ad Aggregation of multiple link segments
IEEE 802.3ah Carrier sense multiple access with collision detection (CSMA/CD)
access method and physical layer specifications
IEEE 802.3u Media access control (MAC) parameters, physical layer, medium
attachment units, and repeater for 100 Mb/s operation, type 100Base-
T
IEEE 802.3x Standards for local and metropolitan area networks: specification for
802.3 full duplex operation
IEEE 802.3z Media access control (MAC) parameters, physical Layer, repeater and
management parameters for 1000 Mb/s operation

13.3 IETF Standards

Table 13-3 IETF standards
RFC 2615 (1999) PPP (Point-to-Point Protocol) over SONET/SDH
RFC 1662 (1994) PPP in HDLC-like Framing
RFC 1661 (1994) The Point-to-Point Protocol (PPP)
RFC 1990 The PPP Multilink Protocol (MP)
RFC 2514 Definitions of textual conventions and OBJECT-

IDENTITIES for ATM management
RFC 3031 Multiprotocol Label Switching (MPLS) Architecture
RFC 3032 MPLS Label Stack Encoding
13.4 ANSI Standards

Table 13-4 ANSI related standards
ANSI X3.296 SBCON (ESCON): FICON
ANSI X3.230 Fiber channel - physical and signaling interface (FC-PH)
13.5 Environment Related Standards

Table 13-5 Environment related standards
IEC 60068-2 Basic environmental testing procedures
IEC 60068-3-3 Environmental testing - Part 3: Background information - Subpart

3: Guidance. Seismic test methods for equipments
IEC 60721-2-6 Environmental conditions appearing in nature - Earthquake

vibration
IEC 60721-3-1 Classification of environmental conditions - Part 3: Classification of

groups of environmental parameters and their severities - Section 1:
Storage

IEC 60721-3-3 Classification of environmental conditions - Part 3: Classification of

groups of environmental parameters and their severities - Section 3:
Stationary use at weatherprotected locations
ETS 300 019-1-1 Weatherprotected, not temperature-controlled storage locations
ETS 300 019-1-3 Partly temperature-controlled location
NEBS GR-63-CORE Network equipment-building system (NEBS) requirements:

Physical protection
13.6 EMC Standards

Table 13-6 EMC related standards
IEC 61000-4-2 Electromagnetic compatibility-Part4-2: Testing and measurement

EN 61000-4-2 techniques-Electrostatic discharge immunity test
IEC 61000-4-3 Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC)-Part 4-3: Testing and

EN 61000-4-3 measurement techniques-Radiated, radio-frequency,
electromagnetic field immunity test

EN 61000-4-4 measurement techniques-Electrical fast transient/burst immunity
test

EN 61000-4-5 measurement techniques-Surge immunity test

EN 61000-4-6 measurement techniques-Immunity to conducted disturbances,
induced by radio-frequency fields

EN 61000-4-29 measurement techniques-Voltage dips, shot interruptions and
voltage variations on d.c. input power port immunity tests
CISPR 22/EN 55022 Information technology equipment-Radio disturbance

characteristics-Limits and methods of measurement
CISPR 24/EN 55024 Information technology equipment-immunity charateristics-

Limits and methods of measurement
ETSI EN 300386 Electromagnetic compatibility and radio spectrum matters

(ERM); Telecommunication network equipment;
Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) requirements

ETSI EN 201468 Elecromagnetic compatibility and radio spectrum matters (ERM);

Additional electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) telecommunica-
tions equipment for enhanced availability of service in specific
applications
ETSI EN 300132-2 Power supply interface at the input totelecommunications

equipment; Part 2: Operated by direct current (dc).
13.7 Safety Compliance Standards

Table 13-7 Safety compliance related standards
EN 60950 Information technology equipment - safety
IEC 950 Safety of information technology equipment including electrical

business equipment
CAN/CSA-C22.2 No Audio, video and similar electronic equipment

1-M94
CAN/CSA-C22.2 No Safety of information technology equipment

950-95
73/23/EEC Low voltage directive
UL 60950-1 Safety of information technology equipment
IEC 60529 Degrees of protection provided by enclosures (IP Code)
13.8 Protection Standards

Table 13-8 Protection related standards
IEC 61024-1 Protection of structures against lightning
IEC 61312-1 Protection against lightning electromagnetic impulse part I: general

principles
IEC 61000-4-5 Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC)- Part 4: Testing and

measurement techniques - Section 5: Surge immunity test
ITU-T K.11 Principles of protection against overvoltage and overcurrents
ITU-T K.20 Resistibility of telecommunication switching equipment to

overvoltage and overcurrents

ITU-T K.27 Bonding configurations and earthing inside a telecommunication

building
ITU-T K.41 Resistibility of internal interfaces of telecommunication centres to

surge overvoltage
13.9 ASON Standards

Table 13-9 ASON related standards
G.807 Requirements for automatic switched transport networks (ASTN)
G.8080 Architecture for the automatically switched optical network (ASON)
G.7712 Architecture and specification of data communication network
G.7713 Distributed call and connection management (DCM) based on PNNI
G.7714 Protocol for automatic discovery in SDH and OTN networks
G.7715 ASON routing architecture and requirements for link state protocols
G.7716 Control plane initial establishment, reconfiguration and recovery
G.7717 Connection admission control
G.7718 Framework for ASON management
RFC 3471 Signaling functional description

(GMPLS)

Product Description 14 Basic Principle
14 Basic Principle
About This Chapter
The basic principle includes the SDH basic principle, Ethernet basic principle, and ATM basic
principle.
14.1 Introduction to SDH

This section describes the synchronous digital hierarchy (SDH) levels, multiplexing structures,
frame structures, and overhead bytes.
14.2 Introduction to ATM
This section describes the ATM cell structure and provides an overview of the ATM technology.
14.3 Introduction to Ethernet
This section describes the Ethernet basic principle and frame structure.
14.4 Link Aggregation
This section describes the basic principle of link aggregation and the relevant frame structure.
14.5 Introduction to MPLS
This section describes the MPLS basic principle and frame structure.
14.6 QinQ Principle
This section describes the QinQ basic principle and frame structure.

14 Basic Principle Product Description
14.1 Introduction to SDH

This section describes the synchronous digital hierarchy (SDH) levels, multiplexing structures,
frame structures, and overhead bytes.
14.1.1 SDH Levels

The first level bit rate of SDH is 155520 kbit/s. Signals of higher levels can be generated by
interleaving N signals of the base SDH level (N=4, 16, 64).
14.1.2 Multiplexing Structure
The multiplexing structure of the equipment complies with the requirements specified in the
ITU-T Recommendations.
14.1.3 Basic Frame Structure
The SDH basic frame structure consists of the RSOH, MSOH, POH, AU pointer, and payload.
14.1.4 SOH Description
The SOH bytes include STM-1 SOH bytes, STM-4 SOH bytes, STM-16 SOH bytes, and STM-64
SOH bytes.
14.1.5 Path Overhead (POH) Bytes Description
The POH bytes include the higher order POH bytes and lower order POH bytes.
14.1.1 SDH Levels

The first level bit rate of SDH is 155520 kbit/s. Signals of higher levels can be generated by
interleaving N signals of the base SDH level (N=4, 16, 64).
See Table 14-1.
Table 14-1 SDH levels and the corresponding bit rates
SDH level Bit rate (kbit/s)
STM-1 155520
STM-4 622080
STM-16 2488320
STM-64 9953280
STM-64 (out-of-band FEC) 10664228
14.1.2 Multiplexing Structure

The multiplexing structure of the equipment complies with the requirements specified in the
ITU-T Recommendations.
The multiplexing structure of OptiX OSN products series is shown in Figure 14-1.

Figure 14-1 Multiplexing structure

STM-64 AU-4-64c VC-4-64c C4-64c
×4
×64
STM-16 AU-4-16c VC-4-16c C4-16c
×4 ×16
×16
STM-4 AU-4-4c VC-4-4c C4-4c
×4
STM-1 AUG-1 AU-4 VC-4 C-4
×3
×3 ×1
TUG-3 TU-3 VC-3
Pointer ×7
AU-3 VC-3 C-3
justification
TUG-2
Multiplexing ×3
TU-12 VC-12 C-12
Aligning ×4
TU-11 VC-11 C-11

Mapping
14.1.3 Basic Frame Structure

The SDH basic frame structure consists of the RSOH, MSOH, POH, AU pointer, and payload.
Figure 14-2 shows the STM-N frame structure.
Figure 14-2 STM-N frame structure

270 X N columns (bytes)
9 X N columns (bytes) 261 X N columns (bytes)

Transmission direction
2 Regenerator section overhead

High-order path overhead POH
RSOH
3
4 Administrative unit pointer (s) AU-PTR

ST M - N payload 9 rows
5
P a y l oa d
6
Multiplex section overhead
7
M SOH
8
Frame n-1 Frame n Frame n+1 Information code stream
9 X 270 X N bytes
Frame cycle: 125 sm
T=125 s m
Scrambler: X7 + X 6 +1
14.1.4 SOH Description

The SOH bytes include STM-1 SOH bytes, STM-4 SOH bytes, STM-16 SOH bytes, and STM-64
SOH bytes.
STM-1 SOH
Figure 14-3 shows the structure of STM-1 SOH.

Figure 14-3 STM-1 SOH

9 columns
* *
A1 A1 A1 A2 A2 A2 J0
RSOH
B1 E1 F1
D1 D2 D3 Serial Serial
1 2
AU-PTR
9
rows B2 B2 B2 K1 K2
Serial
D4 D5 D6
4
MSOH
D7 D8 D9
Serial
D10 D11 D12
3
S1 M1 E2
X Bytes reserved for national use

* Unscrambled bytes
Media dependent bytes
Note: All unmarked bytes are reserved for
future international standardization
(for media dependent,additional national use
and other purpose).
STM-4 SOH


36 columns
* * * * * * * * * * *
A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A2 A2 A2 A2 A2 A2 A2 A2 A2 A2 A2 A2 J0 Z0 Z0 Z0
B1 E1 F1 RSOH
D1 D2 D3
9 AU-PTR
rows
B2 B2 B2 B2 B2 B2 B2 B2 B2 B2 B2 B2 K1 K2
D4 D5 D6
MSOH
D7 D8 D9
D10 D11 D12
S1 M1 E2
x Bytes reserved for national use

* Unscrambled bytes
Note: All unmarded bytes are reserved for future international standardization (for media
dependent, additional national use and other purpose).
STM-16 SOH

144 columns
A1 A2 * * * * *
A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A2 A2 A2 A2 A2 J0 Z0
B1 E1 F1
D1 D2 D3
9 AU-PTR
rows
B2 B2 B2 B2 B2 B2 K1 K2
D4 D5 D6
D7 D8 D9
D10 D11 D12
S1 E2
x Bytes reserved for national use M1

* Unscrambled bytes
Note: All unmarded bytes are reserved for future international standardization (for
media dependent, additional national use and other purpose).
STM-64 SOH


576 columns
* * * * *
A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A2 A2 A2 A2 A2 A2 J0 Z0
B1 E1 F1
D1 D2 D3
9 AU-PTR
rows
B2 B2 B2 B2 B2 B2 K1 K2
D4 D5 D6
D7 D8 D9
D10 D11 D12
S1 E2
x Bytes reserved for national use M1

* Unscrambled bytes
Note: All unmarded bytes are reserved for future international standardization
(for media dependent, additional national use and other purpose).
SOH Bytes Description
Table 14-2 SOH bytes description
Byte Description
A1, A2 Framing byte (A1 = F6H, A2 = 28H)
B1 Regenerator section error monitoring BIP-8 byte
B2 Multiplex section error monitoring BIP-24×N byte
D1, D2 and D3 Regenerator section DCC channel byte, 192 kbit/s
D4-D12 Multiplex section DCC channel byte, 576 kbit/s
E1 Regenerator section orderwire byte, 64 kbit/s
E2 Multiplex section orderwire byte, 64 kbit/s
F1 User channel byte (to provide temporary data/voice channel

connections for special maintenance purpose)
H1, H2 Administrative unit pointer byte
H3 Positive or negative justification opportunity byte
J0 Regenerator section trace byte
K1, K2 (b1-b5) Multiplex section automatic protection switching (APS)

channel byte
K2 (b6-b8) Multiplex section remote defect indication (MS-RDI) byte
M1 Multiplex section remote error indication (MS-REI) byte

Byte Description
S1 (b5-b8) Synchronization status byte
Serial 1-4 Broadcast data byte
Others To be determined
14.1.5 Path Overhead (POH) Bytes Description

The POH bytes include the higher order POH bytes and lower order POH bytes.
Higher Order Path Overhead Description
Table 14-3 VC-3/VC-4/VC-4-xc POH bytes description
Byte Description
J1 Path trace byte
B3 Path BIP-8 byte
C2 Signal label byte
G1 Path status byte
F2, F3 Path user channels byte
H4 Position indicator byte
K3 (b1-b4) Automatic protection switching (APS) channel byte
K3 (b5-b8) Spare byte
N1 Network operator byte

NOTE
The VC-4 POH is located in the first column of the 9-row in the 261-column VC-4 structure.
The VC-4-xc POH is located in the first column of the 9-row in the 261 x X-column VC-4-Xc structure
(cascaded by X VC-4s).
Lower Order Path Overhead Description
Table 14-4 VC-12 POH bytes description
Byte Description
V5 V5 byte (error checking, signal label and path status)
J2 Path trace byte
N2 Network operator byte

Byte Description
K4 Automatic protection switching (APS) channel byte
14.2 Introduction to ATM

This section describes the ATM cell structure and provides an overview of the ATM technology.
14.2.1 Introduction to ATM

The OptiX OSN product series can transmit, converge, and forward ATM services.
14.2.2 ATM Cell Structure
An ATM cell is of a fixed length, which is 53 bytes. An ATM cell consists of the cell header
and cell payload.
14.2.1 Introduction to ATM

The OptiX OSN product series can transmit, converge, and forward ATM services.
Definition of ATM
The asynchronous transfer mode (ATM) is a cell-based technology, which consists of the
transmission, multiplexing, and switching technologies. The switching technology of the ATM
combines the advantages of packet switching and circuit switching. The ATM adopts the
statistical multiplexing mode to realize fast packet switching. In this way, the ATM ensures the
bandwidth utilization efficiency, and supports the real-time services of high rates and low rates.
Advantages of ATM
l Sharing and statistic multiplexing of line bandwidth
l Capable of carrying multiple types of services and providing Quality of Service (QoS)
service
l High-speed hardware switching because of fixed cell length
l Mature in technology and high standardization
l Extensive support from the telecommunication field
l Good network interconnection and interworking capability
In the OSN product series, inverse multiplexing over ATM (IMA) technology is used to transmit
ATM services. That is, a high-speed ATM link is transmitted over multiple low-speed physical
links. For example, three E1s are used to transmit one 6 Mbit/s ATM link through IMA
technology.
14.2.2 ATM Cell Structure

An ATM cell is of a fixed length, which is 53 bytes. An ATM cell consists of the cell header
and cell payload.
Figure 14-7 shows the ATM cell structure.

Figure 14-7 ATM cell structure

8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
Header GFC VPI VPI

(5 bytes) VPI VCI VPI VCI
VCI VCI
Payload VCI PT CLP
VCI PT CLP
(48 bytes)
HEC HEC
ATM cell UNI header structure NNI header structure
GFC: general flow control VPI : virtual path identification VCI : virtual channel identification
PT : payload type CLP : cell loss priority HEC : header error control
UNI : user network interface NNI : network node interface
The contents of the ATM cell header at the UNI are slightly different from the contents of the
ATM cell header at the NNI. The difference is that the ATM cell header at the UNI contains
GFC requirements.
14.3 Introduction to Ethernet

This section describes the Ethernet basic principle and frame structure.
14.3.1 Basic Technologies

The equipment supports the transmission of Ethernet services.
14.3.2 Ethernet Frame Structure
The OptiX OSN product series support Ethernet frame structures of three protocol types:
Ethernet_II, 802.3, and Ethernet_SNAP.
14.3.1 Basic Technologies

The equipment supports the transmission of Ethernet services.
Half-Duplex CSMA/CD
According to the initial design objective of Ethernet, the computers and other digital equipment
are connected through a shared physical line. The computers and digital equipment connected
in this way must enter the physical line in the half-duplex mode. In addition, the design must
provide a mechanism to detect and avoid conflict, and to prevent equipment contending for the
line at the same time. This is called CSMA/CD.
A piece of terminal equipment detects the status of the shared line continuously and transmits
data only in the idle status. Otherwise, it waits until the line is idle. At this time, if another piece
of equipment transmits data, the data sent by the two inevitably conflicts, making the signal on
the line unstable. After detecting the conflict, the terminal equipment stops transmitting the data
quickly and then sends a succession of interfering pulse. After waiting for a period of time, it
sends the data again.

The purpose of sending the interfering pulse is to notify the other equipment, that is, the
equipment that sends the data at the same time, that a conflict occurs on the line. The waiting
time after detection of conflict is random but gradually increases.
Full-Duplex Ethernet and Ethernet Switch

In 1990, the appearance of the 10BAST-T Ethernet based on the twisted pair cable is the most
important event in the history of Ethernet. Using twisted pair cable as the transmission medium
of Ethernet not only increases the flexibility, but also introduces the full duplex mode, which is
an efficient operation mode.
In the full-duplex mode, the data is transmitted and received simultaneously. The traditional
network equipment hub does not support full-duplex, because inside the hub is a bus, over which
data is transmitted and received, therefore there is no way for full-duplex communication. To
achieve full-duplex, a new type of equipment namely the switch must be introduced.
The switch and the hub are the same in appearance. They both have multiple ports, each of which
connects to the terminal equipment and other multiple-port equipment. Instead of a shared bus,
there is a digital cross-connect network inside the switch, which temporarily connects every
terminal, enabling the terminals to transmit data independently. In addition, the switch sets a
buffer area for each port, storing the data transmitted from terminals temporarily, and performs
switching after idle resources are available. It is the appearance of the switch that changes the
original 10/100 Mbit/s shared structure to 20/200 Mbit/s exclusive structure, greatly enhancing
the transmission efficiency. In addition, certain software can be added to the switch to implement
additional services, such as VLAN, priority, redundant link.
Auto Negotiation
In actual situations, Ethernet can transmit data in the full duplex mode or half duplex mode at
the rate of 10 Mbit/s, or 100 Mbit/s, through type 5 twisted pair cable or type 3 twisted pair. If
each terminal equipment is configured manually, it will be difficult to maintain the equipment.
Auto negotiation provides a solution for addressing this problem.
Through auto negotiation, the equipment at both ends of a physical link selects a transmission
mode automatically by exchanging information. Auto negotiation is based on the Ethernet
connected by using a twisted pair cable, which is only effective for such an Ethernet. The contents
of auto negotiation include the duplex mode, bit rate, flow control. If the negotiation passes, the
equipment at both ends of the link works in the mode negotiated.
14.3.2 Ethernet Frame Structure

The OptiX OSN product series support Ethernet frame structures of three protocol types:
Ethernet_II, 802.3, and Ethernet_SNAP.
Figure 14-8 shows the Ethernet frame structure of OSN product series.

Figure 14-8 Ethernet frame structure

Unit: byte
6 6 2 46- 1500 4
Destination
Source MAC Protocol type Data FCS
MAC
Ethernet_II
6 6 2 1 1 1 43-1497 4
Destination Protocol
Source MAC DSAP SSAP CTL Data FCS
MAC length
802.3
6 6 2 1 1 1 3 2 38-1492 4
Destination Protocol
Source MAC 0xAA 0xAA CTL OC Protocol type Data FCS
MAC length
Ethernet_SNAP
14.4 Link Aggregation

This section describes the basic principle of link aggregation and the relevant frame structure.
14.4.1 Concepts
Link aggregation means bundling multiple physical links that are connected to one piece of
equipment. The aggregated links are considered as one link.
14.4.2 Characteristics
Link aggregation includes manual aggregation, static aggregation, and dynamic aggregation.
14.4.1 Concepts
Link aggregation means bundling multiple physical links that are connected to one piece of
equipment. The aggregated links are considered as one link.
As shown in Figure 14-9.
Figure 14-9 Schematic diagram of link aggregation
traffic

14.4.2 Characteristics
Link aggregation includes manual aggregation, static aggregation, and dynamic aggregation.
Enhancing Link Availability

In link aggregation, links back up each other dynamically. When a link breaks, the other links
can quickly provide a backup. The switching process takes place within the aggregation. It is
unrelated with other links.
Increasing Link Capacity

The aggregation technology can improve the link transmission capability economically. Without
upgrading the existing equipment, the user can obtain a data link of larger bandwidth, which is
equal to the capacity of a number of physical links. The aggregation module allocates the traffic
to different members according to a certain algorithm to realize load balancing at link level.
Aggregation Types
There are three aggregation types: manual aggregation, static aggregation, and dynamic
aggregation.
l Manual aggregation
The aggregation is manually configured, and the port does not run the link aggregation control
protocol (LACP).
l Static aggregation
The aggregation is manually configured, and the port runs the LACP.
l Dynamic aggregation
The LACP based on IEEE 802.3ad is used.
14.5 Introduction to MPLS

This section describes the MPLS basic principle and frame structure.
14.5.1 Overview
MPLS is short for multi-protocol label switching.
14.5.2 Encapsulation Format
The MPLS label is usually added between Layer 2 headers and Layer 3 headers. The OptiX OSN
equipment supports MPLS encapsulation formats such as MartinioE and MatinioP.
14.5.1 Overview
MPLS is short for multi-protocol label switching.
MPLS is a standard routing and switching technology platform that supports various upper layer
protocols and services
The MPLS architecture consists of the following:

l Control plane, which is connectionless and implemented with the current IP network.
l Forwarding plane, also called data plane, is connection-oriented, and takes advantage of
the Layer 2 network such as ATM and frame relay.
MPLS uses a short label of fixed length to encapsulate packets, and implements fast forwarding
on the data plane. MPLS uses powerful, flexible routing functions of the IP network on the
control plane to address various new applications.
MPLS is originated from the Internet Protocol version 4 (IPv4), and its core technology can be
extended to multiple network protocols, including the Internet Protocol version 6 (IPv6), Internet
Packet Exchange (IPX), Appletalk, DECnet, Connectionless Network Protocol (CLNP).
"Multiprotocol" in the MPLS denotes supporting multiple network protocols.
OSN product series support the use of MPLS on IPv4, IPv6 and IPX.
14.5.2 Encapsulation Format

The MPLS label is usually added between Layer 2 headers and Layer 3 headers. The OptiX OSN
equipment supports MPLS encapsulation formats such as MartinioE and MatinioP.
Figure 14-10 shows the two encapsulation formats. The encapsulation content is marked in grey.
Figure 14-10 MPLS encapsulation format

Unit : byte
MartinioE encapsulation format
DA SA 0x8847 (0x8848 broadcast)
0x8847(0x8848 Tunnel VC Ethernet data
A A
66 66 2 2 4 4 4 4 N
MartinioP encapsulation format

0x8847 (0x8848 broadcast))
0x8847(0x8848 Tunnel
Tunnel VC
VC Ethernet data
2 4 4 4 4 N
The meanings of the bytes in Figure 14-10 are shown in Table 14-5.
Table 14-5 The meanings of the bytes in the MPLS encapsulation format
Name Meaning
DA Destination address
SA Source address
Tunnel Tunnel label
VC Virtual channel
0x8847 MPLS Martini encapsulation format
0x8848 Broadcast frame

14.6 QinQ Principle

This section describes the QinQ basic principle and frame structure.
14.6.1 Introduction to QinQ

The QinQ is a VLAN stack embedding technology, which complies with the S-VLAN
requirements in IEEE 802.1ad. The QinQ technology supplements the VLAN technology that
complies with IEEE 802.1q.
14.6.2 QinQ Data Frame Structure
The QinQ data frame involves the types of VLAN labels, which include S-VLAN labels and C-
VLAN labels.
14.6.1 Introduction to QinQ

The QinQ is a VLAN stack embedding technology, which complies with the S-VLAN
requirements in IEEE 802.1ad. The QinQ technology supplements the VLAN technology that
complies with IEEE 802.1q.
The advantages of QinQ technology are as follows:
l Expands VLAN and alleviates VLAN resource insufficiency. For example, a VLAN
providing 4096 VLAN IDs can provide 4096×4096 VLANs after VLAN stacking.
l Extends LAN service to WAN, connecting the client network to the carrier network and
supporting transparent transmission.
14.6.2 QinQ Data Frame Structure

The QinQ data frame involves the types of VLAN labels, which include S-VLAN labels and C-
VLAN labels.
VLAN Label Types

IEEE 802.1ad defines two VLAN label types, as shown in Figure 14-11.
l Customer VLAN label, defined as C-VLAN.

l Server layer VLAN label, defined as S-VLAN.
Figure 14-11 QinQ data frame structure

6 Bytes 6 Bytes 4 Bytes 4 Bytes 2 Bytes 4 Bytes
Destination Source
S-VLAN label C-VLAN label Length/type Data FCS
MAC MAC
The maximum length of the frame is determined by the port attribute settings of the equipment.

Structure of S-VLAN and C-VLAN

The 4-byte S-VLAN and C-VLAN labels can be further divided into two parts: TPID and TCI,
each of which has two bytes.
l TPID
TPID indicates the type of the VLAN label. The TPID of C-VLAN is fixed to 0X8100 and that
of S-VLAN is configurable, as shown in Table 14-6.
Table 14-6 TPID settings
Tag type Name ID
C-VLAN TAG 802.1Q Tag Protocol Type (802.1Q TagType) 0X8100
S-VLAN TAG 802.1Q Service Tag Type (802.1Q S Tag Type) Configurabl
e
C-VLAN tag (C-TAG) is used to identify the customer VLAN and is used on the VLAN Bridge
and PEB equipment.
S-VLAN tag (S-TAG) is used to identify the server VLAN and is used on the PB and PEB
equipment.
l TCI
The TCI structure of S-TAG is basically the same as that of C-TAG, as shown in Figure
14-12 and Figure 14-13. VLAN ID (VID) is still 12 bits, ranging from 0 to 4095. The difference
is that S-TAG introduces the concept of Drop Eligible (DE). Priority code point (PCP), used
with DE, indicates the priority of the S-TAG frame.
Figure 14-12 C-TAG TCI structure

Octets 1 2
:
PCP CFI VID
Bits
8 6 5 4 1 8 1
:
Figure 14-13 S-TAG TCI structure

Octets 1 2
:
PCP DE VID
Bits
8 6 5 4 1 8 1
:

Product Description A Glossary
A Glossary
Terms and abbreviations are listed in an alphabetical order.

A.1 Numerics
A.2 A
A.3 B
A.4 C
A.5 D
A.6 E
A.7 F
A.8 G
A.9 H
A.10 I
A.11 J
A.12 L
A.13 M
A.14 N
A.15 O
A.16 P
A.17 Q
A.18 R
A.19 S
A.20 T
A.21 U
A.22 V
A.23 W
Issue 07 (2010-11-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential A-1

A Glossary Product Description
A-2 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 07 (2010-11-30)

A.1 Numerics
1+1 protection An architecture that has one normal traffic signal, one working SNC/trail, one protection
SNC/trail and a permanent bridge. At the source end, the normal traffic signal is
permanently bridged to both the working and protection SNC/trail. At the sink end, the
normal traffic signal is selected from the better of the two SNCs/trails. Due to the
permanent bridging, the 1+1 architecture does not allow an extra unprotected traffic
signal to be provided.
100BASE-T IEEE 802.3 Physical Layer specification for a 100 Mb/s CSMA/CD local area network.
100BASE-TX IEEE 802.3 Physical Layer specification for a 100 Mb/s CSMA/CD local area network
over two pairs of Category 5 unshielded twisted-pair (UTP) or shielded twisted-pair
(STP) wire.
10BASE-T Defined in IEEE 802.3, it is an Ethernet specification that uses the twist pair with the
maximum length of 100 meters at 10 Mbit/s for each network segment.
1:N protection A 1:N protection architecture has N normal service signals, N working SNCs/trails and
one protection SNC/trail. It may have one extra service signal.
1PPS Pulse per second, which, strictly speaking, is not a time synchronization signal. This is
because 1PPS provides only the "gauge" corresponding to the UTC second, but does not
provide the information about the day, month, or year. Therefore, 1PPS is used as the
reference for frequency synchronization. On certain occasions, 1PPS can also be used
on other interfaces for high precision timing.
3R Reshaping, Retiming, Regenerating.
A.2 A
ABR Available Bit Rate
AC Alternating Current
ACAP The Adjacent Channel Alternate Polarization (ACAP) operation provides orthogonal
polarizations between two adjacent communication channels.
Active/Standby If there are two cross-connect boards on the SDH equipment, which are in hot back-up
switching of cross- relation of each other, the operation reliability is improved. When both the cross-connect
connect board boards are in position, the one inserted first is in the working status. Unplug the active
board, the standby one will run in the working status automatically. When the active
cross-connect board fails in self-test, the board is pulled out, the board power supply
fails or the board hardware operation fails, the standby cross-connect board can
automatically take the place of the active one.
add/drop multiplexer A network element that adds/drops the PDH signal or STM-x (x < N) signal to/from the
STM-N signal on the SDH transport network.
ADM See add/drop multiplexer
ADM See optical add/drop multiplexing

Administrative Unit The information structure which provides adaptation between the higher order path layer
and the multiplex section layer. It consists of an information payload (the higher order
VC) and a AU pointer which indicates the offset of the payload frame start relative to
the multiplex section frame start.
Administrative Unit One or more Administrative Units occupying fixed, defined positions in an STM payload
Group are termed an Administrative Unit Group (AUG).An AUG-1 consists of a homogeneous
assembly of AU-3s or an AU-4.
Administrator A user who has authority to access all the Management Domains of the EMLCore
product. He has access to the whole network and to all the management functionalities.
aging time N/A
AIS Alarm Indication Signal
Alarm A means of alerting the operator that specified abnormal condition exists.
Alarm automatic When an alarm is generated on the device side, the alarm is reported to the N2000. Then,
report an alarm panel prompts and the user can view the details of the alarm.
alarm cable The cable for generation of visual or audio alarms.
alarm filtering The alarms are reported to the N2000 BMS, which decides whether to display and save
the alarms according to the filtering states of the alarms. The filtered alarms are not
displayed and saved on the N2000 BMS, but still monitored.
alarm indication On the cabinet of an NE, there are four indicators in different colors indicating the current
status of the NE. When the green indicator is on, it indicates that the NE is powered on.
When the red indicator is on, it indicates that a critical alarm is generated. When the
orange indicator is on, it indicates that a major alarm is generated. When the yellow
indicator is on, it indicates that a minor alarm is generated. The ALM alarm indicator on
the front panel of a board indicates the current status of the board. (Metro)
Alarm indication signal A code sent downstream in a digital network as an indication that an upstream failure
has been detected. It is associated with multiple transport layers.
Alarm inversion For the port that has already been configured but has no service, this function can be
used to avoid generating relevant alarm information, thus preventing alarm interference.
The alarm report condition of the NE port is related to the alarm inverse mode (not
inverse, automatic recovery and manual recovery) setting of the NE and the alarm
inversion status (Enable and Disable) setting of the port. When the alarm inversion mode
of NE is set to no inversion, alarms of the port will be reported as usual no matter whatever
the inversion status of the port is. When the alarm inversion mode of the NE is set to
automatic recovery, and the alarm inversion state of the port is set to Enabled, then the
alarm of the port will be suppressed. The alarm inversion status of the port will
automatically recover to "not inverse" after the alarm ends. For the port that has already
been configured but not actually loaded with services, this function can be used to avoid
generating relevant alarm information, thus preventing alarm interference. When the
alarm inverse mode of the NE is set as "not automatic recovery", if the alarm inversion
status of the port is set as Enable, the alarm of the port will be reported.
Alarm Masking Alarms are detected and reported to the N2000 UMS, and whether the alarm information
is displayed and stored is decided by the function of alarm masking. These alarms masked
are not displayed and stored on the N2000 UMS.
Alarm Severity Alarm severity is used to identify the impact of a fault on services. According to ITU-T
recommendations, the alarm is classified into four severities: Critical, Major, Minor,
Warning.

Alarm suppression When alarms of various levels occur at the same time, certain lower-level alarms are
suppressed by higher-level alarms, and thus will not be reported.
ALS See Automatic laser shutdown
APS See Automatic Protection Switching
asynchronous Pertaining to, being, or characteristic of something that is not dependent on timing.
Asynchronous A data transfer technology based on cell, in which packets allocation relies on channel
Transfer Mode demand. It supports fast packet switching to achieve efficient utilization of network
resources. The size of a cell is 53 bytes, which consist of 48-byte payload and 5-byte
header.
ATM See Asynchronous Transfer Mode
ATPC See Automatic Transmit Power Control
attenuation Reduction of signal magnitude or signal loss, usually expressed in decibels.
AU See Administrative Unit
AUG See Administrative Unit Group
auto-negotiation A mechanism that enables devices to negotiate the SPEED and MODE (duplex or half-
duplex) of an Ethernet Link.
Automatic laser A function that enables the shutdown of the laser when the optical interface board does
shutdown not carry services or the fiber is faulty. The automatic laser shutdown (ALS) function
shortens the working time of the laser and thus extends the service life of the laser. In
addition, the ALS prevents human injury caused by the laser beam.
Automatic Protection Automatic Protection Switching (APS) is the capability of a transmission system to
Switching detect a failure on a working facility and to switch to a standby facility to recover the
traffic.
Automatic Transmit A method of automatically adjusting the transmit power at the opposite end based on the
Power Control transmit signal detected at the receiver.
A.3 B
backplane A backplane is an electronic circuit board containing circuitry and sockets into which
additional electronic devices on other circuit boards or cards can be plugged; in a
computer, generally synonymous with or part of the motherboard.
backup A periodic operation performed on the data stored in the database for the purposes of
database recovery in case that the database is faulty. The backup also refers to data
synchronization between active and standby boards.
bandwidth A range of transmission frequencies that a transmission line or channel can carry in a
network. In fact, it is the difference between the highest and lowest frequencies the
transmission line or channel. The greater the bandwidth, the faster the data transfer rate.
BDI Backward Defect Indicator
BER See Bit Error Rate
Binding strap A component installed on two sides of the cabinet for binding various cables.
binding strap The binding strap is 12.7 mm wide, with one hook side (made of transparent
polypropylene material) and one mat side (made of black nylon material).

BIP BIP-X code is defined as a method of error monitoring. With even parity an X-bit code
is generated by the transmitting equipment over a specified portion of the signal in such
a manner that the first bit of the code provides even parity over the first bit of all X-bit
sequences in the covered portion of the signal, the second bit provides even parity over
the second bit of all X-bit sequences within the specified portion, etc. Even parity is
generated by setting the BIP-X bits so that there is an even number of 1s in each monitored
partition of the signal. A monitored partition comprises all bits which are in the same bit
position within the X-bit sequences in the covered portion of the signal. The covered
portion includes the BIP-X.
bit error An error that occurs in some bits in the digital code stream after being received, judged,
and regenerated, thus damaging the quality of the transmitted information
Bit Error Rate Bit error rate. Ratio of received bits that contain errors. BER is an important index used
to measure the communications quality of a network.
BITS See Building Integrated Timing Supply
bound path Binding several seriel paths into a parallel path, thus improving the data throughput
capacity.
BPDU Bridge Protocol Data Unit
bridge A device that connects two or more networks and forwards packets among them. Bridges
operate at the physical network level. Bridges differs from repeaters because bridges
store and forward complete packets, while repeaters forward all electrical signals.
Bridges differ from routers because bridges use physical addresses, while routers use IP
addresses.
broadcast The process of sending packets from a source to multiple destinations. All the ports of
the nodes in the network can receive packets.
Broadcast A means of delivering information to all members in a network. The broadcast range is
determined by the broadcast address.
BSC Base Station Controller
BSS Base Station Subsystem
Build-in WDM A function which integrates some simple WDM systems into products that belong to the
OSN series . That is, the OSN products can add or drop several wavelengths directly.
Building Integrated A building timing supply that minimizes the number of synchronization links entering
Timing Supply an office. Sometimes referred to as a synchronization supply unit.
BWS Backbone WDM System
A.4 C
cabling The method by which a group of insulated conductors is mechanically assembled or
twisted together.
cabling aperture A hole which is used for cable routing in the cabinet.
Cabling frame The frame which is used for cable routing over the cabinet.
cabling trough The trough which is used for cable routing in the cabinet.

captive nut Captive nuts (or as they are more correctly named, 'tee nuts') have a range of uses but
are more commonly used in the hobby for engine fixing (securing engine mounts to the
firewall), wing fixings, and undercarriage fixing.
CAR See committed access rate
CAS Channel Associated Signaling
CBR See Constant Bit Rate
CBS Committed Burst Size
CCDP Co-Channel Dual Polarization
CCM Continuity Check Message
CDR Clock and Data Recovery
CDVT See Cell Delay Variation Tolerance
Cell Delay Variation This parameter measures the tolerance level a network interface has to aggressive
Tolerance sending (back-to-back or very closely spaced cells) by a connected device, and does not
apply to end-systems.
Centralized alarm The system that gathers all the information about alarms into a certain terminal console.
system
CFM Connectivity Fault Management
Chain network One type of network that all network nodes are connected one after one to be in series.
channel A telecommunication path of a specific capacity and/or at a specific speed between two
or more locations in a network. The channel can be established through wire, radio
(microwave), fiber or a combination of the three.The amount of information transmitted
per second in a channel is the information transmission speed, expressed in bits per
second. For example, b/s (100 bit/s), kb/s (103 bit/s), Mb/s (106 bit/s), Gb/s (109 bit/s),
and Tb/s (1012 bit/s).
CIR Committed Information Rate
Circuit The circuit of the service port on the access device.
CIST Common and Internal Spanning Tree
class of service Class of service (CoS) is a technology or method used to classify services into different
categories according to the service quality.
Class of Service Class of Service is abbreviated to CoS. CoS is a rule for queuing. It classifies the packets
according to the service type field or the tag in packets, and specifies different priorities
for them. All the nodes in DiffServ domain forwards the packets according to their
priorities.
client A device that sends requests, receives responses, and obtains services from the server.
Clock Synchronization Also called frequency synchronization, clock synchronization means that the signal
frequency traces the reference frequency, but the start point need not be consistent.
Clock tracing The method to keep the time on each node being synchronized with a clock source in a
network.
CLP Cell Loss Priority
CM See Configuration Management

committed access rate A traffic control method that uses a set of rate limits to be applied to a router interface.
CAR is a configurable method by which incoming and outgoing packets can be classified
into QoS (Quality of Service) groups, and by which the input or output transmission rate
can be defined.
Concatenation A process that combines multiple virtual containers. The combined capacities can be
used a single capacity. The concatenation also keeps the integrity of bit sequence.
Configuration Data A command file for an NE which defines the configuration of the NE hardware. With
the file, the NE can coordinate with other NEs in the entire network. Configuration data
is the key factor for the normal running of the entire network.
Configuration In a network, a system for gathering current configuration information from all nodes in
Management a LAN.
Configure To set the basic parameters of an operation object.
congestion An extra intra-network or inter-network traffic resulting in decreasing network service
efficiency.
Connection point A reference point where the output of a trail termination source or a connection is bound
to the input of another connection, or where the output of a connection is bound to the
input of a trail termination sink or another connection. The connection point is
characterized by the information which passes across it. A bidirectional connection point
is formed by the association of a contradirectional pair.
Constant Bit Rate constant bit rate. A kind of service categories defined by the ATM forum. CBR transfers
cells based on the constant bandwidth. It is applicable to service connections that depend
on precise clocking to ensure undistorted transmission.
convergence It refers to the speed and capability for a group of networking devices to run a specific
routing protocol. It functions to keep the network topology consistent.
Convergence A process in which multiple channels of low-rate signals are multiplexed into one or
several channels of required signals.
Convergence service A service that provides enhancements to an underlying service in order to provide for
the specific requirements of the convergence service user.
Conversion In the context of message handling, a transmittal event in which an MTA transforms
parts of a message content from one encoded information type to another, or alters a
probe so it appears that the described messages were so modified.
corrugated tube N/A
CoS See class of service
CoS See Class of Service
CPU Central Processing Unit
CRC See Cyclic Redundancy Check
current alarm An alarm in unrecovered and unacknowledged state, unrecovered and acknowledged
state, or recovered and unacknowledged state. Treatment measures must be taken on
these alarms.
Current Performance Performance data stored in the current register. An NE provides two types registers for
Data each performance parameter of the performance monitoring entity. The registers are 15-
minute register and 24-hour register, which are used to accumulate the performance data
within the current monitoring period.

Cyclic Redundancy A procedure used in checking for errors in data transmission. CRC error checking uses
Check a complex calculation to generate a number based on the data transmitted. The sending
device performs the calculation before transmission and includes it in the packet that it
sends to the receiving device. The receiving device repeats the same calculation after
transmission. If both devices obtain the same result, it is assumed that the transmission
was error free. The procedure is known as a redundancy check because each transmission
includes not only data but extra (redundant) error-checking values. Communications
protocols such as XMODEM and Kermit use cyclical redundancy checking.
A.5 D
DC Direct Current
DCC Data Communication Channel
DCD Data Carrier Detect
DCE Data Circuit-terminal Equipment
DCN Data Communication Network
DDF See Digital Distribution Frame
DDN Digital Data Network
Defect A limited interruption in the ability of an item to perform a required function.
demultiplexing To separate from a common input into several outputs. Demultiplexing occurs at many
levels. Hardware demultiplexes signals from a transmission line based on time or carrier
frequency to allow multiple, simultaneous transmissions across a single physical cable.
Device set It is an aggregate of multiple managed equipments. Device set facilitates the authority
management on devices in the management domain of the U2000. If some operation
authorities over one device set are assigned to a user (user group), these operation
authorities over all devices of the device set are assigned to the user (user group), thus
eliminating the need to set the operation authorities over these devices respectively. It is
suggested to design device set according to such criteria as geographical region, network
level, device type, etc.
differentiated services Values for a 6-bit field defined for the IPv4 and IPv6 packet headers that enhance class
code point of service (CoS) distinctions in routers.
Differentiated Services Differentiated Services CodePoint. A marker in the header of each IP packet using bits
Code Point 0-6 in the DS field. Routers provide differentiated classes of services to various service
streams/flows based on this marker. In other words, routers select corresponding PHB
according to the DSCP value.
DiffServ Differentiated Services
Digital Distribution Digital Distribution Frame. A frame which is used to transfer cables.
Frame

digital signal A signal in which information is represented by a limited number of discrete states—for
example, high and low voltages—rather than by fluctuating levels in a continuous stream,
as in an analog signal. In the pulse code modulation (PCM) technology, the 8 kHz
sampling frequency is used and a byte contains 8 bits in length. Therefore, a digital signal
is also referred to as a byte-based code stream. Digital signals, with simple structures
and broad bandwidth, are easy to shape or regenerate, and are not easily affected by
external interference.
Distributed Link The distributed link aggregation group (DLAG) is a board-level port protection
Aggregation Group technology used to detect unidirectional fiber cuts and to negotiate with the opposite end.
In the case of a link down failure on a port or a hardware failure on a board, the services
can automatically be switched to the slave board, thus realizing 1+1 protection for the
inter-board ports.
DLAG See Distributed Link Aggregation Group
DNI See Dual Node Interconnection
domain A logical subscriber group based on which the subscriber rights are controlled.
DQDB Distributed Queue Dual Bus
DSCP See differentiated services code point
DSCP See Differentiated Services Code Point
DSL Digital Subscriber Line
DSLAM Digital Subscriber Line Access Multiplexer
DSR Data Set Ready
DTE Data Terminal Equipments
DTR Data Terminal Ready
Dual Node DNI provides an alternative physical interconnection point, between the rings, in case
Interconnection of an interconnection failure scenario.
DVB-ASI Digital Video Broadcast- Asynchronous Serial Interface
DVMRP Distance Vector Multicast Routing Protocol
DWDM Dense Wavelength Division Multiplexing
A.6 E
E-AGGR Ethernet-Aggregation
E-LAN Ethernet LAN
E-LAN A L2VPN service type that is provided for the user Ethernet in different domains over
the PSN network. For the user Ethernet, the entire PSN network serves as a Layer 2
switch.
E-Line Ethernet line. An point-to-point private service type that is provided for the user Ethernet
in different domains.
Ear bracket A component on the side of the subrack. It is used to install the subrack into a cabinet.
ECC See Embedded Control Channel

EFM Ethernet in the First Mile

ElectroStatic Discharge A sudden flow of electric current through a material that is normally an insulator.
Embedded Control An ECC provides a logical operations channel between SDH NEs, utilizing a data
Channel communications channel (DCC) as its physical layer.
EMS Element Management System
encapsulation The technique used by layered protocols to add header information and possibly tail
information to the protocol data unit.
Enterprise System A path protocol which connects the host with various control units in a storage system.
Connection It is a serial bit stream transmission protocol. The transmission rate is 200 Mbit/s.
Entity A part, device, subsystem, functional unit, equipment or system that can be individually
considered. For ETH-OAM, an OAM entity generally refers to a specified system or
subsystem that supports the OAM protocol. For example, a Huawei Ethernet service
processing board is an OAM entity.
EoD Ethernet Over Dual Domains
EPL See Ethernet Private Line
EPLAN Ethernet Private LAN Service
ESCON See Enterprise System Connection
ESD See ElectroStatic Discharge
ESD jack Electrostatic discharge jack. A hole in the cabinet or shelf, which connect the shelf or
cabinet to the insertion of ESD wrist strap.
Ethernet A technology complemented in LAN. It adopts Carrier Sense Multiple Access/Collision
Detection. The speed of an Ethernet interface can be 10 Mbit/s, 100 Mbit/s, 1000 Mbit/
s or 10000 Mbit/s. The Ethernet network features high reliability and easy maintaining..
Ethernet Alarm Group The Ethernet alarm group periodically obtain the statistics value to compare with the
configured threshold. If the value exceeds the threshold, an event is reported.
Ethernet Private LAN Both a LAN service and a private service. Transport bandwidth is never shared between
different customers.
Ethernet Private Line A point-to-point interconnection between two UNIs without SDH bandwidth sharing.
Transport bandwidth is never shared between different customers.
ethernet virtual private An Ethernet service type, which carries Ethernet characteristic information over shared
line service bandwidth, point-to-point connections, provided by SDH, PDH, ATM, or MPLS server
layer networks.
ETSI European Telecommunications Standards Institute
EVPL See ethernet virtual private line service
Exercise Switching An operation to check if the protection switching protocol functions normally. The
protection switching is not really performed.
Exerciser - Ring This command exercises ring protection switching of the requested channel without
completing the actual bridge and switch. The command is issued and the responses are
checked, but no working traffic is affected.
Extended ID The number of the subnet that an NE belongs to, for identifying different network
segments in a WAN. The extended ID and ID form the physical ID of the NE.

extra traffic The traffic that is carried over the protection channels when that capacity is not used for
the protection of working traffic. Extra traffic is not protected.
A.7 F
Failure If the fault persists long enough to consider the ability of an item with a required function
to be terminated. The item may be considered as having failed; a fault has now been
detected.
Fairness For any link specified in a ring network, if the data packets transmitted by the source
node are constrained by the fairness algorithm, the source node is provided with certain
bandwidth capacities. This feature of RPR is called fairness.
fairness algorithm An algorithm designed to ensure the fair sharing of bandwidth among stations in the case
of congestion or overloading.
fault An accidental condition that causes a functinal unit to fail to perform its required
function.
FC Fiber Channel
FD See frequency diversity
FDDI See fiber distributed data interface
FDI Forward Defect Indicator
FE Fast Ethernet
feature code Code(s) used to select/activate a service feature (e.g. forwarding, using two or three digit
codes preceded by * or 11 or #, and which may precede subsequent digit selection).
FEC See forwarding equivalence class
FEC See Forward Error Correction
fiber A kind of fiber used for connections between the subrack and the ODF, and for
connections between subracks or inside a subrack.
Fiber Connect. A new generation connection protocol which connects the host with various control units.
It carries single byte command protocol through the physical path of fiber channel, and
provides higher rate and better performance than ESCON.
Fiber Connector A device installed at the end of a fiber, optical source or receive unit. It is used to couple
the optical wave to the fiber when connected to another device of the same type. A
connector can either connect two fiber ends or connect a fiber end and a optical source
(or a detector).
fiber distributed data A standard developed by the American National Standards Institute (ANSI) for high-
interface speed fiber-optic local area networks (LANs). FDDI provides specifications for
transmission rates of 100 megabits (100 million bits) per second on networks based on
the token ring network.

fiber/cable Fiber & Cable is the general name of optical fiber and cable. It refers to the physical
entities that connect the transmission equipment, carry transmission objects (user
information and network management information) and perform transmission function
in the transmission network. The optical fiber transmits optical signal, while the cable
transmits electrical signal. The fiber/cable between NEs represents the optical fiber
connection or cable connection between NEs. The fiber/cable between SDH NEs
represents the connection relation between NEs. At this time, the fiber/cable is of optical
fiber type.
FICON See Fiber Connect
FIFO First In First Out
Flow An aggregation of packets that have the same characteristics. On the T2000 or NE
software, flow is a group of classification rules. On boards, it is a group of packets that
have the same quality of service (QoS) operation. At present, two flows are supported:
port flow and port+VLAN flow. Port flow is based on port ID and port+VLAN flow is
based on port ID and VLAN ID. The two flows cannot coexist in the same port.
Forced switch This function forces the service to switch from the working channel to the protection
channel, with the service not to be restored automatically. This switch occurs regardless
of the state of the protection channels or boards, unless the protection channels or boards
are satisfying a higher priority bridge request.
Forward Error A bit error correction technology that adds the correction information to the payload at
Correction the transmit end. Based on the correction information, the bit errors generated during
transmission are corrected at the receive end.
forwarding equivalence A term used in Multiprotocol Label Switching (MPLS) to describe a set of packets with
class similar or identical characteristics which may be forwarded the same way; that is, they
may be bound to the same MPLS label.
FPGA Field Programmable Gate Array
frame A frame, starting with a header, is a string of bytes with a specified length. Frame length
is represented by the sampling circle or the total number of bytes sampled during a circle.
A header comprises one or a number of bytes with pre-specified values. In other words,
a header is a code segment that reflects the distribution (diagram) of the elements pre-
specified by the sending and receiving parties.
Free-run mode An operating condition of a clock, the output signal of which is strongly influenced by
the oscillating element and not controlled by servo phase-locking techniques. In this
mode the clock has never had a network reference input, or the clock has lost external
reference and has no access to stored data, that could be acquired from a previously
connected external reference. Free-run begins when the clock output no longer reflects
the influence of a connected external reference, or transition from it. Free-run terminates
when the clock output has achieved lock to an external reference.
frequency diversity A diversity scheme that enables two or more microwave frequencies with a certain
frequency interval are used to transmit/receive the same signal and selection is then
performed between the two signals to ease the impact of fading.
FTP File Transfer Protocol
Full duplex The system that can transmit information in both directions on a communication link.On
the communication link, both parties can send and receive data at the same time.

A.8 G
Gain The ratio between the optical power from the input optical interface of the optical
amplifier and the optical power from the output optical interface of the jumper fiber,
which expressed in dB.
Gateway IP When an NE accesses a remote network management system or NE, a router can be used
to enable the TCP/IP communication. In this case, the IP address of the router is the
gateway IP. Only the gateway NE requires the IP address. The IP address itself cannot
identify the uniqueness of an NE. The same IP addresses may exist in different TCP/IP
networks. An NE may have multiple IP addresses, for example, one IP address of the
network and one IP address of the Ethernet port.
Gateway Network Gateway NE refers to the NE that communicates with the NMS via Ethernet or serial
Element port line. The non-gateway NE communicates with the gateway NE via ECC and
communicates with the NMS via the gateway NE. The gateway NE is a communication
route that the U2000 must pass through when managing the entire network. The
communication status between the gateway NE and the U2000 can be:(1) Normal: The
current communication is efficient; (2) Connecting: The destination gateway responds,
and the communication is interrupted but is being connected; (3) Disconnected: The
destination gateway does not respond (Maybe the network cable is disconnected or not
within the same network segment), and the communication is unreachable or the gateway
is disabled manually.
GE Gigabit Ethernet
GFP Generic Framing Procedure
GFP GFP is a framing and encapsulated method which can be applied to any data type. It has
been standardized by ITU-T SG15.
GNE See Gateway Network Element
GPS Global Positioning System
GSM Global System for Mobile Communications
GTS Generic Traffic Shaping
GUI Graphic User Interface
A.9 H
half-duplex An operation mode of the Ethernet port. In half-duplex mode, a port can only send or
receive data at a time.
handle A component of the panel. It is used to insert or remove boards and RTMs in and out of
slots.
Hardware loopback A connection mode in which a fiber jumper is used to connect the input optical interface
to the output optical interface of a board to achieve signal loopback.
HDLC High level Data Link Control
HEC Header Error Control
History alarm The confirmed alarms that have been saved in the memory and other external memories.

History Performance The performance data that is stored in the history register or that is autoreported and
Data stored in the NMS.
HP Higher Order Path
HPT Higher Order Path Termination
A.10 I
IC Integrated Circuit
IDU Indoor Unit
IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers
IETF Internet Engineering Task Force
IF Intermediate Frequency
IGMP See Internet Group Management Protocol
IGMP Snooping IGMP proxy means that in some network topologies, the device does not set up the
multicast routes, but to learn the information about the accessed multicast group members
and forward it to the upstream multicast router. The upstream multicast router sets up
the multicast routes.
IMA frame The IMA frame is used as the unit of control in the IMA protocol. It is a logical frame
defined as M consecutive cells, numbered 0 to M-l, transmitted on each of the N links
in an IMA group.
Input jitter tolerance The maximum amplitude of sinusoidal jitter at a given jitter frequency, which, when
modulating the signal at an equipment input port, results in no more than two errored
seconds cumulative, where these errored seconds are integrated over successive 30
second measurement intervals.
Intelligent power The factors such as fiber cut, degradation of equipment, and removal of connectors may
adjusting result in the loss of the optical power signals. The function of intelligent power adjusting
(IPA) enables the ROP laser and booster amplifier (BA) of a section to be shut down
automatically. In this way, the maintainers, their eyes in particular, can be protected for
the exposed optical fibers when they are performing the repairs.
Interface board area The area for the interface boards on the subrack.
Internal cable The cables and optical fibers which are used for interconnecting electrical interfaces and
optical interfaces within the cabinet.
Internet Group The protocol for managing the membership of Internet Protocol multicast groups among
Management Protocol the TCP/IP protocols. It is used by IP hosts and adjacent multicast routers to establish
and maintain multicast group memberships.
IP Internet Protocol
IP address In the TCP/IP protocol, it is used to uniquely identify the 32-bit address of the
communication port, An IP address consists of a network ID and a unique host ID. An
IP address consists of the decimal values of its eight bytes, separated with periods; for
example,192.168.7.27.
IP over DCC The IP Over DCC follows TCP/IP telecommunications standards and controls the remote
NEs through the Internet. The IP Over DCC means that the IP over DCC uses overhead
DCC byte (the default is D1-D3) for communication.

IPA See Intelligent power adjusting

IS-IS Intermedia System-Intermedia System
ISDN Integrated Services Digital Network
ISO International Standard Organization
ISP Internet Service Provider
IST Internal Spanning Tree
ITU-T International Telecommunication Union Telecommunication Standardization
A.11 J
Jitter Short waveform variations caused by vibration, voltage fluctuations, and control system
instability.
jitter tolerance Jitter tolerance is defined as the peak-to-peak amplitude of sinusoidal jitter applied on
the input ATM-PON signal that causes a 1 dB optical power penalty at the optical
equipment.
A.12 L
label A mark on a cable, a subrack, or a cabinet for identification.
Label A short identifier that is of fixed length and local significance. A label is used to uniquely
identify the FEC to which a packet belongs. A label does not contain topology
information. It is carried in the header of a packet and does not contain topology
information.
LACP See Link Aggregation Control Protocol
LAG See link aggregation group
LAN Local Area Network
LAPS Link Access Procedure-SDH
Laser A component that generates directional optical waves of narrow wavelengths. The laser
light has better coherence than ordinary light. The fiber system takes the semi-conductor
laser as the light source.
Layer A concept used to allow the transport network functionality to be described hierarchically
as successive levels; each layer being solely concerned with the generation and transfer
of its characteristic information.
layer 2 switch A data forwarding method. In LAN, a network bridge or 802.3 Ethernet switch transmits
and distributes packet data based on the MAC address. Since the MAC address is the
second layer of the OSI model, this data forwarding method is called layer 2 switch.
LB See Loopback
LBM Loopback Message
LBR Loopback Reply
LC Lucent Connector

LCAS See Link Capacity Adjustment Scheme

LCD Liquid Crystal Display
LCT See Local craft terminal
License A permission that the vendor provides for the user with a specific function, capacity, and
durability of a product. A license can be a file or a serial number. Usually the license
consists of encrypted codes, and the operation authority varies with different level of
license.
Link In the topology view, a link is used to identify the physical or logical connection between
two topological nodes.
Link Aggregation Link Aggregation Control Protocol (LACP) is part of an IEEE specification (802.3ad)
Control Protocol that allows you to bundle several physical ports to form a single logical channel. LACP
allows a switch to negotiate an automatic bundle by sending LACP packets to the peer.
link aggregation group An aggregation that allows one or more links to be aggregated together to form a link
aggregation group so that a MAC client can treat the link aggregation group as if it were
a single link.
Link Capacity The Link Capacity Adjustment Scheme (LCAS) is designed to allow the dynamic
Adjustment Scheme provisioning of bandwidth, using VCAT, to meet customer requirements.
LLC Logical Link Control
Local craft terminal A single layer network management scheme that manages a transmission network
consisting of a maximum of five NEs. In this way, the comprehensive management of
the multi-service transmission network is achieved. Normally, the cross-over network
cables and serial port cables are used to connect the local craft terminal (LCT) to an NE.
Then, the LCT can configure and maintain a single NE.
Locked switching When the switching condition is satisfied, this function disables the service from being
switched from the working channel to the protection channel. When the service has been
switched, the function enables the service to be restored from the protection channel to
the working channel.
LOF Loss of frame
LOM Loss Of Multiframe
Loopback A troubleshooting technique that returns a transmitted signal to its source so that the
signal or message can be analyzed for errors.
LOS Loss Of Signal
Lower Threshold When the performance event count value is smaller than a certain value, a threshold-
crossing event occurs. The value is the lower threshold.
LP Lower Order Path
LPT Link State Pass Through
LSP Label Switched Path
LSR Label Switching Router
LT Link Trace

A.13 M
MA See Maintenance Association
MAC Medium Access Control
Maintenance That portion of a Service Instance, preferably all of it or as much as possible, the
Association connectivity of which is maintained by CFM. It is also a full mesh of Maintenance
Entities.
Maintenance Domain The network or the part of the network for which faults in connectivity are to be managed,
belonging to a single administration. The boundary of a Maintenance Domain is defined
by a set DSAPs, each of which may become a point of connectivity to a Service Instance.
MAN See Metropolitan Area Network
Manual switching A protection switching. When the protection path is normal and there is no request of a
higher level switching, the service is manually switched from the working path to the
protection path, to test whether the network still has the protection capability.
Mapping A procedure by which tributaries are adapted into virtual containers at the boundary of
an SDH network.
Marking-off template A quadrate cardboard with four holes. It is used to mark the positions of the installation
holes for the cabinet.
MBS Maximum Burst Size
MCF Message Communication Function
MCR Minimum Cell Rate
MD See Maintenance Domain
Mean launched power The average power of a pseudo-random data sequence coupled into the fibre by the
transmitter.
MEP Maintenance End Point
Metropolitan Area A metropolitan area network (MAN) is a network that interconnects users with computer
Network resources in a geographic area or region larger than that covered by even a large local
area network (LAN) but smaller than the area covered by a wide area network (WAN).
The term is applied to the interconnection of networks in a city into a single larger
network (which may then also offer efficient connection to a wide area network). It is
also used to mean the interconnection of several local area networks by bridging them
with backbone lines. The latter usage is also sometimes referred to as a campus network.
MIB Management Information Base
MIP Maintenance Intermediate Point
MODEM MOdulator-DEModulator
MP Maintenance Point
MPID Maintenance Point Identification
MPLS See Multi-Protocol Label Switch
MS Multiplex Section
MSA Multiplex Section Adaptation

MSOH See Multiplex Section Overhead

MSP See multiplex section protection
MST Multiplex Section Termination
MSTI Multiple Spanning Tree Instance
MSTP See Multi-service transmission platform
MSTP See Multiple spanning tree protocol
MTIE Maximum Time Interval Error
MTU Maximum Transmission Unit
Multi-Protocol Label A technology that uses short tags of fixed length to encapsulate packets in different link
Switch layers, and provides connection-oriented switching for the network layer on the basis of
IP routing and control protocols. It improves the cost performance and expandability of
networks, and is beneficial to routing.
Multi-service It is based on the SDH platform, capable of accessing, processing and transmitting TDM
transmission platform services, ATM services, and Ethernet services, and providing unified management of
these services.
Multicast A process of transmitting packets of data from one source to many destinations. The
destination address of the multicast packet uses Class D address, that is, the IP address
ranges from 224.0.0.0 to 239.255.255.255. Each multicast address represents a multicast
group rather than a host.
Multiple spanning tree The MSTP can be used in a loop network. Using an algorithm, the MSTP blocks
protocol redundant paths so that the loop network can be trimmed as a tree network. In this case,
the proliferation and endless cycling of packets is avoided in the loop network. The
protocol that introduces the mapping between VLANs and multiple spanning trees. This
solves the problem that data cannot be normally forwarded in a VLAN because in STP/
RSTP, only one spanning tree corresponds to all the VLANs.
Multiplex Section The overhead that comprises rows 5 to 9 of the SOH of the STM-N signal. See SOH
Overhead definition.
multiplex section A function, which is performed to provide capability for switching a signal between and
protection including two multiplex section termination (MST) functions, from a "working" to a
"protection" channel.
Multiplexing A procedure by which multiple lower order path layer signals are adapted into a higher
order path or the multiple higher order path layer signals are adapted into a multiplex
section.
A.14 N
N+1 protection A radio link protection system composed of N working channels and one protection
channel.
NE See network element
NE Explorer The main operation interface, of the U2000, which is used to manage the OptiX
equipment. In the NE Explorer, the user can configure, manage and maintain the NE,
boards, and ports on a per-NE basis.

network element A network element (NE) contains both the hardware and the software running on it. One
NE is at least equipped with one system control board which manages and monitors the
entire network element. The NE software runs on the system control board.
network node interface The interface at a network node which is used to interconnect with another network node.
network segment Network Segment means any discrete part of the Network.
NLP Normal Link Pulse
NMS Network Management System
NNI See network node interface
NPC Network Parameter Control
nrt-VBR Non Real-Time Variable Bit Rate
NRZ Non Return to Zero code
NSAP Network Service Access Point
NTP Network Time Protocol
A.15 O
OA See Optical Amplifier
OADM Optical Add/Drop Multiplexer
OAM Operations, Administration and Maintenance
OAM auto-discovery In the case of OAM auto-discovery, two interconnected ports, enabled with the Ethernet
in the First Mile OAM (EFM OAM) function, negotiate to determine whether the mutual
EFM OAM configuration match with each other by sending and responding to the OAM
protocol data unit (OAMPDU). If the mutual EFM OAM configuration match, the two
ports enter the EFM OAM handshake phase. In the handshake phase, the two ports
regularly send the OAMPDU to maintain the neighborhood relation.
OCP See Optical Channel Protection
ODF See Optical Distribution Frame
ODU Outdoor Unit
OFS Out-of-frame Second
OHA Overhead Access Function
OLT Optical Line Terminal
Online Help The capability of many programs and operating systems to display advice or instructions
for using their features when so requested by the user.
ONU Optical Network Unit
OOF Out of Frame
optical add/drop A process that adds the optical signals of various wavelengths to one channel and drop
multiplexing the optical signals of various wavelengths from one channel.
Optical Amplifier Devices or subsystems in which optical signals can be amplified by means of the
stimulated emission taking place in a suitable active medium.

Optical attenuator A passive device that increases the attenuation in a fiber link. It is used to ensure that the
optical power of the signals received at the receive end is not extremely high. It is
available in two types: fixed attenuator and variable attenuator.
Optical Channel In an optical transmission link that contains multiple wavelengths, when a certain
Protection wavelength goes faulty, the services at the wavelength can be protected if the optical
channel protection is configured.
Optical Connector A component normally attached to an optical cable or piece of apparatus for the purpose
of providing frequent optical interconnection/disconnection of optical fibers or cables.
Optical Distribution A frame which is used to transfer and spool fibers.
Frame
Optical Interface A component that connects several transmit or receive units.
Optical Time Domain A device that sends a very short pulse of light down a fiber optic communication system
Reflectometer and measures the time history of the pulse reflection.
orderwire A channel that provides voice communication between operation engineers or
maintenance engineers of different stations.
OSI Open Systems Interconnection
OSN Optical Switch Node
OSPF Open Shortest Path First
OTDR See Optical Time Domain Reflectometer
OTU Optical Transponder Unit. A device or subsystem that converts the accessed client signals
into the G.694.1/G.694.2-compliant WDM wavelength.
Output optical power The ranger of optical energy level of output signals.
Overhead Extra bits in a digital stream used to carry information besides traffic signals. Orderwire,
for example, would be considered overhead information.
A.16 P
Paired slots Two slots of which the overheads can be passed through by using the bus on the
backplane. When the SCC unit is faulty or offline, the overheads can be passed through
between the paired slots by using the directly connected overhead bus. When two SDH
boards form an MSP ring, the boards need to be inserted in paired slots so that the K
bytes can be passed through.
pass through When services are passed through, it indicates that transmission equipment does not
process the service received and only detects the signal quality.
Path A performance resource object defined in the network management system. The left end
of a path is a device node whose port needs to be specified and the right end of a path is
a certain IP address which can be configured by the user. By defining a path in the
network management system, a user can test the performance of a network path between
a device port and an IP address. The tested performance may be the path delay, packet
loss ratio or other aspects.
path protection Path protection is a special case of fixed partitioning sub-path protection technique where
every primary path is partitioned into only one sub-path (i.e., h = D, diameter of the
network).

PBS Peak Burst Size

PC Personal Computer
PCM Pulse Code Modulation
PCR Peak Cell Rate
PDH See Plesiochronous Digital Hierarchy
PE Provider Edge. A PE is the name of the device or set of devices at the edge of the provider
network with the functionality that is needed to interface with the customer.
Performance register Performance register is the memory space for performance event counts, including 15-
min current performance register, 24-hour current performance register, 15-min history
performance register, 24-hour history performance register, UAT register and CSES
register. The object of performance event monitoring is the board functional module, so
every board functional module has a performance register. A performance register is
used to count the performance events taking place within a period of operation time, so
as to evaluate the quality of operation from the angle of statistics.
performance threshold The performance threshold is a limit for generating an alarm for a selected entity. When
the measurement data satisfies the preset alarm threshold or exceeds the preset grads,
the PM subsystem generates a performance alarm.
Performance threshold Performance events usually have upper and lower thresholds. When the performance
event count value exceeds the upper threshold, a performance threshold-crossing event
is generated; when the performance event count value is below the upper threshold for
a period of time, the performance threshold-crossing event is ended. In this way,
performance jitter caused by some sudden events can be shielded. A few performance
events only have one threshold, which is the special case that upper threshold and lower
threshold are equal.
Permanent Virtual Traditional ATM Permanent Virtual Connection that is established/released upon a
Connection request initiated by a management request procedure (that is all nodes supporting the
connections need to be instructed by the network management).
PGND Protection Ground
PIM-SM Protocol Independent Multicast-Sparse Mode
PIR Peak Information Rate
plesiochronous Qualifying two time-varying phenomena, time-scales, or signals in which corresponding
significant instants occur at the same rate, any variations in rate being constrained within
specified limits. Note: Corresponding significant instants are separated by time intervals
having durations which may vary without limit.
Plesiochronous Digital The Plesiochronous Digital Hierarchy (PDH) is a technology used in
Hierarchy telecommunications networks to transport large quantities of data over digital transport
equipment such as fibre optic and microwave radio systems.
PLL Phase-Locked Loop
Pointer An indicator whose value defines the frame offset of a virtual container with respect to
the frame reference of the transport entity on which it is supported.
POS Packet Over SDH
Power box A direct current power distribution box at the upper part of a cabinet, which supplies
power for the subracks in the cabinet.

PPP Point-to-Point Protocol

PRBS See Pseudo-Random Binary Sequence
PRC Primary Reference Clock
Primitive In the hierarchy of signaling system No.7, when the upper layer applies for services from
the lower layer or the lower layer transmits services to the upper layer, the data is
exchanged between the user and the service provider. In this case, the data transmitted
between adjacent layers is called primitive.
Private Line The line, such as the subscriber cable and trunk cable, which are hired by the
telecommunication carrier and are used to meet the special requirement of the user. The
line is also called hired line. Generally, the switch device is not contained.
protection grounding A cable which connects the equipment and the protection grounding bar. Usually, the
cable is yellow and green.
Protection path A specific path that is part of a protection group and is labeled protection.
Protection service A specific service that is part of a protection group and is labelled protection.
Protection subnet In the NMS, the protection subnet becomes a concept of network level other than
multiplex section rings or path protection rings. The protection sub-network involves
NEs and fibre cable connections.
Protection View The user interface, of the network management system, which is used to manage
protection in the network.
PS Packet Switched
PSD Power Spectral Density
Pseudo-Random A sequence that is random in a sense that the value of an element is independent of the
Binary Sequence values of any of the other elements, similar to real random sequences.
PVC See Permanent Virtual Connection
PW Pseudo Wire
PW Pseudo wire. A mechanism that bears the simulated services between PEs on the PSN
(Packet Switched Network).
A.17 Q
QoS See Quality of Service
Quality of Service Quality of Service, which determines the satisfaction of a subscriber for a service. QoS
is influenced by the following factors applicable to all services: service operability,
service accessibility, service maintainability, and service integrity.
A.18 R
Rapid Spanning Tree An evolution of the Spanning Tree Protocol, providing for faster spanning tree
Protocol convergence after a topology change. The RSTP protocol is backward compatible with
the STP protocol.
RDI Remote Defect Indication

Receiver Sensitivity Receiver sensitivity is defined as the minimum acceptable value of average received
power at point R to achieve a 1 x 10-10 BER.
Reference clock A reference clock is usually of high stability , accuracy and autonomy and it's frequency
can be compared with other clock as a benchmark.
REG A piece of equipment or device that regenerates electrical signals.
Regeneration The process of receiving and reconstructing a digital signal so that the amplitudes,
waveforms and timing of its signal elements are constrained within specified limits.
Regenerator section The regenerator section overhead comprises rows 1 to 3 of the SOH of the STM-N signal.
overhead
Remote optical An remote optical amplifier sub-system designed for applications where power supply
pumping amplifier and monitoring systems are unavailable. The ROPA subsystem is a power compensation
(ROPA) solution to the ultra-long distance long hop (LHP) transmission.
Resilient Packet Ring A network topology being developed as a new standard for fiber optic rings.
RF Radio Frequency
RFA Request For Announcement
RFI Request for Information
ring network A ring network is a network topology in which each node connects to exactly two other
nodes, forming a circular pathway for signals.
RNC Radio Network Controller
route A route is the path that network traffic takes from its source to its destination. In a TCP/
IP network, each IP packet is routed independently. Routes can change dynamically.
router Links a local network to a remote network. For example, your company's network
probably uses a router to connect to the Internet. Can be used to connect a LAN to a
LAN, a WAN to a WAN, or a LAN to the Internet.
RP Rendezvous Point
RPR See Resilient Packet Ring
RS232 In the asynchronous transfer mode and there is no hand-shaking signal. It can
communicate with RS232 and RS422 of other stations in point-to-point mode and the
transmission is transparent. Its highest speed is 19.2kbit/s.
RS422 The specification that defines the electrical characteristics of balanced voltage digital
interface circuits. The interface can change to RS232 via the hardware jumper and others
are the same as RS232.
RSTP See Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol
RTN Radio Transmission Node
RX Receiver

A.19 S
S1 byte In an SDH network, each network element traces step by step to the same clock reference
source through a specific clock synchronization path, thus realizing the synchronization
of the whole network. If a clock reference source traced by the NE is lost, the clock of
this NE will trace another clock reference source of lower level. To implement protection
switching of clocks in the whole network, the NE must learn about the clock quality
information of the clock reference source it traces. Therefore, ITU-T defines S1 byte to
transmit the network synchronization status information. It uses the lower four bits of
the multiplex section overhead S1 byte to indicate 16 types of synchronization quality
grades. The specific coding information is shown in the following table. Auto protection
switching of clocks in the synchronous network can be implemented by using S1 byte
and following the certain switching protocol.
SAN Storage Area Network
SC Square Connector
SCR Sustainable Cell Rate
SD See space diversity
SD See Signal Degrade
SDH See Synchronous Digital Hierarchy
SDP Serious Disturbance Period
SEC SDH Equipment Clock
Section The portion of a SONET transmission facility, including terminating points, between (i)
a terminal network element and a regenerator or (ii) two regenerators. A terminating
point is the point after signal regeneration at which performance monitoring is (or may
be) done.
Self-healing Self-healing is the establishment of a replacement connection by network without the
NMC function. When a connection failure occurs, the replacement connection is found
by the network elements and rerouted depending on network resources available at that
time.
Serial port extended The ECC channel realized by means of serial port.
ECC
server A network device that provides services to network users by managing shared resources,
often used in the context of a client-server architecture for a LAN.
Service protection A measure that ensures that the services can be received at the receive end.
SES Severely Errored Second
SETS Synchronous Equipment Timing Source
settings Parameters of a system or operation that can be selected by the user.
SF See Signal Fail
SF See SF
SF Signal Fail. A signal that indicates the associated data has failed in the sense that a near-
end defect condition (non-degrade defect) is active.

SFP See Small Form-Factor Pluggable

SHDSL Single-line High speed Digital Subscriber Line
Side Mode Suppression The Side Mode Suppression Ratio (SMSR) is the ratio of the largest peak of the total
Ratio source spectrum to the second largest peak.
signal cable Common signal cables cover the E1cable, network cable, and other non-subscriber signal
cable.
Signal Degrade SD is a signal indicating the associated data has degraded in the sense that a degraded
defect (e.g., dDEG) condition is active.
Signal Fail SF is a signal indicating the associated data has failed in the sense that a near-end defect
condition (not being the degraded defect) is active.
Simple Network A network management protocol of TCP/IP. It enables remote users to view and modify
Management Protocol the management information of a network element. This protocol ensures the
transmission of management information between any two points. The polling
mechanism is adopted to provide basic function sets. According to SNMP, agents, which
can be hardware as well as software, can monitor the activities of various devices on the
network and report these activities to the network console workstation. Control
information about each device is maintained by a management information block.
slide rail Angle-bars on which shelves and chassis may slide and be supported within a cabinet or
shelf.
Small Form-Factor A specification for a new generation of optical modular transceivers.
Pluggable
SMSR See Side Mode Suppression Ratio
SNC SubNetwork Connection
SNCMP See Subnetwork connection multipath protection
SNCP See SubNetwork Connection Protection
SNCP node Set the SNC node on the protection sub-network to support sub-network connection
protection that spans protection sub-networks. The SNCP node of the ring sub-network
can support electric circuit dually feed and selectively receive a timeslot out of the ring,
thus implementing sub-network connection protection. The SNCP node is generally set
on the node on the line board with the path protection type of the dual fed and selectively
received.
SNCTP See Subnetwork Connection Tunnel Protection
SNMP See Simple Network Management Protocol
SNR Signal Noise Ratio
space diversity A protection mode. The main and standby radios are set up in Hot Standby mode, but
are connected to their own antennas. Both antennas, separated by a specific distance, are
receiving the signal transmitted from the online radio at the other end of the lin
Spanning Tree Protocol Spanning Tree Protocol. STP is a protocol that is used in the LAN to remove the loop.
STP applies to the redundant network to block some undesirable redundant paths through
certain algorithms and prune a loop network into a loop-free tree network.
SPI Synchronous Physical Interface
SSM See Synchronization Status Message

SSU Synchronization Supply Unit

Statistical multiplexing A multiplexing technique whereby information from multiple logical channels can be
transmitted across a single physical channel. It dynamically allocates bandwidth only to
active input channels, to make better use of available bandwidth and allow more devices
to be connected than with other multiplexing techniques. Compare with TDM.
STM-4 SDH Transport Module -4
STP See Spanning Tree Protocol
Sub-network number It is used to differentiate the different network sections in the sub-network conference.
Actually it is the first several digits (one or two) of the user phone number. An orderwire
phone number is composed of the sub-network number and the user number.
subnet A logical entity in the transmission network, which comprises a group of network
management objects. A subnet can contain NEs and other subnets.
subnet mask The technique used by the IP protocol to determine which network segment packets are
destined for. The subnet mask is a binary pattern that is stored in the client machine,
server or router and is matched with the IP address.
Subnetwork connection The only difference is that SNCP is of 1+1 protection and SNCMP is of N+1 protection.
multipath protection That is, several backup channels protect one active channel in SNCMP.
SubNetwork A working subnetwork connection is replaced by a protection subnetwork connection if
Connection Protection the working subnetwork connection fails, or if its performance falls below a required
level.
Subnetwork SNCTP provides a VC-4 level channel protection. When the working channel is faulty,
Connection Tunnel the services of the entire VC-4 path can be switched over to the protection channel.
Protection
Support A part used to support and fix a cabinet on the antistatic floor
Suppression state An attribute set to determine whether an NE monitors the alarm. Under suppression
status, NE will not monitor the corresponding alarm conditions and the alarm will not
occur even when the alarm conditions are met.
SVC Switching Virtual Connection
Switching priority There may be the case that several protected boards need to be switched; thus the tributary
board switching priority should be set. If the switching priority of each board is set the
same, the tributary board that fails later cannot be switched. The board with higher
priority can preempt the switching of that with lower priority.
Switching restoration It refers to the period of time between the start of detecting and the moment when the
time line is switched back to the original status after protection switching occurs in the MSP
sub-network.
Synchronization Status A message that is used to transmit the quality levels of timing signals on the synchronous
Message timing link. Through this message, the node clocks of the SDH network and the
synchronization network can aquire upper stream clock information, and the two perform
operations on the corresponding clocks, such as tracing, switchover, or converting hold),
and then forward the synchronization information of this node to down stream.

Synchronous Digital SDH is a transmission scheme that follows ITU-T G.707, G.708, and G.709. It defines
Hierarchy the transmission features of digital signals such as frame structure, multiplexing mode,
transmission rate level, and interface code. SDH is an important part of ISDN and B-
ISDN. It interleaves the bytes of low-speed signals to multiplex the signals to high-speed
counterparts, and the line coding of scrambling is only used only for signals. SDH is
suitable for the fiber communication system with high speed and a large capacity since
it uses synchronous multiplexing and flexible mapping structure.
Synchronous source A clock providing timing services to connected network elements. This would include
clocks conforming to Recommendations G.811, G.812 and G.813.
A.20 T
T2000 The T2000 is a subnet management system (SNMS). In the telecommunication
management network architecture, the T2000 is located between the NE level and
network level, which can support all NE level functions and part of the network level
management functions. See also NM.
T2000 LCT A lite version of T2000. It is an element level management system for the optical
transmission network. It can manage SDH, DWDM and Metro optical transmission
equipment. See also LCT.
Tandem Connection In the SDH transport hierarchy, the TCM is located between the AU/TU management
Monitor layer and HP/LP layer. It uses the N1/N2 byte of POH overhead to monitor the quality
of the transport channels on a transmission section (TCM section).
TCM See Tandem Connection Monitor
TCP/IP See Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol
TCP/IP Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol
TDM Time Division Multiplexing
tie wrap N/A
TIM Trace Identifier Mismatch
Time Slot Continuously repeating interval of time or a time period in which two devices are able
to interconnect.
Time Synchronization Also called the moment synchronization, time synchronization means that the
synchronization of the absolute time, which requires that the starting time of the signals
keeps consistent with the UTC time.
TM Terminal Multiplexer
TMN Telecommunications Management Network
ToS See Type of Service
TPS See Tributary Protection Switch
Trail management A network level management function of the network management system. Through trail
function management, you can configure end-to-end services, view graphic interface and visual
routes of a trail, query detailed information of a trail, filter, search and locate a trail
quickly, manage and maintain trails in a centralized manner, manage alarms and
performance data by trail, and print a trail report.

Transceiver A transmitter and receiver housed together in a single unit and having some circuits in
common, often for portable or mobile use.
Transmission Control Common name for the suite of protocols developed to support the construction of
Protocol/Internet worldwide internetworks.
Protocol
transparent A process during which the signaling protocol or data is not processed in the content but
transmission encapsulated in the format for the processing of the next phase.
Tray A component that can be installed in the cabinet for holding chassis or other devices.
Tributary loopback A fault can be located for each service path by performing loopback to each path of the
tributary board. There are three kinds of loopback modes. 1. No loopback: It is the normal
status. No loopback is needed when the equipment runs efficiently; 2. Outloop: When
arriving at the line board after passing the input port in the local NE, the input signal is
directly looped back to the service output end; 3. Inloop: The input signal is returned
along the original trail from the tributary board of the target NE.
Tributary Protection Tributary protection switching, a function provided by the equipment, is intended to
Switch protect N tributary processing boards through a standby tributary processing board.
Tributary unit An information structure which provides adaptation between the lower order path layer
and the higher order path layer. It consists of an information payload (the lower order
VC) and a TU pointer which indicates the offset of the payload frame start relative to
the higher order VC frame start.
Tributary Unit Group One or more Tributary Units, occupying fixed, defined positions in a higher order VC-
n payload is termed a Tributary Unit Group (TUG). TUGs are defined in such a way that
mixed capacity payloads made up of different size Tributary Units can be constructed
to increase flexibility of the transport network
TTL Time To Live
TU Tributary Unit
TUG See Tributary Unit Group
Type of Service A field in an IP packet (IP datagram) that is used for quality of service (QoS). The TOS
field is 8 bits, broken into five sub-fields.
A.21 U
UART Universal Asynchronous Receiver/Transmitter
UAS Unavailable Second
UBR Unspecified Bit Rate
underfloor cabling The cables connected cabinets and other devices are routed underfloor.
UNI See User Network Interface
Unprotected Pertaining to the transmission of the services that are not protected, the services cannot
be switched to the protection channel if the working channel is faulty or the service is
interrupted, because protection mechanism is not configured.
Unprotected sub- It refers to a sub-network without any protection mechanism. The purpose of such
network configuration is to provide the basic data of trail protection for the subsequent trail
management.

Upload An operation to report some or all configuration data of an NE to the T2000. The
configuration data then covers the configuration data stored at the T2000 side.
Upper threshold The critical value that can induce unexpected events if exceeded.
UPS Uninterruptible Power Supply
Upward cabling Cables or fibers connect the rack with other equipment from the top of the cabinet.
User A client user of the NMS. The user name and password uniquely identifies the operation
rights of a user in the NMS.
User Network Interface The interface between a network and the user of network services.
UTC Universal Time Coordinated
A.22 V
VB Virtual Bridge
VBR Variable Bit Rate
VC See Virtual concatenation
VCG Virtual Concatenation Group
VCI Virtual Channel Identifier
Virtual concatenation N/A
Virtual Container A Virtual Container is the information structure used to support path layer connections
in the SDH. It consists of information payload and path Overhead (POH) information
fields organized in a block frame structure which repeats every 125 or 500 μs.
Virtual local area A subset of the active topology of a Bridged Local Area Network. Associated with each
network VLAN is a VLAN Identifier (VID).
Virtual Private The extension of a private network that encompasses encapsulated, encrypted, and
Network authenticated links across shared or public networks. VPN connections can provide
remote access and routed connections to private networks over the Internet.
VLAN See Virtual local area network
VP Virtual Path
VPI Virtual Path Identifier
VPN See Virtual Private Network
A.23 W
Wait to Restore Time A period of time that must elapse before a - from a fault recovered - trail/connection can
be used again to transport the normal traffic signal and/or to select the normal traffic
signal from.
Wait-to-Restore A period of time that must elapse from a recovered fault before an LSP/span can be used
again to transport the normal traffic and/or to select the normal traffic from.
WAN Wide Area Network

Wander The long-term variations of the significant instants of a digital signal from their ideal
position in time (where long-term implies that these variations are of frequency less than
10Hz).
washer A washer is a thin flat ring of metal or rubber which is placed over a bolt before the nut
is screwed on.
Wavelength Division Wavelength Division Multiplexing. WDM technology utilizes the characteristics of
Multiplexing broad bandwidth and low attenuation of single mode optical fibre, uses multiple
wavelengths as carriers, and allows multiple channels to transmit simultaneously in a
single fibre.
Wavelength protection The wavelength protection group is important to describe the wavelength protection
group structure. Its function is similar to that of the protection subnet in the SDH NE. The
wavelength path protection can only work with the correct configuration of the
wavelength protection group.
WDM See Wavelength Division Multiplexing
WFQ Weighted Fair Queuing
Winding pipe A tool for fiber routing, which acts as the corrugated pipe.
Working path The channels allocated to transport the normal traffic.
WRED Weighted Random Early Detection
WTR See Wait-to-Restore
WTR See Wait to Restore Time


Manual Do Produto

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Manual Do Produto

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

00384268

OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission

HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD.

Trademarks and Permissions

Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 07 (2010-11-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential i

About This Document

Product Name Version

OptiX OSN 1500 V100R008

2 Function This chapter generally describes the features of the OptiX

3 Hardware Describes the mechanical structure and the adaptable

Issue 07 (2010-11-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential iii

4 Software Describes the software system of the OptiX OSN 1500. It

8 Protection Describes protection modes (including equipment level and

10 OAM This chapter describes main technical characteristics of the

11 Security Management This chapter describes main technical characteristics of the

12 Technical Specifications This chapter describes the hardware dimension, interface

13 Compliant Standards This appendix lists international standards to which the

14 Basic Principle This appendix lists the basic principle of several

iv Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 07 (2010-11-30)

Indicates a hazard with a high level of risk which, if not

Indicates a hazard with a medium or low level of risk which,

Indicates a potentially hazardous situation that, if not

NOTE Provides additional information to emphasize or

Times New Roman Normal paragraphs are in Times New Roman.

Italic Book titles are in italics.

Boldface The keywords of a command line are in boldface.

Italic Command arguments are in italic.

[] Items (keywords or arguments) in square brackets [ ] are

{ x | y | ... } Alternative items are grouped in braces and separated by

[ x | y | ... ] Optional alternative items are grouped in square brackets

{ x | y | ... } * Alternative items are grouped in braces and separated by

Issue 07 (2010-11-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential v

Updates in Issue 07 (2010-11-30) Based on Product Version V100R008

vi Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 07 (2010-11-30)

Updates in Issue 06 (2010-03-31) Based on Product Version V100R008

Updates in Issue 05 (2009-07-26) Based on Product Version V100R008

Updates in Issue 04 (2009-02-20) Based on Product Version V100R008

Updates in Issue 03 (2008-07-30) Based on Product Version V100R008

Updates in Issue 02 (2008-04-30) Based on Product Version V100R008

Updates in Issue 01 (2007-12-25) Based on Product Version V100R008

Issue 07 (2010-11-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential vii

Updates in Issue 03 (2007-12-15) Based on Product Version V100R007

Updates in Issue 02 (2007-09-10) Based on Product Version V100R007

Updates in Issue 01 (2007-06-15) Based on Product Version V100R007

Updates in Issue 03 (2007-03-30) Based on Product Version V100R006

viii Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 07 (2010-11-30)

Several bugs in this document of the previous version are fixed.

Updates in Issue 02 (2007-01-10) Based on Product Version V100R006

Updates in Issue 01 (2006-09-20) Based on Product Version V100R006

Issue 07 (2010-11-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential ix

About This Document...................................................................................................................iii

Issue 07 (2010-11-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential xi

xii Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 07 (2010-11-30)

5.4 SAN Features................................................................................................................................................5-35

Issue 07 (2010-11-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential xiii

7.21 Protocol Encryption.....................................................................................................................................7-36

xiv Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 07 (2010-11-30)

10.2 Network Management.................................................................................................................................10-3

Issue 07 (2010-11-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential xv

13.6 EMC Standards...........................................................................................................................................13-7

xvi Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 07 (2010-11-30)

Issue 07 (2010-11-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential xvii